Electronic Theatre Controls | Emphasis Lighting Control System | User manual | Electronic Theatre Controls Emphasis Lighting Control System User manual

emphasis
®
Lighting Control System
Console User Manual
v2.0.1
C o p y r i g h t © E le c tr o n i c T h e a t r e C o n t r o l s , I n c .
All Rights reserved.
P r o d u c t in f o r m a t i on a n d s p e c i f i c a t i o n s s u bj e c t t o c h a n g e .
P a r t N u m b er : 4200M1211-2.0.1 R e v A
Released: November 2004
ET C ®, E m p h a s i s ®, E x p r e s s io n ®, In s i g h t ™ , I m a g i n e ™ , F o c u s ™ , E x p r e s s ™ , U n i s o n ®,
O b s e s s i o n ® II , E T C N e t 2 ™ , E D M X ™ , S e n s o r ®, a n d W Y S IL i n k ™ a r e e i th e r r eg i s t e r e d t r a d e m a r k s
o r t r a d e m a r k s o f E l e c t r o n i c T h e a t r e C o n t r o l s , I n c . i n th e U n i t e d S ta t e s a n d o t h er c o u n t r i e s .
T h e n a m e W Y S IW Y G ™ i s a tr a d e m a r k o f C A S T L i g h t i n g L i m i t e d .
M i c r o s o f t ® a n d W in d o w s ® a r e r e g i s t e r e d t r a d e m a r k s o f M i c r o s o f t C o r p o r a t i o n i n t h e U n i t e d
S t a t e s a n d o t h e r c o u n tr i e s .
D e l l ® i s a r e g i s t e r e d t r a d e m a r k o f D e l l C o m p u t e r C o r p o r at i o n .
A u t o d e s k ® a n d A u to C A D ® a r e r e g i s t e r e d t r a d e m a r k s o f A u t o d e s k , I n c . , i n t h e U n i t e d S t a te s a n d
o th e r c o u n t r i e s .
Table of Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Help from ETC Technical Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Americas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Asia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Chapter 1
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Emphasis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Server Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Channel Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Facepanels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Emphasis Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Emphasis Facepanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Emphasis Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Emphasis Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Hooking Up the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
System Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Power-up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Multi-console Submaster Fader Support . . . . . . . . . . .16
Login as a Different User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Shut-down Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
How do I find the software version? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Chapter 2
Emphasis Console User Interface . . .21
Emphasis Facepanel Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Express Two-Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Express ECS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Expression ECS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Insight ECS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Setting the Facepanel Type on the Server . . . . . . . . .22
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Console Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Display Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Stage, Blind and Fader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Tracksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
i
Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Expression LED displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Hard keys vs. Softkeys by Facepanel Type . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Channel Concepts in the Emphasis Control System. . . . . .47
HTP vs. LTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Independent Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Preset vs. Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Chapter 3
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
The Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Options Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Clock Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Clear Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Print Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Macro List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Time Code Events and Real Time Programs . . . . . . .58
Channel Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Moving Light Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Interactivity with Emphasis Visualization . . . . . . . . . . .72
Range Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
EDMX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Disable/Enable the Facepanel DMX Ports . . . . . . . . .75
Disable/Enable EDMX on Powerup and Show Read .75
EDMX Output Range Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Modifying dimmer output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Label Dimmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Patching to a Strand Lighting CD80 Dimmer Rack . . .81
Using the About Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
About Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
About Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
About Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Chapter 4
Live Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Stage Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Fader Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Select Channels, Dimmers and Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . .88
Set Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Capture EDMX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Captured channels and [Release] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Dimmer and Channel Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Solo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
ii
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Moving Light Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Dynamic Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Sneak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Channel Faders (Express Two-Scene/Insight only) .110
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Cue Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Record Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Link Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Using Cues as Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Stage Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Move Before Bright (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Submaster Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Record Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Using [Load Sub] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Using Submasters as Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Time Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Except . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Solo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Chapter 5
Blind Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
List Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Tracksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Cue List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Tracksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Subroutines in Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Subroutines on Submasters (Subs-on-Subs) . . . . . .148
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Blind Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Submaster List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Submaster Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Supermasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
iii
Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Group Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Focus Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Focus Point List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Focus Point Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Chapter 6
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
A/B and C/D Fader Pairs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Fader Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Playback Cue List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Fader Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Cue Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Quickstep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Multi-part Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Effect Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Subroutine Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Submaster Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Subroutines on Submasters (Subs-on-Subs) . . . . . .181
Submaster Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Supermasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Chapter 7
Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Create Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Learn Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Display Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Macro Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Special Macro Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Playback Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Remote Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Startup Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Sample Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Chapter 8
Real Time Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Real Time Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Setting the time and location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Create and Edit Real Time Programs . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Enable Real Time Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Time and Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Chapter 9
Control Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
ETCNet2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
EDMX Basics (ETCNet2 v4.0.0 and above) . . . . . . .204
iv
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
DMX Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
DMX Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Remote Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Remote Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Facepanel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Show Control Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
MIDI Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
ETC MIDI Message Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
MIDI Message definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
MIDI Show Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
MIDI Show Control (MSC) Commands . . . . . . . . . . .216
MSC Frame Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
SMPTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Time Code Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Time Code Events Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Run a Time Code Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Emphasis Serial Button Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Command Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Input Stream Echoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Things to Keep in Mind... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
The Keyword Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Appendix A
System Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Emphasis Visualization and Console Defaults . . . . . . . . .236
Facepanel Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
ASCII Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Emphasis Visualization Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Application Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Emphasis Console Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Expression Facepanel Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Express Facepanel Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Appendix B
Maintenance and Troubleshooting . .243
Return the Facepanel to v3.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Export your Show File to “.shw” Format . . . . . . . . . .244
Create a v3.1 Console Software Disk . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Install v3.1 Console Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Open the Facepanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
v
Spare parts kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Replacing fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Connecting desk lights (Express facepanels only) . . . . . .249
Expression and Insight DIP switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Internal DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
VGA monitor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Connecting DMX cable to facepanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Using an optional pointing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Device check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Connecting an alphanumeric keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Installing Remote Focus Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Connecting MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
MIDI Out/Thru jumper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Connecting SMPTE (Expression and Insight only) . . . . . .258
SMPTE facepanel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Using Remote Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Wiring Remote Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Expression/Insight facepanels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Appendix C
Lighting Playback Controllers . . . . . .263
Expression/Insight LPC Installation and Configuration . . .264
Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Configuration Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Expression/Insight LPC User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
The Cue Playback Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
The Macro Playback Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
The Edit Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Express LPC Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .266
Rack-mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Surface-mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Install Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Configuration Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Express LPC User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Appendix D
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Emphasis Control System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Express Facepanel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Expression Facepanel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Insight Facepanel Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
vi
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Appendix E
Foldout Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Emphasis Control System Riser Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel Connections. . . . . . . . 296
Insight Facepanel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Expression Facepanel Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Express 125/250/ECS Facepanel Overview . . . . . . . . . . 299
Express 24/48 Facepanel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Express 48/96 & 72/144 Facepanel Overview . . . . . . . . 301
Emphasis LPC Facepanel Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Command Keypad Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Express Facepanel Two-Scene Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Setup Two-scene Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Playback Looks using the AB Fader Pair . . . . . . . . .304
Playback Looks with Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
vii
This page intentionally blank.
viii
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Introduction
This manual covers the basic installation and operation of the Emphasis Control System.
Specifically, this volume contains the operational instructions for Emphasis Console, the
facepanel interface to your Emphasis Control System. For information on using Emphasis
Visualization, please see the Emphasis Visualization User Manual.
The introduction contains the following sections:
•
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
•
Help from ETC Technical Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
If you are reading these manuals cover-to-cover, please begin with
the Emphasis Visualization User Manual.
The Emphasis Visualization User Manual contains a Quick Start
chapter that contains a tutorial for new users, and some basic
information for users familiar with WYSIWYG and/or Expressionstyle consoles.
Introduction
1
Using thi s Manual
This manual is intended for use in conjunction with the Emphasis Visualization User
Manual.
This manual assumes that you have a basic familiarity with the Microsoft Windows®
operating system, opening and closing files, closing and resizing windows, using Windows
Explorer, and performing basic disk operations.
In order to be specific about where features and commands are found, the following naming
and text conventions will be used:
Note:
•
Emphasis™ Server (hardware): the computer used to run the Emphasis applications.
This is also referred to simply as the “Server”.
•
Emphasis Facepanel (hardware): the control console hardware. This is also referred
to simply as the “Facepanel”.
•
Emphasis Visualization (software): the application that resides solely on the Server
and provides WYSIWYG™-based functionality.
•
Emphasis Console (software): the application that drives the Facepanel. The Console
displays resemble the traditional Facepanel displays, and can be viewed on either the
Server or Facepanel monitors. This application usually remains hidden, as the displays
can be accessed through the Facepanel and Visualization.
•
Menus and commands found on the Server are indicated in bold text. For example: In
the File menu, click Open.
•
Server keyboard buttons are indicated in all CAPS. For example, TAB or CTRL.
•
Facepanel buttons and softkeys are indicated in bold [brackets]. For example, [Stage]
or [Enter]. Optional keys are indicated in <angle brackets>, for example, <Fixture>
or <Channel>. A note about <S7 - More Softkeys>: this command is always indicated
as optional, and is only indicated once in an instruction regardless of how many pages
of softkeys exist. This is because there is no way to predict what softkey page you are
on at any given time. Press <S7 - More Softkeys> until you find the required command.
•
References to other parts of the manual are indicated in italics. When viewing this
manual electronically, click on the reference to jump to that section of the manual.
Notes are helpful hints and information that is supplemental to the main text.
CAUTION:
WARNING:
A Caution statement indicates situations where there may be undefined or
unwanted consequences of an action, potential for data loss or an equipment
problem.
A Warning statement indicates situations where damage may occur, people may
be harmed, or there are serious or dangerous consequences of an action.
Please email comments about this manual to: TechComm@etcconnect.com
2
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Help from ETC Technical Services
If you are having difficulties, your most convenient resources are the references given in
this manual and the Help system. To search more widely, try the ETC website at
www.etcconnect.com. If none of these resources is sufficient, contact ETC Technical
Services directly at one of the offices identified below. Emergency service is available from
all ETC offices outside of normal business hours.
When calling for help, please have the following information handy:
•
Console model and serial number (located on back panel)
•
Emphasis Server serial number (located inside the door on the front of the Server case)
•
Software version (see How do I find the software version?, page 19)
•
Dimmer manufacturer and installation type
•
Moving light information (manufacturer, mode, data cable type)
•
Other components in your system (Unison®, other consoles, etc.)
Americas
ETC International
Technical Services Department
3031 Pleasant View Road
Middleton, WI 53562
+1-800-775-4382
+1-608 831-4116
service@etcconnect.com
Europe
ETC Europe Ltd.
Technical Services Department
5 Victoria Industrial Estate
Victoria Road,
London W3 6UU England
+44 (0)20 8896 1000
service@etceurope.com
Asia
ETC Asia, Ltd.
Technical Services Department
Room 605-606
Tower III, Enterprise Square
9 Sheung Yuet Road
Kowloon Bay, Kowloon, Hong Kong
+852 2799 1220
service@etcasia.com
Introduction
3
This page intentionally blank.
4
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Chapter 1
System Overview
Emphasis integrates the functionality of WYSIWYG with the Expression-style control
consoles to give you a powerful, but user-friendly, control system offering both a graphical,
point-and-click environment and a tactile button-and-wheel interface. Emphasis ensures
consistency and accuracy with total integration of data across all modes. Data input in any
mode is applied through the paperwork, on the light plot, in the console patch, on reports,
and on screen, in every view.
This chapter contains the following sections:
1
•
Emphasis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
•
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
•
Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
•
System Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
•
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
System Overview
5
Emphasi s Opti ons
Emphasis systems are created by choosing the server type, maximum channel count and
Facepanel type. Emphasis is offered as an upgrade to an existing Express or Expressionstyle console (see below for compatible Facepanel types), or as a complete package.
Server Types
•
3D - Includes full console feature set and full visualization functionality: paperwork and
presentation tools, data tasks, 3D CAD drafting, complete visualization and rendering.
The 3D Server will support up to two monitors.
•
2D - Includes full console feature set and limited visualization functionality: paperwork
and presentation tools, data tasks, and 2D CAD drafting. The 2D Server will support
one monitor.
Channel Counts
•
500 channels
•
1000 channels
•
2500 channels
•
5000 channels
•
10,000 channels (2D only)
Channel counts refer to the maximum number of control channels you can have in a show.
All channel options have 32,767 EDMX™ addresses available.
Facepanels
6
•
Expression with Emphasis (Expression ECS), Expression 3, Expression 2x,
Expression LPC, Imagine™ 3
•
Insight™ with Emphasis (Insight ECS), Insight 3, Insight 2x, Insight LPC, Focus™
•
Express (all varieties), Express LPC
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
System Components
Emphasis Server
The Emphasis server is a Dell® computer optimized by ETC for the best performance of the
Emphasis Visualization and Emphasis Console applications. The Server is provided preconfigured and should not require any software installations for its initial use. This section
contains information on specific differences between your Server and a regular PC.
The Server contains all of the software required for Emphasis to run, a hard drive for show
data storage, a CD-RW drive for show data storage, and a 3.5” floppy drive for Facepanel
Software Disk creation.
There is a special hardware key called a “dongle” inside your Server, coded for the software
features you have purchased. If this is removed, Emphasis will not run. This dongle is not
usable on other computers and cannot be used with WYSIWYG stand-alone applications.
Note:
There are two USB ports located behind the door on the front of your Server. The
Emphasis dongle is connected internally to the rear port of this pair, so it may not be used
for other USB devices. The front port is available for your use.
A keyboard and mouse are included with your Server. The keyboard may have a number
of buttons designed for use with common internet tasks. These buttons have been
disabled, as the Server should not be connected to the internet at any time.
When you power up your Server, it will automatically launch the Emphasis applications.
The first time you do this, the Registration dialog box will appear (see Registration, page
13).
Emphasis Servers can be configured for 2D or 3D operation. The following table illustrates
the differences between the standard 2D and 3D Servers:
Feature
Monitors
CAD Views
Emphasis Views
Rendering
2D Server
1
Wireframe only
Wireframe only
No
3D Server
Up to 2
Wireframe, Isometric and Shaded
Wireframe, Isometric and Shaded
Yes
Emphasis Facepanel
The Emphasis Facepanel can be any of the following consoles:
•
Expression with Emphasis, Expression 3, Expression 2x, Imagine™ 3
•
Insight™ with Emphasis, Insight 3, Insight 2x, Focus™
•
Express (all varieties)
When used in an Emphasis system, the Facepanel becomes an input device on the
network, rather than a stand-alone device. You are limited to some of the constraints of the
individual Facepanel types, such as submaster quantities, channel-fader availability and
monitor counts; however, you gain cue-, channel- and dimmer-counts, as well as ETCNet2
capability when connected to an Emphasis Server.
When a Facepanel has been upgraded to Emphasis operation, it will no longer operate as
a stand-alone console. The Facepanel essentially becomes a keyboard with some DMX
Node functionality. As such, the Facepanel cannot operate without the Emphasis Server
online. In case of an emergency, you can export your Emphasis show file as a v3.1 show,
reload the v3.1 software to your Facepanel and run it as a stand-alone console. The
1
System Overview
7
procedure for exporting your show to v3.1 format is described in the Emphasis Visualization
User Manual. The procedure for returning your Facepanel to v3.1 operation is described in
Return the Facepanel to v3.1 Operation, page 242.
Emphasis Visualization
Emphasis Visualization is the software application that provides the graphic interface to the
Emphasis Control System. It is based on the powerful WYSIWYG suite of software
applications. This is where you patch your show, create your plot and prepare your
paperwork. You can also select and control fixtures, pre-cue your show and preview
recorded cues using the visualization features.
While Emphasis Visualization is based on WYSIWYG, there are some significant changes
that allow for interaction with the Emphasis Console. See the Emphasis Visualization User
Manual for more information on these new features.
Emphasis Console
Emphasis Console is the software application that drives the Facepanel. This application
usually remains hidden. You can access the settings and controls either from the
Facepanel or from the virtual Facepanel in Emphasis Visualization.
8
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Installation Guidel ines
Hooking Up the Hardware
Emphasis systems can range from a simple Server and Facepanel combination to fully
integrated network systems. Regardless of the size of your system, there are some basic
connections that are common to all systems.
Note:
See Expression and Insight DIP switches, page 248 for the correct network settings.
Incorrect settings will not allow your Facepanel and Server to communicate.
Emphasis uses UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair) cable and a hub or switch for
communication between the Facepanel and Server. A hub or switch is required for network
connections between Facepanels, Servers and other network devices such as ETCNet2™
Nodes and Unison Architectural Controls. In all cases, networking equipment and cables
must meet or exceed the Cat 5 standard.
To connect your system devices:
Note:
Step 1:
Place your Facepanel and Server on a stable, flat surface. The Server may be
placed flat (horizontally) on the table or on its edge (vertically). The Server’s CD
tray is designed to work in either orientation.
Step 2:
Connect the Facepanel Twisted Pair jack to the Server using UTP cable through
a hub or switch.
Step 3:
Connect DMX cables to the Facepanel DMX outputs.
You may also connect DMX cables to Nodes, if available.
Step 4:
Note:
You may also connect your RFU cable to a Node, if available.
Step 5:
If you have ETCLink in your system, the cable must be connected to an
ETCLink-enabled DMX Node. The ETCLink connector on your Facepanel is not
supported in Emphasis.
Step 6:
Connect any MIDI or SMPTE cables to the appropriate connectors on the
Facepanel.
Step 7:
Connect the Dell keyboard and mouse that came with the Server to the
appropriate connectors on the Server. These connections are colour coded. You
may also have a second keyboard connected to the Facepanel, if desired, for
labeling items on the console, such as cues, groups and submasters. The
second keyboard is not required, but may be added for convenience.
Step 8:
Connect your monitors. There will be at least one monitor on the Server and one
on the Facepanel.
• Servers configured for 2D operation will only support one monitor.
Step 9:
1
Connect RFU cable to the Facepanel RFU connector.
System Overview
•
Servers configured for 3D operation are supplied with a dual-video card.
Monitors are connected to this card using a Y-cable, provided with your
Server.
•
Expression and Insight consoles support two monitors. Express consoles
support one monitor only.
Connect power cables to Server, Facepanel, and hubs or switches.
9
CAUTION:
When you plug in the server it may boot - it may not wait for you to press the power
button. If the keyboard and/or mouse are not plugged in when you power up, they
will not be recognized by the Server. You will have to force the Server to power
down, plug them in, and restart.
Connecting a Printer
Connecting a printer to your Emphasis Server follows the same setup rules as any
Windows computer. If your printer requires a software installation, you will need to logon as
the System Manager. If you have problems connecting a printer to your Emphasis Control
System, please contact ETC Technical Services (see Help from ETC Technical Services,
page 3).
Install a printer from the System Manager login:
Step 1:
Login as the System Manager (see Login as a Different User, page 17).
Step 2:
Right-click on Start menu on task bar and click Explore. Alternatively, you can
press á+E to launch Windows Explorer at any time.
Step 3:
Click to expand My Computer in the file tree.
Step 4:
Click Control Panel.
Step 5:
Double-click Printers and Faxes.
Step 6:
Double-click Add Printers.
Step 7:
Uncheck Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer. If this is left
checked, you will be asked for a password that you do not have.
Step 8:
Continue through the wizard to setup your printer.
CAUTION:
10
Modification to hardware or software components or settings may affect the
stability of the Emphasis Control System. Consult ETC Technical Services before
making any changes. Non-authorized changes resulting in instability may require
reloading the operating system, which will restore defaults, remove any changes,
and may result in a loss of existing show files.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Software Installation
Your Emphasis Server will arrive with all software fully installed. If you have purchased a
complete Emphasis Control System, including an Emphasis Server and a Facepanel, the
Facepanel Software should also be loaded and ready to use.
If you have purchased Emphasis as an upgrade to an existing Express or Expression-style
console, you will need to upgrade the software in your console.
I n s ta l l i n g F a c e p a n e l S o f t w a r e
If you have purchased Emphasis as an upgrade to an existing console, or if you install a
new version of software on your Emphasis Server, you will also need to update the software
version in your Facepanel. If Facepanel Software disks are not provided or are lost, you can
create your own Facepanel Software disk. The Facepanel Software Disk must be a 3.5” HD
floppy disk.
You may also create v3.1 software disks for Express and Expression-style consoles. This
provides a way to return a Facepanel to v3.1 operation as a backup. It is recommended to
keep separate disks for v3.1 and Emphasis Facepanel software on hand.
To create and install a Facepanel Software Disk:
Step 1:
Exit Emphasis.
Step 2:
Insert a 3.5” HD floppy disk into the floppy drive on the Emphasis Server.
Step 3:
Login as System Manager (See Login as a Different User, page 17).
CAUTION:
Modification to hardware or software components or settings may affect the
stability of the Emphasis Control System. Consult ETC Technical Services before
making any changes. Non-authorized changes resulting in instability may require
loading the operating system, which will restore defaults, remove any changes, and
may result in a loss of existing show files.
Step 4:
Click OK to clear the warning screen.
Step 5:
Open the Facepanel Software folder located on the desktop.
Step 6:
Double-click the appropriate Facepanel Software file.
• EmphExpression.exe - for Expression and Insight facepanels used with an
Emphasis Control System.
•
EmphExpress.exe - for Express facepanels used with the Emphasis Control
System.
Step 7:
Click Unzip to extract the software onto the floppy disk.
Step 8:
Click OK when completed.
Step 9:
Close the WinZip window and the Facepanel Software window.
Step 10: In the Windows Start menu, click Log Off. Click the Log Off button in the dialog
that opens. This will return you to the Emphasis Login screen.
Step 11: Click Emphasis to login as the Emphasis User.
Step 12: Eject the floppy disk from the Emphasis Server. Insert the floppy disk into the disk
drive on the Facepanel.
Step 13: Power up the Facepanel. The software will load automatically.
Step 14: When completed, eject the floppy disk from the disk drive and restart the
Facepanel.
Step 15: Press [u] or [v] to select the Emphasis Server (processor) to connect to. You will
need to arrow-down to select the processor, even if only one processor is listed.
1
System Overview
11
Step 16: Press [Enter]. The Facepanel will boot and the Stage displays will open on the
attached monitors.
I n s ta l l i n g S o f t w a r e o n t h e E m p h a s i s S e r v e r
If you are reinstalling a new version of software, you will be provided specific instructions
for installation with the release notes for that version. When installing Emphasis software,
you are given the opportunity to install only Emphasis program files (located on the C drive)
or to install a full disk image for both the C and D drives.
CAUTION:
Installing a full disk image for the C and D drives will delete show files stored on the
Emphasis Server.
It is highly recommended to backup all show files before loading new software. To backup
existing show files see the Emphasis Visualization User Manual.
To install new software:
Step 1:
Power up the Emphasis Server.
Step 2:
When the Dell screen appears, press F12.
Step 3:
Insert Emphasis Software CD #1 into the CD drive on the Emphasis Server.
Step 4:
Press the number corresponding to Boot from IDE CD ROM and press ENTER.
Step 5:
A warning screen appears allowing you to choose to continue or abort:
• If you want to continue with the installation process, press any key.
•
Step 6:
The installation type screen appears. Choose the type of installation you want to
perform:
• Install Emphasis Program files only (press “E”). This option restores the disk
image of the C drive only, show files are retained.
•
CAUTION:
12
If you want to abort the installation process, Press CTRL+C. When
prompted to “Terminate batch job (Y/N)?”, press “Y”. The DOS prompt will
appear. You may restart the Emphasis Server (press CTRL+ALT+DELETE)
at this point for normal operation.
Install full disk image (press “A”). This option restores the disk image of the
C and D drives, show files are deleted.
Installing a full disk image for the C and D drives will delete show files stored on the
Emphasis Server.
Step 7:
After you press “E” or “A”, the disk image begins to load from the Emphasis
Software Disk #1. You will be prompted to load subsequent disks by the disk
utility. Eject the first disk and load the next disk and press ENTER.
Step 8:
When completed, you will be prompted to remove the final CD from the drive and
restart the Emphasis Server. You can restart the Emphasis Server by pressing
the power button twice, or by pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE.
Step 9:
After a new version of software has been installed on your Emphasis Server, you
will need to install Facepanel Software. See Installing Facepanel Software, page
11, for that procedure.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Registration
When you first start your Emphasis Control System, you will be prompted to register the
system. Registration will enable ETC to track your system for support purposes, and will
enroll your system in the software subscription included with your Emphasis Control
System, providing you with software upgrades for the duration of the subscription.
You have 15 days to use the system prior to registering; however, it is recommended that
you register your system as soon as possible. After 15 days have passed, you will not be
able to use Emphasis Visualization until you enter the registration code. You may register
your Emphasis Control System by phone, fax or email.
To register by phone:
1
Step 1:
Power up the Emphasis Server. If the system is unregistered, the Registration
dialog should open. You can also open the Registration dialog using the Help
menu Registration command.
Step 2:
In the Register dialog, click the Phone button.
Step 3:
Call ETC at one of the given phone numbers and speak to a Customer Service
Representative. You will need to provide them with the Registration Request
Code and your contact details. They will provide you with a Registration
Validation Code to enter in the dialog.
Step 4:
Enter the Registration Validation Code in the dialog. Make sure to use all
uppercase letters when you enter the code.
Step 5:
Click Register.
System Overview
13
To register by fax:
Note:
14
Step 1:
Fill out the registration form included with your Emphasis Server. Fax it to the
appropriate fax number based on your location. You will be sent a Registration
Validation Code within a full business day.
Step 2:
If you cannot find the form, you can print a new copy from the Emphasis Server.
Ensure you have a printer connected to your Emphasis Server. See Connecting
a Printer, page 10, for more information.
Step 3:
Power up the Emphasis Server. If the system is unregistered, the Registration
dialog should open. You can also open the Registration dialog using the Help
menu Registration command.
Step 4:
In the Register dialog, click the Fax button.
Step 5:
Print the form, fill in all the information and fax it to the appropriate number
indicated on the form. You will be sent a Registration Validation Code within a full
business day.
Alternatively, you can email your registration (all the information required on the fax form)
to registeremphasis@etcconnect.com.
Step 6:
When you receive your Registration Validation Code, take it to your Emphasis
Control System. Power up the Emphasis Server. If the system is unregistered,
the Registration dialog should open. You can also open the Registration dialog
using the Help menu Registration command.
Step 7:
In the Register dialog, click the “I have my validation code” button. Enter the
Registration Validation Code in the dialog. Make sure to use all uppercase letters
when you enter the code.
Step 8:
Click OK.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Upgrades
To upgrade your Emphasis Control System, contact the ETC dealer who provided your
Emphasis Control System to purchase the upgrade. When purchased, you will receive an
Upgrade Code that will unlock the new features you have purchased.
You can upgrade from a lower channel count to a higher channel count, and/or from 2D to
3D operation. You can also purchase an activation code for the Wireless Remote Focus
Unit (WRFU) and/or WYSILink™. If you want to upgrade from a single monitor system to a
dual monitor system to expand your desktop area, you may need to send the Emphasis
Server back to ETC for that hardware upgrade. This hardware upgrade does not affect any
functional abilities of the Emphasis Control System, only the available monitor space.
Emphasis 3D will operate the same on single and dual monitor systems.
To upgrade your Emphasis Control System:
1
Step 1:
Contact your ETC dealer to purchase your Upgrade Code. When you have your
Upgrade Code, continue to Step 2.
Step 2:
Power up your Emphasis Server.
Step 3:
In the Help menu, click Upgrade.
Step 4:
Enter your Upgrade Code in the dialog box. Make sure to use all uppercase
letters when you enter the code.
Step 5:
Verify that the code you have entered is correct.
Step 6:
Click the Upgrade button.
Step 7:
Close and restart Emphasis. Your upgrade will take effect on the restart.
System Overview
15
System Procedures
Power-up Procedure
For best performance, power-up your system in the following order:
Note:
Note:
Step 1:
Turn on the hub(s) and/or switch(es).
Step 2:
Turn on the Server and monitor(s). Wait for the Emphasis application to start up
completely before proceeding to the next step.
In a network with multiple Emphasis Control Systems online, allow one Emphasis Server
to fully startup before starting the other Emphasis Servers. This will ensure that your
network configures correctly.
Step 3:
Turn on the Facepanel(s) and monitor(s).
Step 4:
Turn on any ETCNet2 Nodes.
Step 5:
Turn on accessories such as Remote Focus Units.
Emphasis defaults to starting in Show Mode. In Show Mode, CAD, PRES and LINK
modes are hidden. To enter advanced mode for the current show file, in the File menu,
click Show Mode. You will be asked to save changes to the current show because the
show will be closed and reopened in advanced mode automatically. You can also load a
different show file in either Show Mode or advanced mode using the File menu Load
Show command. Select or deselect the Show Mode box at the bottom of the file browser
to load the show in the appropriate mode.
When you power-up your Emphasis Control System, the system will default to opening
the last valid show file. If the show file is no longer available in the Shows directory,
Emphasis will open a new show called “Untitled”. You may setup the system to open a
new show on startup if you wish. See Create a Default Show in the Emphasis
Visualization User Manual for more information.
Multi-console Submaster Fader Support
Multi-Console Submaster Fader Support enables control of submasters from all connected
Emphasis Facepanels. Virtual submasters will always track the true fader level and indicate
the active output level of the submaster. Physical submasters can gain control by matching
the current true level. Once the level has been matched, the true level tracks the physical
fader. Physical submasters from another connected Facepanel can take control in the
same way. Submaster LEDs indicate physical submasters that are not in control. If the
submaster fader needs to move up to match the true level, the LED blinks on twice followed
by a longer “off” gap. If the submaster needs to be brought down to match, the LED blinks
off twice followed by a longer “on” gap.
16
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Login as a Different User
There are a number of different user accounts contained in the Emphasis system. When
the system is turned on, it will open using the Emphasis User settings. To gain access to
the other user accounts, exit Emphasis.
Note:
When you load new system software onto your Emphasis Server, you will see an
advisory indicating that the library indices are being rebuilt the first time each user type
logs in. This is normal behavior.
•
Emphasis User: This user account is not password protected, and is the default user
when Emphasis launches on startup. When this user type is selected, access is limited
mainly to Emphasis. Other applications and computer components are hidden. When
this user account is selected, critical program files may not be deleted (this does not
include show files) and no other software may be installed.
•
NCE User: This user account is primarily for adjusting settings in the Network
Configuration Editor (NCE) application. There is no password protection for this user
type. When this user account is selected, critical program files may not be deleted (this
does not include show files) and no other software may be installed.
•
System Manager: The System Manager has access to set the password for this user
account, as well as partial Administrative rights, installation of software, system
maintenance, Facepanel code, and all Emphasis and NCE user privileges.
•
Technical Services: This user type is reserved for ETC Technical Services and is
password protected.
To change the System Manager password:
Step 1:
Exit Emphasis and login as the System Manager.
Step 2:
In the Windows Start menu, click All Programs, then click User Accounts. The
User Accounts dialog will open.
Step 3:
Under “Pick a task...”, click “Create a password”.
Step 4:
Follow the directions in the dialog to create a password and a password hint for
the System Manager account. When complete, click the Create Password button
at the bottom of the dialog box.
Shut-down Procedure
To shut-down your Emphasis Control System:
1
Step 1:
In the Emphasis Visualization File menu, click Save to save your show file.
Step 2:
In the File menu, click Exit. You may also click the Exit button at the top-right
corner of the Emphasis Visualization window.
Step 3:
In the lower-left corner of the Login screen, click Shutdown Emphasis Server.
The “Turn off computer” dialog opens.
Step 4:
Click Turn Off to shut the Server down completely. Alternatively, click Stand By
to place the Server in stand by mode or click Restart to cause the Server to reboot. Click Cancel to return to the Login screen without shutting down the
Server.
Step 5:
Turn off any peripheral equipment, such as Nodes and Remote Focus Units.
Step 6:
Turn off the Facepanel at the power switch located on the rear panel.
System Overview
17
Troubleshooting
The Emphasis Facepanel type defaults to the Expression 3 console. This affects the video
output of your Facepanel and the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization. If you have
an Insight or Express console as your Emphasis Facepanel, or if you swap Facepanels
from an Expression-style to an Insight or Express, you will need to change the default
settings to reflect this in the Emphasis Visualization, Emphasis mode Setup menu. See
Setting the Facepanel Type on the Server, page 22 for more information.
Note:
If you have a show open and only the Emphasis mode is available, you are operating in
Show Mode. See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual: Load Show for information on
leaving Show Mode.
The Emphasis Server is provided fully configured from the factory. It should not be treated
as a regular desktop computer. The following modifications to the factory setup are known
to cause problems of varying severity:
•
Screen savers. Do not enable screen savers on the Emphasis server. They can cause
unexpected behavior in your system.
•
Power settings are set to never turn off the monitor(s) or the hard disk. The system is
also set to never go into standby mode on its own. The “Sleep” button on the keyboard
is also disabled. Do not put your Emphasis Server into standby or sleep mode while
running Emphasis software.
•
Microsoft Windows XP appearance. Windows XP appearance settings are graphics
heavy and will impact the performance speed of your system. The appearance settings
are set to minimize the impact of the operating system on performance.
•
View contents while dragging windows. This setting is also graphics-heavy and will
impair the performance speed of your system.
•
Wallpaper on the desktop. Wallpapers are graphics heavy and will impact the
performance speed of your system. The wallpaper is set to “None” as a default.
•
Additional software applications (games, internet browsers, word processors, etc.). It is
not advisable to load additional applications onto your Emphasis Server. Conflicts may
occur between applications that could severely impact your system’s performance. The
Emphasis Server should not be connected to the Internet.
•
On a 3D Server with dual monitors, you may experience problems with shaded views,
especially on the second monitor. If your shaded views appear to refresh incorrectly
(especially after shaded view windows have been overlapped), you may want to
change the OpenGL options to “Safe Rendering”.
•
Do not enable hyperthreading on GX270 or GX280 servers. Hyperthreading causes the
server to operate a single processor as if it were a dual processor system. This has
been known to cause Emphasis to crash.
To change the OpenGL settings:
Step 1:
In the Emphasis Visualization Options menu, click Application Options.
Step 2:
Click the OpenGL tab.
Step 3:
Click the button for the following settings:
• Fast Rendering: This is the ideal setting.
•
18
Fast Rendering for Primary Display Only: (Default) This sets the primary
monitor to Fast Rendering and the second monitor to Safe Rendering and
will solve the incorrect refresh problem on the second monitor.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
•
Safe Rendering: This sets both monitors to “Safe Rendering”.
If you have problems using your Emphasis Control System, please refer to your manuals
for additional information.
If you do not find the answer in a manual, please call your local dealer or ETC Technical
Services (see Help from ETC Technical Services, page 3. Please have the following
information available before you call:
•
Console model and serial number (located on back panel)
•
Emphasis Server serial number (located inside the door on the front of the Server case)
•
Software version (see below)
•
Dimmer manufacturer and installation type
•
Moving light information (manufacturer, mode, data cable type)
•
Other components in your system (Unison, other consoles, etc.)
How do I find the software version?
Emphasis is actually a suite of software, all with different version numbers. In general, all
you need to provide to Technical Services is the suite version number.
To find the Emphasis Control System suite version number:
Step 1:
In the Emphasis Visualization Help menu, click About Emphasis. The About...
dialog box will open.
Step 2:
Find the Emphasis Visualization Version number at the top of the dialog box. The
suite version number is indicated in parentheses at the end of the full version
number.
To find the suite version number outside Emphasis Visualization:
Note:
1
Step 1:
Minimize Emphasis Visualization and right-click on Start menu on task bar and
click Explore. Alternatively, you can press á+E to launch Windows Explorer at
any time.
Step 2:
Right-click My Computer and click Properties.
Step 3:
Click the General tab. You will find the Windows version information as well as
the Emphasis system version. The Support Info button also displays the version
number, as well as the phone numbers for ETC Americas, ETC Europe and ETC
Asia.
You can also use the shortcut á+PAUSE/BREAK to view the System Properties.
System Overview
19
If you are asked to provide specific component version numbers, it is recommended that
you use the first method to find all the version numbers at the same time. If that is not
possible, use one of the other methods to find the specific information you are looking for.
To find the complete list of version numbers on the Server:
Note:
Step 1:
Minimize Emphasis Visualization and right-click on Start menu on task bar and
click Explore. Alternatively, you can press á+E to launch Windows Explorer at
any time.
Step 2:
Navigate to this location: C:\Program Files\ETC
Step 3:
Double-click the Emphasis Component Report. This report contains version
information for all the installed Emphasis components.
Note that this will not update version information if you have upgraded individual
components rather than the whole disk image.
To find the Emphasis Visualization version number:
In the Help menu, click About Emphasis.
To find the Emphasis Console version number:
Step 1:
Minimize Emphasis Visualization and maximize Emphasis Console.
Step 2:
In the Help menu, click About.
To find the Facepanel version number:
Restart the Facepanel and watch CRT1. The Facepanel version number appears on the
bottom of the screen just after the boot screen and before the ETC logo.
20
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Chapter 2
Emphasis Console User Interface
This chapter covers the variations in the available Emphasis Facepanels: Express,
Expression and Insight. It also covers the available accessories that can be used within
your Emphasis Control System, including the Remote Focus Unit (RFU) and Wireless
Remote Focus Unit (WRFU). This chapter also describes the different softkey setups of the
various Facepanels, and the basic channel concepts behind the Emphasis Control System.
This chapter contains the following sections:
2
•
Emphasis Facepanel Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
•
Console Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
•
Hard keys vs. Softkeys by Facepanel Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
•
Channel Concepts in the Emphasis Control System . . . . . 47
Emphasis Console User Interface
21
Emphasi s Facepanel Options
The Emphasis Control System is compatible with a number of Express and Expressionstyle facepanels. The Emphasis Facepanel is used as an input device for channel
selection, recording and playback, as well as an output device for DMX data.
Express Two-Scene
This facepanel type includes the Express 24/48, the Express 48/96 and the Express 72/
144. For more information on the features of this facepanel type, see foldouts F:Express
24/48 Facepanel Overview, page 298, and G:Express 48/96 & 72/144 Facepanel
Overview, page 299. The Emphasis Visualization virtual console does not include twoscene operation, only submasters, for this facepanel type.
Express ECS
This facepanel type includes the Express 125, the Express 250 and the Express ECS. For
more information on the features of this facepanel type, see foldout E:Express 125/250/
ECS Facepanel Overview, page 297. The Emphasis Visualization virtual console emulates
all facepanel controls for this facepanel type.
Expression ECS
This facepanel type includes the Concept 2x, Expression 2x, Imagine 3, Expression 3 and
Expression ECS. For more information on the features of this facepanel type, see foldout
D:Expression Facepanel Overview, page 296. The Emphasis Visualization virtual console
emulates all facepanel controls for this facepanel type.
Insight ECS
This facepanel type includes the Insight 2x, Focus, Insight 3 and Insight ECS. For more
information on the features of this facepanel type, see foldout C:Insight Facepanel
Overview, page 295. The Emphasis Visualization virtual console emulates all facepanel
controls for this facepanel type.
Setting the Facepanel Type on the Server
You will need to tell your Emphasis Server what kind of Facepanel you are using. The
Server defaults to Expression 3. This setting determines the Emphasis Console displays
that are available.
Set the Facepanel type in Emphasis Visualization:
22
Step 1:
Turn on your Emphasis Control System. Allow it to finish its startup before
proceeding to the next step.
Step 2:
Click the Emphasis mode button at the top of the Emphasis Visualization screen.
Step 3:
In the Setup menu, click Facepanel Type. The Facepanel Type dialog box
opens.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
2
Step 4:
Click the name of your Facepanel type to set it as current.
Step 5:
Exit Emphasis. This will return you to the login screen.
Step 6:
Click the Emphasis user button at the top of the list. This will restart Emphasis
with the new Facepanel type.
Emphasis Console User Interface
23
Accessories
Along with your Emphasis Facepanel, you may have additional accessories in your system.
Remote Focus Unit (RFU)
A Remote Focus Unit (RFU) is used to select channels, set levels, record and playback
cues and playback macros. An RFU can be connected to the back of your Facepanel, or to
a Video Node, or to dedicated RFU connectors that may be distributed throughout your
venue.
M1
A/B
Blin
A
Bac /B
k
remo
te fo
d
Ho
7
ld
cus u
nit
8
4
Go
9
5
Tra
1
ck
6
2
Cle
Ch
an
3
0
ar
+
.
Ente
r
Rel
Install the RFU:
24
Step 1:
Verify that RFU power switch is turned off. (Unit is off when switch is in the
position toward the top edge of the RFU.)
Step 2:
Insert the RFU cable into the connector on the back of the facepanel labeled
RFU. RFUs may also be connected to ETCNet2 Nodes.
Step 3:
Turn RFU on.
Step 4:
After the RFU completes booting, use the keypad to perform functions as you
would on the Facepanel. Use the [S*] to access softkeys and the [M*] key to
access macros.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
CUE
2
6
THRU
+
REL
3
REC
SUB
AT
FUNC
DIM
GRP
5
1
9
–
4
CHAN
8
FULL
0
ENTER
M2
BACK
A/B CLR
7
M1
M*
The Radio Remote Focus Unit (RRFU) provides a
simple, wireless solution for remote control. This small,
handheld transmitter unit provides access to frequently
used commands for dimmer and channel checks as
well as macro and record functions. An RRFU can be
connected to the back of your Facepanel, or to a Video
Node, or to dedicated RFU connectors that may be
distributed throughout your system.
A/B GO
R a d i o R e m o t e F o c u s U n i t ( R R FU )
See the Radio Remote Focus Unit Setup Guide for
operational instructions on the RRFU.
W i r e le s s R e m o t e F o c u s U n i t ( W R F U )
A Wireless Remote Focus Unit (WRFU) is a combination of the WRFU software application
running on a Pocket PC compatible handheld. The WRFU gives you increased functionality
over the standard RFU, and has the advantage of being a wireless device you can carry
with you anywhere in your venue. WRFU units access the ETCNet2 network through
Access Points placed throughout your venue. See the WRFU v4.0.0 Installation Manual for
more information on the installation and setup of your WRFU.
Connect the WRFU to your system:
2
Step 1:
Turn on your Emphasis Control System. Allow it to finish its startup before
proceeding to the next step.
Step 2:
Turn on your WRFU.
Step 3:
Login to your WRFU using your user name and password, if required.
Step 4:
Find your system ID on the Processor Select screen. Tap to select it and tap OK.
If you have setup your WRFU to auto-connect to your system, this page will not
display if your system is online.
Emphasis Console User Interface
25
Note:
If your processor is displayed in low-lighted text, your system is not WRFU-enabled. You
will not be able to connect your WRFU to this system. To purchase the WRFU upgrade,
please contact your ETC Dealer. Once purchased, you will be provided an upgrade code.
See Upgrades, page 15 for information on entering your upgrade code.
Optional Pointing Device (Mouse/Trackball)
If you have a serial mouse, trackball or other pointing device, you can connect it to your
Expression/Insight facepanel and use it to control moving light fixtures. This pointing device
is not used within Emphasis Visualization, only for direct control of moving light attributes,
(typically pan and tilt). The optional pointing device connects to the “mouse” connector on
the rear panel, and is linked to encoders TX and TY in the Encoder Setup display (see
Encoder Setup Options, page 64).
M o v i n g L i g h t M o du l e ( M L M ) f o r E x p r e s s i o n / I n s i g h t 2 x F ac e p a n e l s
Expression/Insight 2x facepanels do not have encoders built in. You may have a Moving
Light Module (MLM) for use with your facepanel. If so, the MLM operates the same as the
encoders do. You can attach a serial mouse or trackball directly to the MLM to control pan
and tilt on moving light fixtures.
Mo
26
use
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Install a Moving Light Module (MLM) on an Expression/Insight 2x facepanel:
Note:
2
Step 1:
Turn off facepanel power.
Step 2:
Connect the MLM to the facepanel port labeled Digitizer/Serial. See foldout
B:Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel Connections, page 294.
The Designer’s Worksheet digitizer is not compatible with the Emphasis Control System.
Step 3:
Connect an optional pointing device to the MLM, if desired.
Step 4:
Plug the power cord of the MLM into a wall outlet or power strip.
Step 5:
Turn on facepanel power.
Emphasis Console User Interface
27
Console Displ ays
Emphasis Facepanels provide a number of displays that allow you to view your show data
and system settings. These displays are described in this section. Their functionality will be
described in detail within the chapters of this manual.
Display Features
In general, the displays are divided between Command and Playback displays. On the
Express facepanels, all displays appear on a single monitor. On Expression/Insight
facepanels, CRT#1 is the Command display and CRT#2 is the Playback display. You can
swap displays from CRT#1 to CRT#2 and back again using the [Swap] key. You can also
have channel displays (Stage, Blind and Fader) span both monitors by pressing the
[Expand] key.
C o l o r s in D i sp l a y s
The Stage, Blind, Fader, Tracksheet and Spreadsheet displays all use color to indicate the
selection state and move information about channel levels.
Channel Numbers/Channel Patch
•
Gray . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unselected channel.
•
Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . Selected channel. Controlled by the level (Y) wheel or trackpad.
•
Orange . . . . . . . . . . . Channel affiliated with selected channel (i.e. an accessory)
•
White . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel in selected group, but not selected by Only function.
•
Dark Green . . . . . . . . Accessory channel (controls a scroller or other accessory)
•
Violet . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessorized channel (affiliated with an accessory channel)
Channel Numbers/Fixture in Channel Patch
•
Gray bar . . . . . . . . . . Surrounds all channels in a single patched fixture.
•
Light gray . . . . . . . . . High (coarse) channels for 16-bit parameters.
•
Dark gray . . . . . . . . . Low (fine) channels for 16-bit parameters.
•
Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . Selected channels of selected fixtures.
Channel Levels
28
•
White on Red . . . . . . Selected channel’s level as it is being raised or lowered.
•
Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . In Stage, this level is generated by a submaster.
•
White . . . . . . . . . . . . In Stage and Fader, this level is generated by an Effect. In Blind,
Spreadsheet and Tracksheet, this level is recorded in a
submaster, group, focus point or an allfade cue.
•
Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In Stage and Fader, this level belongs to a captured channel. In
Blind and Tracksheet, unrecorded levels appear in red.
•
Green . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel level has moved from its recorded level in the previous
cue. In Blind, Spreadsheet and Tracksheet, the recorded level is
lower than in the prior cue.
•
Blue . . . . . . . . . . . . . In Blind, Spreadsheet and Tracksheet, the recorded level is
higher than in the prior cue.
•
Purple . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel level is the same as in the prior cue.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
•
Gray . . . . . . . . . . . . . In Blind, this level is recorded into a multi-part cue (see MultiPart cues, page 136), but is not recorded into the currently
displayed cue part.
Beneath Channel Levels (Frames)
•
Light Green . . . . . . . Lower half of frame value
•
Violet . . . . . . . . . . . . Center of frame value
•
Light Blue. . . . . . . . . Upper half of frame value
Stage, Blind and Fader
The Stage display shows you the current levels of all active channels.The Blind display
looks almost exactly the same as Stage, but is used to view and edit cues, groups,
submasters, subroutines and effects without affecting the look on stage.
2
Emphasis Console User Interface
29
Expression/ Insight facepanels
Display Name Indicates the current
display and time.
Channel Area - Displays
the channels in your show
in gray, the levels of those
channels in various colors,
and any focus point
reference below the level.
Indication of
reference to a Focus
Point.
Attribute Bar - Displays
current settings for the
selected cue, group or
submaster.
Express facepanels
Keypad Corner:
Indicates how Emphasis
will interpret the next
numerical entry. If you
enter a range, only the
last number in the value
will be displayed.
Prompt Area - Shows a
prompt related to the
next or just -completed
action.
Playback displays see Playback, page 35.
Softkeys - Additional
Emphasis Console
functions available by
pressing [S1] - [S8].
The Fader display is accessed by a hard key on Expression and Insight facepanels, and by
a softkey on Express facepanels. The Fader display selectively displays the contribution to
the stage output of the A/B and/or C/D fader pairs, individual submasters or background
30
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
channels (see LTP, page 47). Changes made in the Fader display are made live and will
affect the stage output. Unlike the Stage display, the Fader display is not affected by the
Grandmaster fader, or by inhibitive submasters (see Submaster Types, page 121).
Expression/Insight display shown.
Changing display pages
If you are using more channels than can be displayed on a single display, you can use
softkeys [S4-Previous Page] and [S5-Next Page] to view more channels. You can also
use the arrow keys to change pages: left-arrow [s] jumps to the first page of channels, uparrow [u] displays the previous page, down-arrow [v] displays the next page and rightarrow [t] jumps to the last page of channels.
Note:
2
On Express facepanels, you may need to press [S7 - More Softkeys] to find [S4 Previous Page] and [S5 - Previous Page].
Emphasis Console User Interface
31
Flexichannel
When you enable Flexichannel, only channels used somewhere in your show will appear
on the Emphasis Console Stage, Blind and Fader displays. By reducing the number of
channels you have to display, you can reduce the amount of paging from screen-to-screen
you need to do to view your data. This, of course, assumes that you are using fewer than
the maximum number of channels in your system, or that your patch places channels all
over the place with numerous gaps between them. If you are using all the available
channels, Flexichannel will only change your display from horizontal to vertical channels.
Expression/Insight display shown.
Which channels are displayed is determined by the following guidelines:
•
Flexichannel displays channels with set levels, whether those levels are recorded or
not.
•
Flexichannel does not display channels whose channel attributes (see Channel
Attributes, page 58) have been changed unless levels are also set.
•
Flexichannel displays all channels patched to fixtures.
•
Flexichannel displays links to focus points just as you would see in other channel
displays.
•
Channels not displayed in Flexichannel displays are shown in gray in Spreadsheet,
Tracksheet and Patch.
Enable or disable Flexichannel:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [9] [Enter] to access the Flexichannel option.
Step 3:
Press [1] [Enter] to enable Flexichannel, or press [0] [Enter] to disable
Flexichannel.
Step 4:
Press [Stage] to return to the Stage display.
Working with Flexichannel active will change how you select channels. For information on
channel selection, please see Channel selection in Flexichannel, page 88.
32
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Updating the Flexichannel Displays
If the channel usage changes, such as when you shutdown and restart Emphasis, you load
a new show or channels that once fulfilled the guidelines above no longer do, you will need
to update Flexichannel. Press [Setup] [1] [S1-Purge Flexi] to update Flexichannel.
Spreadsheet
Spreadsheets are available through softkeys in the Blind display. You can use
spreadsheets to view and edit channel data across a number of cues, groups, submasters
and focus points.
Tracksheet
The Tracksheet displays all the cue information for a single channel. You can see each
recorded level for a single channel across the entire cue list, viewing how many cues the
channel is recorded into, where the channel moves up or down, as well as where the
channel tracks through consecutive cues at the same level. You can also make edits to a
cue or a range of cues for that channel.
2
Emphasis Console User Interface
33
Patch
The Patch display is used to apply profiles and proportional levels to patched dimmers (see
Patch, page 71). You can also use the Patch display to patch dimmers to channels,
however it is highly recommended that you use Emphasis Visualization to patch your
channels. You must use Emphasis Visualization to create a moving light patch in
Emphasis.
Park
The Park display is accessed by a hard key on Expression and Insight facepanels, and by
a softkey on Express facepanels. The Park display is used to view and edit parked channels
and parked dimmers. A parked channel or dimmer stays at the parked level until it is
unparked. For more information on parking channels and dimmers, see Park, page 109.
34
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Playback
The Playback display (Expression/Insight only) contains three separate areas containing
the Cue List, Submaster List and the Fader Status windows.
Note:
On Express facepanels, the cue list and fader status windows are integrated into the
Stage, Blind and Fader displays.
Expression LED displays
Expression facepanels have a series of LED displays across the top. These displays
provide supplemental information regarding your faders, cues, submasters, groups and
levels.
A/B Display - shows
the number of the
current cue in the A/B
fader pair.
Next Cue Display shows the number of the
next cue in the playback
cue list.
Next Cu
N
C e
A/B
C/D
Record Display - shows
the currently selected
item. This can be a cue,
group or submaster.
C/D Display - shows
the number of the
current cue in the C/D
fader pair.
Record
Channel/Group
Rate
X
Level
Y
A
Channel/Group Display - shows
the last selected channel or
group.
2
Emphasis Console User Interface
Rate/X Display - shows the level of
the high (coarse) channel in 16-bit
pairs. When the X wheel is used as a
Rate wheel, this display is not used.
B
Level/Y Display - shows the level of the low
(fine) channel in 16-bit pairs. When the Y
wheel is used as a Level wheel, this display
shows the level of the selected channel. If
more than one channel is selected, this
display shows the level of the highest
selected channel number.
35
Hard keys vs. Softkeys by Facepanel Type
This section provides a comprehensive listing of hard keys and softkeys by facepanel type.
Some hard keys on Expression and Insight facepanels are not available or are softkeys on
Express facepanels. These are indicated as references to the softkey page(s) on which
they occur (see Softkeys, page 39). Use this list if you are unsure where to find a function
of the facepanel.
Please use foldout I:Command Keypad Overview, page 301 as a guide to the locations of
the hard keys.
Facepanel Keys
Function
Expression/Insight
Stage
Blind
Fader
Display Keys
Display Keys
Display Keys
Spread
Sheet
Display Keys
Patch
Park
Setup
Expand
Display Keys
Display Keys
Display Keys
Display Keys
Express
Display Keys
Display Keys
Stage 3
Available as Cue Sheet, Sub Sheet, Group
Sheet and Focus Sheet in Stage 4, Blind Cue,
Cue Spread Sheet 2, Blind Cue Part, Blind
Group, Group Spread Sheet 2, Blind Focus
Point, Focus Spread Sheet 2, Blind Submaster
(BSub), SSS2, Blind Cue Effect (BCE), Blind
Sub Effect (BSE), Blind Cue Subroutine (BCS),
Fader 4
Display Keys
Stage 3
Display Keys
Not Available
Facepanel Keys
Function
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M*
Macro Wait
Enter Macro
Expression/Insight
Macro Keys
Macro Keys
Macro Keys
Macro Keys
Macro Keys
Macro Keys
Macro Keys
Macro Keys
Express
Macro Keys
Macro Keys
Macro Keys
Not Available
Not Available
Macro Keys
Macro Editing Softkey
Cluster A
Facepanel Keys
Function
Swap
About
Learn
Help
s
u
36
Expression/Insight
Express
Cluster A
Cluster A
Cluster A
Cluster A
Navigation Keys
Not Available
Cluster A
Cluster A
Cluster A
Navigation Keys
Navigation Keys
Navigation Keys
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Facepanel Keys
Function
v
t
Expression/Insight
Express
Navigation Keys
Navigation Keys
Navigation Keys
Navigation Keys
Facepanel Keys
Function
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
Expression/Insight
Softkeys
Softkeys
Softkeys
Softkeys
Softkeys
Softkeys
Softkeys
Softkeys
Express
Softkeys
Softkeys
Softkeys
Softkeys
Softkeys
Softkeys
Softkeys
Softkeys
Facepanel Keys
Function
2
Expression/Insight
Page
Type
Cue
Load Sub
Cluster B
Cluster B
Cluster B
Cluster B
Only
Cluster B
Sub
Link
Cluster B
Cluster B
Part
Cluster B
Group
Cluster B
Follow
Cluster B
Label
Time
Wait
Track
Record
Cluster B
Cluster B
Cluster B
Cluster B
Cluster B
Emphasis Console User Interface
Express
Cluster B
Cluster B
Cluster B
Stage 3
Stage, Blind Cue, Blind Cue Part 2, Blind
Group, Blind Focus Point, Blind Submaster
(BSub), Fader
Cluster B
Cluster B
Stage 3, Blind Cue 2, Cue List, Blind Cue Part
2, Fader 3
Cluster B
Stage, Blind Cue 2, Cue List, Blind Cue Effect 3
(BCE3), Fader
Not Available
Cluster B
Cluster B
Cluster B
Cluster B
37
Facepanel Keys
Function
Channel
Fixture
Thru
At
And
Full
Except
Level
Release
Focus Point
38
Expression/Insight
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Express
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Cluster C
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
39
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Blind Cue 2
Blind Cue
Stage 4
Stage 3
Stage 2
Stage
Display
Part
MBB
Select Cue
Select Cue
Capture EDMX
Part
Capture EDMX
Enable
Quickstep
Enable
Quickstep
Fadeout Subr
Fadeout Subr
S1
Follow
Cue List (Cue
List)
Cue List (Cue
List)
Load Sub
Sub List
Sub List
Update
Update
S2
Solo
Solo
Spread Sheet
(Cue Spread
Sheet)
Spread Sheet
(Cue Spread
Sheet)
Dimmer
Dimmer
Solo
Solo
Backgrnd
Overrides
Backgrnd
Overrides
S3
S5
Rate
Follow
Rate
Rate
Block
Block
Delete Cue
Delete Cue
Park
Go To Subr
Step
Park
Delete
Delete
Sneak
Label
Previous Page Next Page
Only
S6
Sneak
Rate
Go To Subr
Step
Previous Page Next Page
Flash
Fader
Flash
Previous Page Next Page
Only
Previous Page Next Page
S4
Softkeys
Step
Step
MBB
MBB
Dynamic Effect
Dynamic Effect
S8
More Softkeys
(Blind Cue)
More Softkeys
MBB
(Blind Cue 3)
More Softkeys
Capture EDMX
(Blind Cue 2)
More Softkeys
Capture EDMX
(Blind Cue 2)
Cue Sheet
More Softkeys
(Cue Spread
(Stage)
Sheet)
More Softkeys
(Stage 2)
More Softkeys
(Stage 2)
More Softkeys
(Stage 3)
More Softkeys
(Stage 3)
More Softkeys
(Stage)
More Softkeys
(Stage 4)
S7
In the softkey list below, jumps to other softkey pages are indicated in parentheses. Expression/Insight softkeys are indicated first. If
an Express softkey set is different, it is listed in the shaded row beneath the Expression version. Empty cells in the table indicate an
unassigned softkey.
Softkeys
40
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Select Cue
Blind Cue
Part
Blind Group
Group List
(Group List)
Group List
(Group List)
Select Group
Select Group
Label
Cue List (Cue
List)
Part
MBB
Sub Sheet
Cue Spread
Sheet 2
Blind Cue
Part 2
Create Cue
Block
Cue Spread
Sheet
Group Sheet
Label
Blind Cue List
MBB
2
Label
S2
Follow
MBB
S1
Part
Cue List
Blind Cue 3
Display
S5
Previous Page Next Page
Previous Page Next Page
S4
Only
Rate
Group Sheet
(Group Spread Previous Page Next Page
Sheet)
Group Sheet
(Group Spread Previous Page Next Page
Sheet)
Solo
Rate
Previous Page Next Page
Cue Sheet
(Cue Spread
Sheet)
Solo
Previous Page Next Page
Focus Sheet
Replace Level Previous Page Next Page
Rate
Rate
S3
Softkeys (Continued)
Delete Group
Delete Group
Block
Block
Delete Part
Delete Cue
Enable/
Disable
Tracking
Delete Cue
Delete Cue
Label
S6
More Softkeys
(Blind Group
2)
Capture EDMX
More Softkeys
(Blind Cue List
2)
More Softkeys
(Blind Cue
List)
More Softkeys
(Cue Spread
Sheet 2)
More Softkeys
(Cue Spread
Sheet)
More Softkeys
(Blind Cue
Part 2)
More Softkeys
(Blind Cue
Part)
More Softkeys
(Blind Cue
Part)
More Softkeys
(Blind Cue)
S7
MBB
Capture EDMX
Tracksheet
Return (Blind
Cue)
Return (Blind
Cue)
Return (Blind
Cue)
S8
41
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Create Focus
Sub Sheet
Focus Spread
Cue Sheet
Sheet 2
Label
Label
Focus List
(Focus List)
Select Focus
Focus Spread
Select Focus
Sheet
Focus List
Blind Focus
Point 2
Blind Focus
Point
Focus List
(Focus List)
Select Focus
Sub Sheet
Group Spread
Cue Sheet
Sheet 2
Label
Label
S2
Create Group
S1
Group Spread
Select Group
Sheet
Group List
Blind Group 2
Display
S5
Previous Page Next Page
Previous Page Next Page
Only
S4
Previous Page Next Page
Group Sheet
Previous Page Next Page
Replace Level Previous Page Next Page
Previous Page Next Page
Previous Page Next Page
Only
Focus
Sheet (Focus Previous Page Next Page
Spread Sheet)
Focus
Sheet (Focus Previous Page Next Page
Spread Sheet)
Focus Sheet
Replace Level Previous Page Next Page
S3
Softkeys (Continued)
Delete Focus
Delete Focus
Delete Focus
Delete Focus
Delete Focus
Delete Group
Delete Group
Delete Group
S6
S8
More Softkeys
(Blind Focus
Point 2)
More Softkeys
(Blind Focus
Capture EDMX
Point)
Return (Blind
Focus Point)
Return (Blind
Focus Point)
More Softkeys
Return (Blind
(Focus Spread
Focus Point)
Sheet 2)
More Softkeys
(Focus Spread
Sheet)
More Softkeys
Capture EDMX
(Blind Group)
Return (Blind
Group)
Return (Blind
Group
More Softkeys
Return (Blind
(Group Spread
Group)
Sheet 2)
More Softkeys
(Group Spread
Sheet)
S7
42
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Sub List (Sub
List)
Select Sub
Select Sub
Cue Sheet
Step
Step
Sub Spread
Sheet (SSS)
SSS2
Blind Cue
Effect (BCE)
BCE2
Positive/
Negative
Step
Attributes
Blind Sub
Effect (BSE)
BCE3
Label
Bump Status
Bump Status
Submaster
List
Sub List (Sub
List)
Alternate
Follow
Step Time
Cue List (Cue
List)
Group Sheet
Label
Bump Status
Sub List (Sub
List)
S2
Select Sub
S1
Bump Status
BSub 2
Blind
Submaster
(BSub)
Display
S5
Rate
Rate
Previous Page Next Page
Previous Page Next Page
Previous Page Next Page
Only
Previous Page Next Page
S4
Bounce
Previous Page Next Page
Sub Sheet
(Sub Spread
Sheet)
Build
Capture EDMX Rate
Reverse
Label
Insert Step
Capture EDMX Rate
Low/High
Previous Page Next Page
Spread Sheet
(Cue Spread
Sheet)
In/Dwell/Out
Previous Page Next Page
Focus Sheet
Replace Level Previous Page Next Page
Rate
Rate
Solo
Solo
Spread Sheet
(Sub Spread
Sheet)
Spread Sheet
(Sub Spread
Sheet)
S3
Softkeys (Continued)
Delete Sub
Random
Delete Step
Delete Cue
Delete Sub
Delete Sub
Delete Sub
Label
Delete Sub
Delete Sub
S6
S8
Return (BSub)
Return (BSub)
Return (BCE)
More Softkeys
Add Channels
(BSE2)
Random Rate
More Softkeys Attribute
(BCE3)
(Attributes)
More Softkeys
(BCE)
More Softkeys
Track Sheet
(BCE)
More Softkeys
Add Channels
(BCE2)
More Softkeys
Return (BSub)
(SSS2)
More Softkeys
(SSS)
More Softkeys
(BSub)
More Softkeys
(BSub)
More Softkeys
Capture EDMX
(BSub 2)
More Softkeys
Capture EDMX
(BS2)
S7
43
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Fader 4
Fader 3
Fader 2
MBB
MBB
Part
Load Sub
Update
Enable
Quickstep
Fader
Update
Go To
Subroutine
Step
Fadeout
Subroutine
Fadeout
Subroutine
Label
Enable
Quickstep
MBB
Select Cue
Select Cue
MBB
Step
Cue List (Cue
List)
Step Time
S2
Step
Bump Status
Bump Status
Step
S1
BCS3
BCS2
Blind Cue
Subroutine
(BCS)
BSE3
BSE2
Display
Dimmer
Dimmer
Solo
Solo
Backgrnd
Overrides
Backgrnd
Overrides
Rate
Rate
Cue Sheet
(Cue Spread
Sheet)
Label
In/Dwell/Out
S3
S5
Insert Step
Insert Step
Insert Step
Follow
Cue Sheet
Go To Subr
Step
Rate
Previous Page Next Page
Capture EDMX Rate
Only
Previous Page Next Page
Type/Level
Type/Level
Previous Page Next Page
Capture EDMX Rate
Capture EDMX Rate
Low/High
S4
Softkeys (Continued)
Park
Delete
Delete
Select Fader
Select Fader
Delete Step
Delete Step
Delete Cue
Delete Step
S6
S8
Dynamic
Effects
Dynamic
Effects
Up/Down/
Follow
Up/Down/
Follow
More Softkeys
Capture EDMX
(Fader 3)
More Softkeys
(Fader)
More Softkeys
Step
(Fader 4)
More Softkeys
Return (Stage)
(Fader)
More Softkeys
Step
(Fader 3)
More Softkeys
(Fader 2)
More Softkeys
(Fader 2)
More Softkeys
(BCS)
More Softkeys
(BCS3)
More Softkeys
(BCS)
More Softkeys
Style
(BCS2)
More Softkeys Attribute
(BSE3)
(Attributes)
More Softkeys
(BSE)
More Softkeys
(BSE)
S7
44
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Edit Macro
Edit Macro 2
Pause Printer
Replace
Label
Label
Delete Entry
View Macro
(View Macro)
Save Showfile
On Sub-Bump Off Sub-Bump On Trigger
On Sub-Bump Off Sub-Bump On Trigger
Enter Macro
Setup Macro
List
Stop Printer
Edit Macro
(Edit Macro)
Edit Macro
(Edit Macro)
View Macro
Show Name
Setup
Setup System
Settings
Setup
Options
Setup Clock
Functions
Setup Clear
Functions
Setup Print
Functions
Previous Page Next Page
Previous Page Next Page
Previous Page Next Page
Previous Page Next Page
Delete Macro
Unpatch
S6
Return (Cue
Sheet)
S8
Off Trigger
Off Trigger
Force Sub
Load
Force Sub
Load
Previous Page Next Page
Previous Page Next Page
Disable EDMX
Return (Setup)
Return (Setup)
Return (Setup)
Return (Setup)
Return (Macro
List)
More Softkeys Key List (Key
(Edit Macro 2) List)
More Softkeys
(Edit Macro)
More Softkeys
Macro Wait
(Edit Macro)
Copy Macro
Dimmer
Return (Stage)
More Softkeys Fixture Patch
(Patch 2)
(Fixture Patch)
More Softkeys
(Patch)
S7
Return (Setup)
Dimmer
Dimmer
Park
Show/Hide
Labels
Range Patch
S5
Previous Page Next Page
S4
Disable MIDI
Label
Patch 2
Profile
Solo
S3
Return (Setup)
Dimmer
Patch
S2
Purge Flexi
Block
S1
Tracksheet
Display
Softkeys (Continued)
45
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Setup Moving
Light
Functions
(SMLF)
Setup Profiles
2
Setup Profiles
Select Profile
Label
Percent
Percent
Select Profile
Clear All
Clear All
Clear to End
Clear to End
Fill Between
Fill Between
Previous Page Next Page
Flip
Independent
Setup
Channel
Attributes
16 Bit
Insert Program Copy Program Move Program Previous Page Next Page
Macro
SRTP2
Days/Date
Time
Previous Page Next Page
Select
Program
Astro Clock
Bump
Step
Previous Page Next Page
Rate
Pause Mode
Setup Real
Time
Programs
(SRTP)
Move Event
S5
Previous Page Next Page
S4
Label
Copy Event
Move Event
Cue
Manual Mode
S3
STC 4
Insert Event
Copy Event
Insert Event
STC3
Code Time
Select Event
STC2
Clock Enable/
Disable
Internal Clock
Setup Time
Code (STC)
Replace
S2
Enter Macro
S1
Key List
Display
Softkeys (Continued)
Label
Return (Setup)
Return (Setup)
Copy to Profile Reset Profile
Return (Setup)
More Softkeys
Copy to Profile (Setup Profiles Return (Setup)
2)
More Softkeys
(Setup
Reset Profile
Profiles)
LTP
More Softkeys
Sort
(SRTP)
Delete
Program
Sort
Sort
Reset Loop
Return (Setup)
Return (Edit
Macro)
S8
More Softkeys
Return (Setup)
(SRTP2)
More Softkeys
(STC2)
More Softkeys
(STC3)
More Softkeys
(STC)
More Softkeys
(STC4)
More Softkeys
(STC)
S7
Label
Delete Event
Delete Event
Macro
Learn Mode
Key List Help
S6
46
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
SMLF DTL2
SMLF
Personality
Functions
SMLF Fixture
Patch
SMLF
Attribute
Setup
SMLF
Encoder
Setup
SMLF
Dynamic
Template List
Display
Label
Category
Page
Label
Delay
Relationship
Select
Attribute
Select
Encoder
Select
Template
Offset
Relationship
S2
Select Fixture
S1
S5
Previous Page Next Page
S4
Distance %
View Attribute
Pan/Tilt
Label
Previous Page Next Page
Previous Page Next Page
Autoload
Encoders
Previous Page Next Page
Encoder Setup Previous Page Next Page
View
Personality
S3
Softkeys (Continued)
Clear Options
Swap Focus
S6
Return (SMLF
or Patch)
Return (SMLF)
S8
More Softkeys
(SMLF DTL)
More Softkeys
Return (SMLF)
(SMLF DTL2)
Reset Defaults Return (SMLF)
Reset Defaults Return (SMLF)
Flip
S7
Channel Concepts in the Emphasis Control System
The Emphasis Control System controls channels using both Highest-Takes-Precedence
(HTP) and Latest-Takes-Precedence (LTP) conventions, and stores information for
channels using both Preset and Tracking conventions. These conventions are described
here so that you can understand the expected behavior of your control channels and cue
playback.
HTP vs. LTP
Emphasis uses two basic channel types – Highest-Takes-Precedence (HTP) channels and
Latest-Takes-Precedence (LTP) channels. In all cases, channels that are parked or
manually controlled by the keypad or through the tools in Emphasis Visualization become
captured and take precedence over any playback controls. See Manual Control, page 86
for more information on selected and captured channels.
HTP
In playback situations, HTP channels will output the level that is highest based on all
channel inputs, like cues and submasters. HTP channels are also referred to as “pile-on”,
because as control inputs are added (you may bring up cues and multiple submasters that
all have a channel recorded at various levels, for example), the system calculates which
input has the highest level for that channel and outputs that level. As control inputs are
taken down (you pull some of those submasters down to zero), the console will adjust the
channel level, if required, to highest remaining level, and so on. Channels that control
dimmers are typically HTP channels.
In cues, HTP channels will always follow the timing of the current cue. It does not matter if
the channel levels are the same from cue to cue. If the fade timing is different from cue to
cue, and you play the next cue before the previous cue completes, the fade time for HTP
channels that are moving will change to the current cue’s fade time.
LTP
LTP channels obey the latest cue command to set their level. They are not affected by
submasters, unless the submaster contains a subroutine (see Subroutines on Submasters
(Subs-on-Subs), page 179). LTP channels can also fade in the background. What this
means is that an LTP channel will always listen to the most recently played cue if it is
moving in that cue. If the channel has the same level in a series of cues, and the first cue
of the series is not allowed to complete before you play back subsequent cues, the channel
will complete its fade in the background in the fade time of the first cue.
Channels levels fading in the background are displayed in purple, and cannot be cleared
from the A/B or C/D faders, since they aren’t really in those faders anymore. You can view
cues running in the background using the Fader display. See Background fades, page 176
for more information on channels in the background.
Independent Channels
Both HTP and LTP channels can also be independent. Independent channels are not
affected by the Grandmaster fader, the Blackout key, and Flash and Solo functions.
Independent channels also have protection from the release command, requiring repeated
key presses to return them to zero or recorded levels. Most frequently, color scrollers and
control parameters on moving light fixtures other than intensity are set as independent
channels. This keeps their moving parts from speeding to full or zero unintentionally when
the Grandmaster, Blackout, Flash and Solo are used.
2
Emphasis Console User Interface
47
Preset vs. Tracking
Preset and Tracking are terms used when thinking about how your cue data is stored,
edited, and what affect it has on playback.
Preset
Typically, each cue you store will take a complete picture of the output of the system and
store it as the cue you designate. There are ways to modify how much of the stage picture
you store (see Record Cues, page 113 for more information). This philosophy is called
preset. In a preset system, each cue stores data for every channel, regardless of whether
that channel’s level is moving. Each cue is a complete picture of the intended stage look,
and each cue is played back in its entirety.
When you edit channels in cues, you need to keep in mind that you are typically editing only
one cue at a time. If you want to change a channel (or channels) level in a series of
consecutive cues, you can either edit each cue one at a time, edit using the Spreadsheet
display (see Spreadsheet, page 139) or Tracksheet display (see Tracksheet, page 142), or
use a Track Record to accomplish this task.
Tracking
In the Emphasis Control System, tracking refers to channels that are recorded at the same
level from cue to cue – those channels appear to track from one cue to the next. Track
editing is a very powerful tool and requires that you understand some basic terms. A track
edit can make very significant changes throughout your show, so use it carefully.
A Track record will change the current cue, and subsequent cues for channels that remain
at the same level until the cue that contains a move instruction for those channels. As an
extreme example, if you Track Record a channel into cue #1 that has not been used
anywhere in your show, that channel will be recorded into your entire cue list at that level,
because it is not told to move in any of those cues. If you make changes to a number of
channels in a cue and then Track Record, each channel will stop the track at it’s own next
move instruction. See Track Record, page 115 for more information.
Back Track is used to track record backwards from the current cue. Track Record will only
record levels into subsequent cues. Use Back Track to record levels into previous cues. As
with Track, the levels will be recorded until they encounter a move instruction or an Allfade
cue. See Back Track, page 115 for more information.
Fill Track is used to track in both directions from the current cue. Use Fill Track to record
forward and backward in the cue list at the same time. As with Track, the levels will be
recorded until they encounter a move instruction or an Allfade cue. See Fill Track, page 116
for more information.
An Allfade cue will stop a Track Record at a certain cue number by forcing all channels to
“move”, even if their level tracks through to subsequent cues. Channels at zero will be given
a move instruction to “be at zero”, and all other channels will be given a move instruction to
“be at your level”. This will appear to a Track Record as a brick wall, and will stop channels
from tracking forward beyond this cue. See Allfade, page 112 for more information.
A Blocked Channel creates a move instruction on a channel basis, rather than a cue basis
as Allfade does. The Block setting remains with the channel as cues are copied or updated,
but are lost if the cue is re-recorded. It is possible to Backtrack over a Blocked channel’s
level, but it is not possible to Track Record over it. Blocked channel’s levels will track
forward normally. See Blocked Channels, page 137 for more information.
48
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Chapter 3
System Settings
This chapter covers the basic settings you can adjust to customize your Emphasis Control
System working environment. It also covers patch functions and the About command.
This chapter contains the following sections:
3
•
The Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
•
Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
•
Using the About Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
System Settings
49
The Setup Menu
The Setup menu provides a number of settings you can adjust to customize your working
environment. These include things like the number of dimmers and channels you have in
your system, how some facepanel controls work, default timing information, among others.
This section describes all the settings available in the Setup menu.
System Settings
The System Settings menu allows you to customize your working environment.
50
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Number of Dimmers
The Number of Dimmers setting adjusts the number of EDMX addresses you can patch to.
In the Emphasis Control System, all patching is made to EDMX addresses (called dimmers
within the patch at the facepanel), which are converted to standard DMX at the output
connector (see DMX Output, page 204). All Emphasis Control Systems can access all
32,767 EDMX addresses if required. However, this is usually more addresses than are
required for a typical show.
Your system will default to a setting of twice the number of dimmers as there are channels,
unless you are running a 5,000 channel system, where the dimmer count will default to the
maximum of 32,767.
CAUTION:
If after a show is patched you reduce the number of dimmers below the number
you have patched, those dimmers will become unpatched. Restoring the number
of dimmers will not automatically restore dimmers lost in the patch. It is
recommended that changes to the number of dimmers be made before you patch,
in order to avoid inadvertently unpatching dimmers.
Change the number of dimmers:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [1] [Enter] to choose Number of Dimmers.
Step 3:
Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel, type in the
desired number of dimmers and press [Enter].
N u m b e r o f C h a n ne l s
The Number of Channels setting adjusts the number of control channels you have
available. You may find that you do not need the maximum number of channels in your
system for a particular show. By setting the number of channels to a reduced number, you
reduce the number of pages of channels you might have to page through in channel and
patch displays.
If you do choose to reduce the number of channels in your system, keep in mind that
moving light fixtures and other DMX controlled devices often require more than one control
channel to operate. Make sure that you include enough channels to control these devices.
Change the number of channels:
3
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [2] [Enter] to choose Number of Channels.
Step 3:
Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel, type in the
desired number of channels and press [Enter].
System Settings
51
Default Fade Time
Emphasis assumes a five-second default for cue upfade and downfade times. You can
change this default time to whatever you like. Each cue you record after you change this
default will have the new time recorded. Changing this setting will not affect cues recorded
prior to the change. See Cues, page 125 for more information.
Use the following guidelines when entering time values in Emphasis:
•
Times can range from 0.1 seconds to 99:59 minutes. Zero timing is also available.
•
Use a decimal point for times less than one second: 0.1-0.9 second.
•
Two-digit entries are calculated in seconds: 42=42 seconds, 90=1 minute 30 seconds.
•
Three- and four-digit entries are calculated in minutes and seconds: 330=3 minutes 30
seconds, 1075=11 minutes 15 seconds.
Change the default fade times:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [3] [Enter] to choose Default Fade Time.
Step 3:
Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel, type in the
desired default upfade time and press [Enter].
Step 4:
Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel, type in the
desired default downfade time and press [Enter].
Default Level
The [Level] key can be assigned any level between zero and full (100%). The default
setting is full. Use this menu item to change it to whatever level you would like. See Set
Levels, page 89 for more information.
Change the default level:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [4] [Enter] to choose Default Level.
Step 3:
Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel, type in the
desired level. This entry self-terminates at a two-digit entry (you don’t have to
press [Enter]), so use the [Full] key to enter 100%.
Default Fader Clear Time
The A/B and C/D fader pairs have a [Clear] key. To remove a cue from the stage output,
clear the fader pair containing that cue. Channels in that cue will be released to the next
highest control input (fader pair or submaster) or will fade out completely. See Fader
Controls, page 170 for more information.
The default fader clear time is zero seconds, causing cleared channels to drop to zero
immediately. If you would prefer that clearing a fader takes a longer time to achieve a
blackout, change the default fader clear time. The fader clear time can be set to anything
from zero to 99:59 minutes, following the guidelines in Default Fade Time, page 52.
Change the default fader clear time:
52
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [5] [Enter] to choose Default Fader Clear Time.
Step 3:
Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel, type in the
desired default fader clear time and press [Enter].
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Default Sneak Time
The sneak function allows you to fade channel levels over a specified time period, rather
than setting the new level immediately or manually setting the level with the level wheel or
trackpad. See Sneak, page 107 for more information.
The default sneak time is five seconds. The default sneak time can be set to anything from
zero to 99:59 minutes, following the guidelines in Default Fade Time, page 52.
Change the default sneak time:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [6] [Enter] to choose Default Sneak Time.
Step 3:
Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel, type in the
desired default sneak time and press [Enter].
Number of Effect Step Channels
In Emphasis you can place up to 1,000 channels (the default value for this setting) in each
step within an effect (see Blind Effects, page 149). If you do not plan to use this capacity,
you can reduce the number of channels allowed in each step. Reducing this number may
improve the memory usage and speed of your system.
Change the number of effect step channels:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [7] [Enter] to choose Number of Effect Step Channels.
Step 3:
Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel, type in the
desired maximum number of effect step channels and press [Enter].
Blackout Key
You can disable the facepanel’s [Blackout] key. This prevents accidental blackouts of the
entire system’s output.
Disable (or enable) the Blackout key:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [8] [Enter] to choose Blackout Key.
Step 3:
Press [0] [Enter] to disable the Blackout key, or [1] [Enter] to enable the
Blackout Key.
Flexichannel
The Flexichannel display mode is described in Flexichannel, page 32. Use this setting to
enable and disable Flexichannel mode.
Disable (or enable) Flexichannel:
3
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [9] [Enter] to choose Flexichannel.
Step 3:
Press [0] [Enter] to disable Flexichannel, or [1] [Enter] to enable Flexichannel.
System Settings
53
Master Type
The Grandmaster fader can be set to one of three options:
•
Disabled . . . . . . . . . . Master fader has no effect.
•
Grandmaster . . . . . . The default setting, the master fader controls all levels on stage
except parked and independent channels.
•
Sub Grandmaster . . Master fader controls all levels on stage generated by
submasters.
Set the Master type:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [1][0] [Enter] to choose Master Type.
Step 3:
Press [0] [Enter] to disable the Grandmaster, or [1] [Enter] for Grandmaster, or
[2] [Enter] for Sub Grandmaster.
Set Channels/Submasters 1-to-1
You can set any or all pages of submasters to automatically record a one-to-one
relationship with your channels. This means you can automatically record channel 1 to
submaster 1, channel 2 to submaster 2, and so on. Each channel records at full, allowing
you to emulate channel faders on consoles without that ability.
Set channels/submasters 1-to-1:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [1][1] [Enter] to choose Set Channels/Submasters 1-to-1.
Step 3:
Press [0] [Enter] to set all submaster pages 1-to-1 (for 240 channels on Express
and Expression, 1080 channels for Insight), or [x] [Enter], where [x] is the page
you want to set 1-to-1.
Bump Keys
You can enable or disable the bump keys (also known as bump buttons) for the channel/
submaster faders. You might want to do this if you or your operator has a tendency to
accidentally lean on or press the bump keys, causing channels or submasters to flash to
full output unexpectedly. Bump keys are enabled by default.
Disable (or enable) the bump keys:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [1] [Enter] to access the System Settings menu.
Step 3:
Press [1][2] [Enter] to choose Bump Keys.
Step 4:
Press [0] [Enter] to disable the bump keys, or [1] [Enter] to enable the bump
keys.
Record Lockout
Once your show is programmed, you may want to prevent an operator from making
changes to your recorded cues or submasters. You can disable the [Record], [Track] and
[Update] functions by enabling the record lockout. The record lockout is disabled by
default.
54
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Enable (or disable) the record lockout:
Note:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [1] [Enter] to access the System Settings menu.
Step 3:
Press [1][3] [Enter] to choose Record Lockout.
Step 4:
Press [1] [Enter] to enable the record lockout, or [0] [Enter] to disable the record
lockout.
Record Lockout only disables Emphasis Console record functions. You can still make
changes to the show file in Emphasis Visualization.
Move Before Bright
You can enable/disable the Move before Bright (MBB) functions from this menu. For more
information on MBB, see Move Before Bright (MBB), page 117.
Enable (or disable) Move Before Bright:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [1] [Enter] to access the System Settings menu.
Step 3:
Press [1][4] [Enter] to choose Move Before Bright.
Step 4:
Press [1] [Enter] to enable move before birght, or [0] [Enter] to disable move
before bright.
Move Before Bright Times
When using Move Before Bright, you can change the delay and/or fade times associated
with this capability.
Enter a Move Before Bright Delay or Fade time:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to display the Systems Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [1] [Enter] to access the System Settings menu.
Step 3:
Press [1][5] [Enter] to choose Move Before Bright Times.
Step 4:
Press [x] [Enter] where x is the length of delay time (in seconds) you want MBB
to use.
Step 5:
Press [y] [Enter] where y is the length of fade time (in seconds) you want MBB
to use.
Options Settings
The Options settings are used when you are using your Emphasis Control System with
MIDI, time code or real time programs. See Show Control Overview, page 209, and Real
Time Programs, page 192 for information on these settings.
3
System Settings
55
Clock Functions
Emphasis has an astronomical time clock that can be used along with real time programs
(see Real Time Programs, page 192) to run lighting cues at specific times of day, or at an
offset from sunrise or sunset. For information on setting the clock functions, see Setting the
time and location, page 192.
If you need to set the time and date for your entire system, you will need to change the clock
settings on your Emphasis Server.
CAUTION:
Due to an ETCNet2 issue, Windows Date andTime, and Time Zone settings can
lose synchronization across mutiple servers sharing an ETCNet2 network. To
avoid this in a Backup System. set all servers to the Central US (GMT -6:00) Time
Zone (see Clock Functions, page 56). You may set the actual time and date
regularly. This solution may slightly affect Astronomical Time Clock functionality.
Set the time and date on the Emphasis Server:
56
Step 1:
Turn on your Emphasis Control System. Allow it to finish its startup before
proceeding to the next step.
Step 2:
Exit Emphasis Visualization. When complete, the login screen will be displayed.
Step 3:
Login as the System Manager.
Step 4:
Right-click the clock at the right end of the Windows task bar and click Adjust
Time/Date.
Step 5:
Set the date, time and time zone and click OK.
Step 6:
Click the Start menu in the Windows task bar and click Log Off. In the
confirmation dialog, click Log Off.
Step 7:
Login as the Emphasis user.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Clear Functions
You can use the Clear functions to remove portions of your show data from your show file.
•
Clear Show - erases all show information except patch and configuration settings.
•
Clear Cues - erases all recorded cue data.
•
Clear Submasters - erases all recorded submaster data.
•
Clear Groups - erases all recorded groups.
•
Clear Focus Points - erases all recorded focus points.
•
Clear Macros - erases all recorded macros.
•
Clear Time Code Events - erases all recorded time code events.
•
Clear Real Time Programs - erases all real time programs.
•
Clear Channel Attributes - resets all channel attributes to defaults.
•
Reset Profiles - returns all dimmer profiles to their default curves. Profiles 1-9 return
to their default curve, profiles 10-32 reset to a linear curve.
•
Set Patch 1-to-1 - sets the patch 1-to-1 with one dimmer per channel. Dimmers above
the set channel count are unpatched.
Note:
If you accidentally clear data, DO NOT SAVE YOUR SHOW. You can reload the show
and restore data current to your most recent save. It is always a good idea to save your
show often during programming.
Print Functions
The print functions menu offers a number of reports that can be printed on a printer
connected to your Emphasis Server (the local printer port on the Facepanel is not
supported). The following reports can be printed from this menu:
3
•
Print Stage Display
•
Print Cues - this report will print cues in Flexichannel format to save paper)
System Settings
57
•
Print Submasters
•
Print Groups
•
Print Focus Points
•
Print Macros
•
Print Time Code Events
•
Print Real Time Programs
•
Print Channel Attributes
•
Print Profiles
•
Print Patch (formatted like the Emphasis Console display)
•
Print Cue List
•
Print Submaster List
•
Print Group List
•
Print Focus Point List
•
Print Moving Lights
•
Print Tracksheet
Macro List
This menu is used in the creation and editing of macros. Please see Macros, page 181 for
the use of this menu.
Time Code Events and Real Time Programs
The Time Code Events menu is described in Time Code Program, page 219, and the Real
Time Programs menu is described in Real Time Programs, page 191.
Channel Attributes
The Channel Attributes display is used to set the following channel attributes:
58
•
Independent - Independent channels are described in Independent Channels, page
47. A “y” in this column indicates that the channel is independent. Use [S1 Independent] to edit this setting for selected channels.
•
Flip - A flipped channel outputs DMX full when the channel level is set to zero, and
DMX zero when the channel level is set to full. A “y” in this column indicates the channel
is flipped. Use [S2 - Flip] to edit this setting for selected channels.
•
16 Bit - A typical control channel is an 8-Bit channel. Moving lights often use two control
channels to operate a single parameter, like pan or tilt, in order to increase the control
resolution of that parameter. This is accomplished by pairing two consecutive channels
to operate using 16 Bits (the lower channel number is the high, or coarse movement,
channel, while the higher channel number is the low, or fine movement, channel).
Channels set to 16-Bit are indicated by “Hi” and “Lo”. Use [S3 - 16 Bit] to edit this
setting for selected channels.
•
LTP - LTP is described in LTP, page 47, and is indicated by a “y” in this column. Use
[S6 - LTP] to edit this setting for selected channels.
•
Attribute Type - This column shows the moving light attribute that the channel is
associated with. For more information on moving light attributes see Attribute Setup,
page 61.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Note:
•
Intensity Channel - An accessory channel is always associated with the channel of the
accessorized fixture. For accessory channels, the channel of the associated fixture is
automatically shown for reference in this column.
•
Frame Table - You can assign frame tables to accessory channels to speed
programming. Use <S7 - More Softkeys>[S3 - Frame Table] to edit this setting for for
selected accessory channels (See Frame Table List, page 69).
•
Channel Label - You can assign labels to channels, if you wish. Use [Label] and the
alphanumeric keyboard to edit this setting for selected channels. When complete,
press [Enter].
Label can be found on <S7 - More Softkeys> [S2 - Label] on Express facepanels.
Edit channel attributes:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [9] [Enter] to access the Channel Attributes display.
Step 2:
Select a channel by typing the channel number on the numeric keypad or by
scrolling through the channel list using the arrow keys. Select channel ranges
using the numeric keypad and the [And], [Thru], and [Except] keys.
Step 3:
Press the softkey that corresponds to the attribute you want to change, or use
the right- and left-arrow ([t] and [s]) keys to scroll to the attribute’s column.
Step 4:
Following the prompt above the softkeys, press [1] to enable or [0] to disable the
attribute you’ve chosen.
Step 5:
For Frame Table, when the Frame Table List window appears, select the Frame
Table you would like to use and press [Enter].
Profiles
The Profiles menu is described in Dimmer Profiles, page 77.
3
System Settings
59
Mo v i n g L i g h t F u n c ti o n s
Adding moving lights to your show is as easy as inserting and patching them in Emphasis
Visualization. Once they exist in your show file, you can make adjustments to their control
at the Facepanel using the Setup menu for Moving Light Functions.
Personality Setup
You can view personalities in your show in this display. You cannot edit or add personalities
here. To add personalities, insert fixtures into your show through Emphasis Visualization.
As you insert fixtures, their personalities are added to this list.
Select a personality number and press [S3- View Personality] to display the names of the
parameters for encoder assignments, as well as 16-Bit channels, independent channels,
LTP channels and settings for the home position. The home position is the placement of
the fixture after it has calibrated and it is ready to be used in the show.
60
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Fixture Patch
The Fixture Patch display allows you to view your moving light patch information, and set
fixtures to swapped focus (pan encoder controls tilt, tilt encoder controls pan) or flipped
focus (you can flip pan, tilt, or both). Swap and Flip cannot be set from Emphasis
Visualization, and fixtures cannot be patched from Emphasis Console, so insert and patch
your fixtures first, then adjust the swap and flip settings here. See how to insert and patch
fixtures in the Emphasis Visualization User Manual.
Set a fixture to swapped focus:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1][1] [Enter] to access the Moving Light Functions
menu.
Step 2:
Press [2] [Enter] to display the Fixture Patch.
Step 3:
Press [S1 - Select Fixture] [x] [S6 - Swap Focus], where [x] is the fixture
number.
Step 4:
Press [1] [Enter] to enable swap, or [0] [Enter] to disable a swap.
Set a fixture to flipped focus:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1][1] [Enter] to access the Moving Light Functions
menu.
Step 2:
Press [2] [Enter] to display the Fixture Patch.
Step 3:
Press [S1 - Select Fixture] [x] [S7 - Flip], where [x] is the fixture number.
Step 4:
Press [1] [Enter] to enable flipped pan, or [0] [Enter] to disable a flipped pan.
Step 5:
Press [1] [Enter] to enable flipped tilt, or [0] [Enter] to disable a flipped tilt.
Attribute Setup
A fixture personality may have up to 64 attributes. Most of the attributes have a name that
describes the function to which they are assigned, such as “Pan”, “Tilt”, “Gobo” or “Strobe”.
Attributes are assigned to a category that describes their general function. You can edit
these assignments if you wish, including attributes in one or more categories. These
categories allow you to select similar attributes across fixtures without having to select each
individual channel within the fixtures. Categories are selected using the [Only] command.
3
System Settings
61
•
Position . . . . . . . . . . Attributes that control the direction of the beam; Pan and Tilt.
•
Image . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes that affect the shape of the beam; Gobo, FX, etc.
•
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes that color the beam: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Color,
etc.
•
Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes that affect the quality of the beam; Intensity, Strobe,
Zoom, Iris, Focus, etc.
•
Other. . . . . . . . . . . . . Typically used for speed and control channels.
Change attribute category assignments:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1][1] [Enter] to access the Moving Light Functions
menu.
Step 2:
Press [3] [Enter] to display the Attribute Setup.
Step 3:
Press [S1 - Select Attribute] [x] [S2 - Category], where [x] is the attribute
number.
Step 4:
Press the following to toggle the category assignment:
Step 5:
Note:
62
•
[1] for Position.
•
[2] for Image.
•
[3] for Color.
•
[4] for Beam.
•
[5] for Other.
When you have completed your adjustments, press [Enter].
To return all attributes to their default settings, press [S7-Reset Defaults] [Enter].
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Attribute names and default categories
Attribute/Category
1: Int(ensity)
2: Pan
3: Tilt
4: Strobe
5: Zoom
6: Focus
7: Iris
8: Frost
9: Lens
10: Cyan
11: Magenta
12: Yellow
13: Clr1
14: Clr2
15: Clr3
16: CTO
3
Beam
Position
Position
Beam
Beam
Beam
Beam
Beam
Beam
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
System Settings
Attribute/Category
17: CTB
18: Gobo1
19: Gobo2
20: Gobo3
21: GRot1
22: GRot2
23: GRot3
24: FX1
25: FX2
26: FX3
27: FxRot1
28: FxRot2
29: FxRot3
30: MSpd
31: MFun
32: IntSpd
Color
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Other
Other
Beam
Attribute/Category
33: IntFun
34: FocSpd
35: FocFun
36: CSpd1
37: CSpd2
38: CFun1
39: CFun2
40: CFun3
41: CFun4
42: GSpd1
43: GSpd2
44: GSpd3
45: GFun1
46: GFun2
47: GFun3
48: GFun4
Beam
Position
Position
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Attribute/Category
49: FxSpd1
50: FxSpd2
51: FxFun1
52: FxFun2
53: Macro1
54: Macro2
55: Fram1A
56: Fram1B
57: Fram2A
58: Fram2B
59: Fram3A
60: Fram3B
61: Fram4A
62: Fram4B
63: FramRot
64: Spin
Image
Image
Image
Image
Other
Other
Beam
Beam
Beam
Beam
Beam
Beam
Beam
Beam
Image
Image
63
Encoder Setup Options
Emphasis allows you to control moving light attributes through the Fixture Box. This display
has six pages and shows up to nine attributes per page. Each attribute is assigned to an
encoder, which is a physical device on Expression/Insight 3 and ECS facepanels.
Expression 2x style facepanels can use an MLM (see Moving Light Module (MLM) for
Expression/Insight 2x Facepanels, page 26) to control moving lights. Express facepanels
and Expression/Insight 2x facepanels without an MLM access the attributes using the arrow
keys and the trackpad or level wheel. You can also assign attributes to an external pointing
device, such as a trackball, using the TX and TY encoders.
Encoders are assigned to 44 of the 64 available attributes by default. It is possible,
depending on the fixtures you have patched in Emphasis Visualization, for attributes to end
up spread across multiple pages of encoders. You can change the placement of the
attributes within the Fixture Box by modifying the Encoder Setup.
In the Encoder Setup display, note the softkeys [S6 - Clear Options] and [S3 - Pan/Tilt]
(these softkeys are also available in the Macro Key List and Key List Help). The autoload
encoders function will autoload pages by category.
If you are using the Emphasis Visualization screens, remember that you can click the
softkeys and other selectable items in the displays instead of using the facepanel keys.
Use [S6 - Clear Options] to clear encoder settings:
64
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [1][1] [Enter] [4] [Enter] to view the Encoder Setup display.
Step 2:
Press:
•
[S6 - Clear Options] [Enter] to clear all encoders on all pages.
•
[S6 - Clear Options] [1] [Enter] to clear the E1-E5 encoders on all pages.
•
[S6 - Clear Options] [2] [Enter] to clear the X and Y encoders on all pages.
•
[S6 - Clear Options] [3] [Enter] to clear the TX and TY encoders on all
pages.
•
[S6 - Clear Options] [4] [Enter] to clear unused attributes from encoders on
all pages.
•
[S6 - Clear Options] [5] [Enter] [n] [Enter] to clear the encoders on page
[n].
•
[S6 - Clear Options] [6] [Enter] [n] [Enter] to clear the attributes from
category [n] on all pages.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Use [S3 - Pan/Tilt] to assign pan and tilt to encoders on all pages:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [1][1] [Enter] [4] [Enter] to view the Encoder Setup display.
Step 2:
Press:
•
[S3 - Pan/Tilt] [1] [Enter] to place pan on the E1 encoder and tilt on the E2
encoder on all pages.
•
[S3 - Pan/Tilt] [2] [Enter] to place pan on the X encoder and tilt on the Y
encoder on all pages.
•
[S3 - Pan/Tilt] [3] [Enter] to place pan on the TX encoder and tilt on the TY
encoder on all pages.
Use [S6 - Autoload Encoders] to load attributes:
Step 1:
Note:
Press [Setup] [1][1] [Enter] [4] [Enter] to view the Encoder Setup display.
It is best to clear the encoders on a page or pages you want to autoload. Only unassigned
attributes are assigned to encoders when the Autoload Encoders command is used. Also,
only the E1-E5 encoders are affected by the Autoload Encoders command. If you are
using more than 5 attributes in a given category, you will need to add any missing
attributes to your encoder setup manually.
Step 2:
Press:
•
[S6 - Autoload Encoders] [Enter] to load the first five used attributes, by
category, in the E1-E5 encoders on each page (page 1 = position, 2 = image,
3 = color, 4 = beam, 5 = other).
•
[S6 - Autoload Encoders] [x] [Enter] [y], where [x] is the encoder page and
[y] is the category number, to load the first five used attributes of category [y]
in the E1-E5 encoders on page [x].
•
[S6 - Autoload Encoders] [7] [Enter] to load the attributes used in the
show. (This is the functionality of the pre-v1.8.0 Autoload Encoders
command.)
•
[S6 - Autoload Encoders] [8] [Enter] to load the suggested Source Four
Revolution encoder setup.
Reset encoder assignment defaults:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1][1] [Enter] to access the Moving Light Functions
menu.
Step 2:
Press [4] [Enter] to display the Encoder Setup.
Step 3:
Press [S7 - Reset Defaults].
Step 4:
Press [Enter] to confirm, or [Clear] to cancel the command. Pressing [Enter] will
restore the default encoder assignments.
T h e D y n a m i c T e m p l a t e L i st
Dynamic Templates contain settings for moving light attributes that create movement (such
as a pan/tilt "circle" or a rainbow color chase) and are used when creating dynamic effects
(see Dynamic Effects, page 99). Emphasis is provided with a number of Dynamic
Templates already available. These templates create some of the most popular types of
moving light effects. You can view and edit the contents of the templates in the Moving Light
Functions menu in the Setup display. You can also create new templates as well.
3
System Settings
65
View the Dynamic Template List:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [1][1] [Enter] to view the Moving Light Functions menu.
Step 2:
Press [5] [Enter] to view the Dynamic Template List.
View the contents of a Dynamic Template:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [1][1] [Enter] to view the Moving Light Functions menu.
Step 2:
Press [5] [Enter] to view the Dynamic Template List.
Step 3:
Press [S1 - Select Template] [n] [Enter], where [n] is the number of the
template you want to view.
Dynamic Templates are created using a series of instructions for specific attributes of
fixtures. The components of a dynamic template are as follows:
66
•
Line ........................ Each line contains the dynamic settings for a single moving light
attribute. For example, a dynamic effect for pan and tilt would
contain two lines, one for pan and one for tilt.
•
Index ...................... The index value builds a channel offset into the dynamic effect.
Leave this value at 0 to affect all channels equally in the template.
•
Attribute.................. The attribute value is the fixture attribute for this line.
•
Table ...................... The table is the type of movement you want the attribute to
perform. Available tables include: Stop, Sine, Step, Sawtooth,
Ramp, Inverse Ramp, Mark On, Mark Off, Spiral, Tangent and
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Random. The following diagram shows these waveforms
graphically.
+100%
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
0%
-100%
-100%
-100%
SAWTOOTH
STEP
SINE
+100%
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
0%
-100%
-100%
-100%
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
-100%
-100%
SPIRAL
MARK OFF
+100%
+100%
0%
0%
-100%
-100%
TANGENT
Note:
3
MARK ON
INVERSE RAMP
RAMP
RANDOM
•
Offset...................... This value determines where in the waveform this entry starts.
50% starts this entry half way into the waveform, 0% starts the
entry at the beginning of the wave.
•
Size ........................ This setting determines how big a change the dynamic effect will
make to a channel level. A size of 10% means that the level will
vary from -10% to +10% of the base value.
•
Rate........................ This setting determines the base rate of movement for the
selected line. Generally, a base rate of 100% means a cycle will
take about 4 seconds.
For more information on Dynamic Effects, see Dynamic Effects, page 99.
System Settings
67
Edit Dynamic Effect Template
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [1][1] [Enter] to view the Moving Light Functions menu.
Step 2:
Press [5] [Enter] to view the Dynamic Template List.
Step 3:
Press [S1 - Select Template] [n] [Enter], where [n] is the number of the
template you want to edit.
Step 4:
Press [S3 - View Attribute] to access the Template Attributes page.
From here you can use the softkeys to change the Label, Offset Relationship, Delay
Relationship, or Distance Percentage. You can also copy an existing template to a new
template number and then alter the characteristics in the new template.
Note:
We recommend making a copy of any template before altering any characteristics. This
will preserve the original template and provide a comparative basis for any new changes.
Create a new Dynamic Effect Template:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [1][1] [Enter] to view the Moving Light Functions menu.
Step 2:
Press [5] [Enter] to view the Dynamic Template List.
Step 3:
Press [S1 - Select Template] [x] where x is the number you would like for the
new template.
Step 4:
Type the name of the new template and press [Enter].
Step 5:
Set the Offset Relationship, Delay Relationship, and Distance percentage as
desired.
Step 6:
Press [S3 - View Attribute] to access the Template Attributes page.
Step 7:
Press [S2 - Insert Line] [y] where y is the line number you wish to create.
Step 8:
Use the arrow keys to navigate through the component columns. Enter
component criteria necessary for your intended effect. For the “Attribute” column
use the [+] and [-] keys to scroll through the available fixture attributes and
choose which one affected by the new template.
Step 9:
Repeat steps 7 and 8 for any other fixture attributes you want to include in the
template.
Step 10: When you are done press [S8 - Return] to return to the Dynamic Template List.
68
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Frame Table List
The frame table list allows you to catalog and edit information when using accessories such
as color scrollers or effects wheels. By naming and defining the range of possibilities, you
can enhance the speed and accuracy of including these devices in your show.
Frame Tables are a generated list of DMX values relative to the options available in your
device. The information is displayed in a table indicating the name of each frame (or other
option), as well as the DMX value to reach the start, center, and end of that frame.
For example, if you have a color scroller with 20 frames of equal size, you can quickly
formulate a table for that device, name each frame individually, and see at what DMX value
each frame begins, centers, and ends.
Create Frame Tables
3
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1][1] [Enter] to access the Moving Light Functions
menu.
Step 2:
Press [6][Enter] to display the Frame Table List
Step 3:
Type a number to indicate the new table and press [S3 - Edit Table]. The new
frame table will open.
Step 4:
Press [S1 - Number of Frames] and then type the number of frames or options
that the device has. Press [Enter]. The table will autofill the start, center, and
ending DMX values for all available frames for the device.
Step 5:
Press [S3 - Frame Label] and then type the number of the frame you want to
label. Press [Enter]. Type the name of the indicated frame and Press <Enter>
or press <F7> to move to the next frame label.
System Settings
69
Edit Frame Table Values
Note:
70
Step 1:
From an open Frame table press <S7 - More Softkeys> and then choose
between <S1 - Start Value>, <S2 - Center Value>, or <S3 - Ending Value>.
Step 2:
Type the new DMX value for the respective field.
Step 3:
Press [Enter]. The cursor will automatically jump from start value, to center
value, to end value. After the end value it will ask you to select another frame.
Frame Tables are not referenced data. When recorded, they are recorded as DMX values
only, not as frames. Therefore, changes to Frame Tables will not automatically update
any recorded data (i.e. cues, focus points) attributed to those tables. Any recorded data
associated with a changed Frame Table will need to be re-written to accomodate for the
changes made to the frame table.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Patch
To control dimmers and other DMX controlled devices using your Emphasis Control
System, you will need to create a patch. Emphasis uses control channels to record data in
cues and submasters. Control channels must have dimmers assigned to them, so that the
dimmers (or other DMX controlled devices) know which channel to listen to for level
information. This assignment is called the patch.
Note:
It is strongly recommended that you use Emphasis Visualization to create your patch,
especially if you are using moving light fixtures. Emphasis Visualization will aid in the
Patch process as well as reduce the potential for errors in generating paperwork.
Interactivity with Emphasis Visualization
While it is possible to create a patch for conventional dimmers in Emphasis Console, it is
better to create your patch in Emphasis Visualization. Emphasis Console only allows
you to patch conventional dimmers to channels, not moving light fixtures that use
personalities. Also, as you patch in Emphasis Console, Emphasis Visualization is entering
data into the show file for “Spare Circuits”, as it has no idea what kind of fixture you are
patching, or where it is hung in your plot. If you are not using the data management or
visualization tools for a show, feel free to patch directly in Emphasis Console.
Expression Users - It is recommended that you read “Patching and EDMX” in Emphasis
Visualization.
Patch dimmers (spare circuits) in Emphasis Console:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Patch] to access the Patch display.
Step 2:
Press [S1 - Dim] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the dimmer number, to select the
dimmer. You can use [And], [Thru] and [Except] to select ranges of dimmers.
Step 3:
Press <Channel> [y] [Enter], where [y] is the channel number. You cannot
patch selected dimmers to more than one channel, nor can you patch selected
dimmers across ranges of channels.
Step 4:
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for additional dimmers.
Unpatch dimmers in Emphasis Console:
Note:
3
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Patch] to access the Patch display.
Step 2:
Press <S1 - Dim> [x] [Enter], where [x] is the dimmer number, to select the
dimmer. You can use [And], [Thru] and [Except] to select ranges of dimmers.
Step 3:
Press [S6 - Unpatch].
You cannot unpatch dimmers assigned to moving light fixtures using [S6 - Unpatch]. You
must unpatch the fixture in Emphasis Visualization.
System Settings
71
Note:
It is recommended that you NOT set patch 1-to-1 and then add moving lights. This will
create duplicate entries of “Spare Circuit” and moving lights which will, in turn, clutter the
data spreadsheet and patch display.
R a n g e P a tc h i n g
There is a softkey in the Patch display in the Emphasis Console that allows you to patch a
series of consecutive dimmers to a series of consecutive channels. If there are more
dimmers in the selected range than available channels, the dimmers will wrap around to the
starting channel in the range and continue patching. The range patch softkey is also
available in the Macro Key List and Key List Help.
Use the Range Patch feature:
Step 1:
Press [Patch] to view the Patch display.
Step 2:
Press <S1 - Dimmer> [x] [Thru] [y] [Enter (or Channel)] [n] [S7 - Range
Patch] to patch dimmers [x] through [y] to a corresponding range starting at
channel [n].
EDMX
Though the Patch display indicates that you are patching dimmers to channels, what you
are actually doing is patching an EDMX address to your control channel. EDMX is ETC’s
proprietary protocol for transmitting DMX information over an Ethernet network. The suite
of ETC network protocols is called ETCNet2 and is the communication method used by the
Emphasis Server and the Facepanel. ETCNet2 is also used in systems that contain Video
Nodes and DMX Nodes. The Video Node allows you to see the Facepanel display(s) and
attach a Remote Focus Unit, an optional keyboard and Remote Macro controller at a
location away from your Facepanel. The DMX Node can be configured for up to four DMX
outputs or inputs, and allows you to have DMX outputs and inputs away from your
Facepanel.
There are 32,767 addresses available in EDMX, which corresponds to 64 universes of
DMX. DMX is the industry-standard protocol for controlling dimmers from a lighting control
console. Each universe of DMX contains 512 addresses. Each Emphasis Control System
can be custom-configured to the needs of the venue, so to explain how patching to EDMX
addresses gets you industry-standard DMX at an output in a simple system, please see the
diagram below.
72
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Control Channels
12 3 45
Patch
997 998 999 1000
Console
Configuration/NCE
EDMX Addresses
3
1 3 5
1
5133 514
5
5122 1
1025 1026
5122 1
32,767
5122
DMX Output Port #1 DMX Output Port #2 DMX Output Port #3
System Settings
73
Using Emphasis with Dimmer Doubling™
Dimmer Doubling is a feature of ETC Sensor dimming that enables you to use a single
dimmer and a special two-fer to control two Source Four fixtures separately, In Emphasis,
there is no convention for patching dimmers as 1A and 1B to indicate which side of the
Dimmer Doubler you are using, as was the case in previous control consoles. To patch
doubled circuits, you will need to patch the EDMX address corresponding to DMX 1-256 for
the A-side of the doublers and EDMX addresses corresponding to DMX 257-512 for the Bside of the doublers.
If you have any questions about patching Dimmer Doubling within an Emphasis Control
System, please call ETC Technical Services (see Help from ETC Technical Services, page
3).
Note:
Dimmer Doubling is available only for ETC dimming systems operating at a nominal 115
volts, 60Hz. It is not available for systems operating at other voltages or frequencies.
Disable/Enable the Facepanel DMX Ports
If you experience problematic Facepanel behavior and you are not using the facepanel
DMX ports for data distribution, you may find improved performance by disabling those
DMX ports. This is especially true for Express facepanels and high channel count systems.
Disable/Enable the Facepanel DMX Ports:
Note:
Step 1:
Power up or reboot the Facepanel.
Step 2:
When the prompt appears at startup, press [1][2][3] to enter the Configuration
menu.
Step 3:
Press [v] [Enter] to view the DMX menu.
Step 4:
Press [Enter] to toggle the state of the “Local DMX/EDMX Input/Output” setting
from Enabled to Disabled.
If you make an error while changing any of these settings, and you want to return to the
previously stored values, do not press [S8]. Simply turn the facepanel power off and on
again. The previous settings will be restored.
Step 5:
Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the DMX configuration screen.
Step 6:
Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen.
Disable/Enable EDMX on Powerup and Show Read
Emphasis Control Systems typically start up and load shows with no specific cue loaded
into a fader pair, essentially sending out all zeros on the EDMX line. This may cause
undesirable behavior in systems that have suffered an unexpected or unintentional
shutdown and are using ETCNet2 DMX Nodes configured for Hold Last Look functionality.
The new “Disable EDMX on Powerup and Show Read” feature allows you to configure your
system to startup and load shows with EDMX output disabled. You can then establish the
state of your console (play back a specific cue, for example) and enable EDMX afterward.
This will cause the ETCNet2 DMX Nodes to transition to an active state without fading to
black.
74
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Disable/Enable EDMX on Startup and Show Load (system setting):
Step 1:
In Emphasis Visualization, in the Emphasis mode Setup menu, click IO. The IO
Settings dialog box will open.
Step 2:
Click to select “Disable EDMX on Powerup and Show Read”. Checked = EDMX
Disabled; unchecked = EDMX enabled.
Step 3:
•
When this box is checked, EDMX will be disabled whenever the system
starts up, and again when any show file is loaded. Checking this box does
not change the current state of EDMX transmission. This setting remains
active on the Emphasis Server until it is changed - it is not stored with any
show file.
•
When the system is started or a show is loaded and EDMX is disabled, the
warning message “EDMX Disabled” blinks in red on the console display
where the Grandmaster status is usually displayed.
•
After you have executed the appropriate cue or established the appropriate
console state, use the procedure below to enable EDMX.
Click OK.
Enable/Disable EDMX manually;
Step 1:
Press [Setup] on the Facepanel or on the virtual Facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization
Step 2:
Press:
•
[S8 - Enable EDMX] [Enter] to enable EDMX transmission after a powerup,
show load or manual disable.
•
[S8 - Disable EDMX] [Enter] to disable EDMX transmission manually.
EDMX Output Range Settings
EDMX Output Range settings can be used to limit the EDMX output of the Emphasis
Control System . This is particularly useful in networks with multiple Emphasis systems
controlling various ranges of EDMX addresses. This feature does not affect which
addresses can be patched, parked, flashed or checked. It only affects which EDMX levels
are transmitted. EDMX addresses not included in the controllable range for a system will
not be transmitted to Emphasis Visualization or to the system as a whole. An individual
system can have up to 12 ranges of EDMX addresses assigned. Systems may overlap
addresses within their active ranges. EDMX addresses that are unavailable to a system will
be displayed in purple in the Emphasis Console Patch and About Dimmer displays.
3
System Settings
75
Set EDMX ranges for the Emphasis Control System:
Step 1:
In Emphasis Visualization, in the Emphasis mode Setup menu, click IO. The IO
Settings dialog box will open.
Step 2:
Click to select “EDMX Output Ranges”. When selected, the Edit... button
becomes available.
Step 3:
Click the Edit... button to open the EDMX Output Ranges (1-32767) dialog.
Step 4:
Set the start and end addresses for up to 12 ranges of EDMX addresses. These
ranges determine which EDMX addresses are transmitted by the Emphasis
Control System. Individual ranges may overlap each other on the same system,
and ranges that overlap between systems on the network will be transmitted by
both systems.
•
Step 5:
76
Click the All button to quickly set the system back to a single range of all
EDMX addresses (1-32767).
Click OK to save your settings or click Cancel to exit the dialog without saving
any changes.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Modifying dimmer output
Normally, when you fade a control channel, patched dimmers will output the same level.
For example, if you set a channel to 50%, the patched dimmers will output at 50%. You can
modify this by applying a proportional level to individual dimmers, or by assigning a dimmer
profile. If desired, you can apply a proportion and a profile to any dimmer. You can select
channels and set them to levels while you are viewing the patch. This way you can see the
affect of applied proportions and profiles.
Note:
Do not apply proportions or profiles to 16 Bit channels. This will yield unexpected results.
Proportional Patching
A proportion applied to a dimmer caps the output to the assigned level. For example, if you
set a proportion of 80 to a dimmer, that dimmer will only output 80% when its patched
channel is set to full (100%). Because this is a proportional setting, when the channel is set
to 50, the dimmer will output 40% (half of 80).
Proportional patching can be used when you need to match dimmers with different wattage
lamps in them, or if you want to keep a dimmer or dimmers from ever reaching its full output.
Set a proportional dimmer output level:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Patch] to access the Patch display.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> <S1 - Dim> [x], where [x] is the dimmer number,
to select the dimmer. You can use [And], [Thru] and [Except] to select ranges
of dimmers.
Step 3:
Press [At] [y], where [y] is the two-digit proportional level. Enter a zero before
single-digit levels (i.e., 08). Use [Full] to remove a proportional level from a
dimmer.
Dimmer Profiles
You can assign a profile to a dimmer in the Emphasis Console Patch display. A profile
governs the output level of DMX in relation to the channel level. Profiles are often used to
match dimmers with different dimming curves, compensating for any mismatches in
dimmer output by adjusting the DMX level. Profiles can also be used to preheat lamps
(warming the filaments can extend lamp life or speed the time to full output on lamps that
are bumped to full).
3
System Settings
77
You can assign any dimmer patched to an 8-bit channel a proportional patch level and a
profile. In that case, the proportional level is calculated first, then the profile is applied to
determine the DMX output for that dimmer.
There are 33 available profiles. Profile 0 is the default profile (linear) and is not editable.
The remaining 32 profiles are editable, with profiles 1-9 given default non-linear curves, and
10-32 left at linear for editing. You can view and edit profiles in the Profile display in the
Setup menu.
View available profiles:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1][0] [Enter] to access the Profiles display.
Step 2:
Press <S1-Select Profile> [x] [Enter], where [x] corresponds to the profile you
want to view.
•
•
•
•
•
•
012345-
Linear (Default - not editable)
IES Square Law
Slow Bottom
Fast Bottom
Slow Top
Fast Top
•
•
•
•
•
678910-32 -
Full at 1%
Preheat at 5%
Preheat at 10%
Hot Patch
Linear
Assign a profile to a dimmer:
78
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Patch] to view the Patch display.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> <S1 - Dim> [x], where [x] is the dimmer number,
to select the dimmer. You can use [And], [Thru] and [Except] to select ranges
of dimmers.
Step 3:
Press [S2 - Profile] [y] [Enter], where [y] is the profile number you want to
assign.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Edit a dimmer profile:
Note:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1][0] [Enter] to access the Profiles display.
Step 2:
Press <S1-Select Profile> [x] [Enter], where [x] corresponds to the profile you
want to edit.
You can copy another profile to the desired destination and edit from that if you wish.
Select the profile you want to copy, then press [S6 - Copy to Profile] [x] [Enter], where
[x] is the destination profile’s number.
Step 3:
Step 4:
3
System Settings
Use the following methods to edit the profile:
•
Press [S2 - Percent] [x] [At] [y] [Enter] where [x] is the percentage of fade
completion and [y] is the desired output percentage. You can also use the
up/down arrows to set the level and the left/right arrows to select
percentages.
•
Press [S2 - Percent] [x] [S4 - Clear to End] to set all percentages above the
selected one to undefined output.
•
Press [S5 - Fill Between] [Enter] to have Emphasis calculate output levels
for undefined completion percentages. Emphasis will calculate an even
transition between set output levels for any undefined levels within the
profile. You must have some set levels within the profile before you press
[S5] for this to have any effect.
•
Press [S7 - Reset Profile] to return the profile to its default settings.
•
You can label your profile (up to 16 characters). The name will appear in the
upper-left corner of the profile display and on the profile printed report. Press
[Label] or <S7 - More Softkeys> [S2 - Label], type in the label on the
alphanumeric keyboard, and press [Enter].
Repeat step 4 until all adjustments have been made.
79
Label Dimmers
You have the option to label dimmers using the [Label] key. On any facepanel you can
show or hide labels using [S6 - Show/Hide Labels] in the Patch display.
Note:
Label can be found on <S7 - More Softkeys> [S2 - Label] on Express facepanels.
Label dimmers:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Patch] to access the Patch display.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> <S1 - Dim> [x], where [x] is the dimmer number,
to select the dimmer.
Step 3:
Press [Label] and type the label name. Labels can be five characters long. When
done, press [Enter].
Step 4:
Press [S3 - Show/Hide Labels] to toggle label display.
Patching to a Strand Lighting CD80 Dimmer Rack
Strand CD80 dimmer racks have 48 dimmer slots. Each dimmer slot holds either two 2.4kW
dimmers or one 6kW or 12kW dimmer. Refer to the illustrations below to determine the
address for the dimmer slots. When patching 6kW and 12kW dimmer, patch the slot’s odd
number to the desired channel number. Patch the slot’s even number to channel zero
(essentially unpatching the dimmer).
80
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
97
98
99 101 103 105 107
100 102 104 106 108
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
109 111 113 115 117 119
110 112 114 116 118 120
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
121 123 125 127 129 131
122 124 126 128 130 132
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
133 135 137 139 141 143
134 136 138 140 142 144
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
145 147 149 151 153 155
146 178 150 152 154 156
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
157 159 161 163 165 167
158 160 162 164 166 168
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
169 171 173 175 177 179
170 172 174 176 178 180
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
181 183 185 187 189 191
182 184 186 188 190 192
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Using the About Command
The [About] command is a powerful tool for viewing information about dimmers, channels
and your Emphasis Console show.
About Dimmer
Use About Dimmer to view patch data and source data about a specific dimmer. Press
[About] <S7 - More Softkeys> [S3 - Dim] [x], where [x] is the dimmer number you want
to view, to open the About Dimmer display.
About Channel
Use About Channel to view patch and usage data about a specific channel. Press [About]
[Channel] [x], where [x] is the channel number you want to view, to open the About
Channel display.
3
System Settings
81
About Show
Use About Show to view statistics of recorded items in your show. Press [About] [Enter]
to open the About Show display.
82
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Chapter 4
Live Editing
This chapter contains information about selecting and controlling channels and fixtures for
use in a live environment, where changes happen on screen and on stage. This chapter
also covers parking channels and dimmers, recording cues and submasters, and timing
concepts.
This chapter contains the following sections:
4
Live Editing
•
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
•
Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
•
Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
•
Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
•
Time Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
•
Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
83
Displays
To control channels live, you need to be in either the Stage or Fader display in Emphasis
Console. These displays show you the channel levels of the current Emphasis Control
System output.
Stage Display
The Stage display shows you the total output of the Emphasis Control System, with channel
levels generated by manual control, cues in the A/B and C/D fader pairs, submasters and
channels in the background.
When Emphasis is set to a System ID other than zero (0), the System ID is visible in the
Stage display. Remote Focus Units (RFU) and Wireless Remote Focus Units (WRFU) will
also display non-zero System IDs.
System ID
Indicator
Expression/Insight
Express
84
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Fader Display
The Fader display gives you the opportunity to view channel data contributing to the output
of the Emphasis Control System by submaster, by fader or by viewing the background. This
is extremely helpful when you have multiple playback controls active at the same time and
you want to make an edit.
Expression/Insight display shown.
4
Live Editing
85
Manual Control
Once you have created your patch (see Patch, page 71), the next step is setting your
channels and fixtures to levels so that you can store cues and submasters. Manual control
is interactive with Emphasis Visualization, so you can choose to work with the mouse,
selecting lights by clicking them, or you may choose to use the keypad interface of
Emphasis Console.
Select Channels, Dimmers and Fixtures
Channels are the means by which Emphasis stores cue data. Everything you want to store
in a cue or submaster needs to be patched to a channel. Channels may have accessories
(like color scrollers) associated with them. Moving lights use multiple channels to control all
their parameters.
Emphasis uses fixture personalities to organize the channels required for an accessorized
channel or a moving light. When you want to use conventional fixtures with DMX controlled
accessories and/or moving lights in your show, patch them using the personalities available
in the libraries in Emphasis Visualization (See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for
how to insert fixtures in data and CAD modes).
You can also access dimmers directly for troubleshooting purposes, or to park them at a
level (see Park, page 109).
Selected channels are under your immediate control. There are a number of ways to select
channels and fixtures: directly by number, by selecting a group containing the desired
channels (see Groups, page 108), and/or by selecting a Concept (see Concepts, page 87).
Dimmers must be selected using the [Dim] softkey.
D i r e c t S e l e c t io n
The most direct way to select a channel or fixture is to simply type its number on the
Facepanel’s numeric keypad. You can select single channels, or multiple channels using
the [And] key, or ranges of channels using the [Thru] key, and you can remove channels
from a selection using the [Except] key. The same is true of fixture selections. In most
cases, the channel key’s LED is lit, making the [Channel] key press optional.
Select channels:
86
•
Press <Channel> [x] to select a single channel.
•
Press <Channel> [x] [And] [z] to select non-consecutive channels.
•
Press <Channel> [x] [Thru] [z] to select a range of channels.
•
Press <Channel> [a] [Thru] [g] [Except] [c] to select a range of channels, except
channel [c].
•
You can use [Except] multiple times to remove multiple channels from the selection:
<Channel> [1] [Thru] [1][0] [Except] [5] [Except] [7], selects channels 1-4, 6 and 810.
•
Press <Channel> [Enter] to select all channels with levels above zero.
•
In Emphasis Visualization, you can click on a fixture symbol to select its channel. See
the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on selecting fixtures
using the mouse.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Select Accessorized Channels:
•
Press <Channel> [y], where y is the intensity channel. The fixture box is displayed and
the encoders (or arrow keys and trackpad) can be used to control intensity and other
accessory attributes simultaneously.
•
Press <Channel> [z], where z is the accessory channel. Control of the slected
accessory is available on the level wheel (or trackpad).
Select dimmers:
•
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S3 - Dim] [x] to select a single dimmer for dimmer check,
or in Patch or Park displays.
•
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S3 - Dim] [x] [And] [z] to select non-consecutive
dimmers in Patch or Park.
•
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S3 - Dim] [x] [Thru] [z] to select a range of dimmers in
Patch or Park displays.
•
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S3 - Dim] [a] [Thru] [g] [Except] [c] to select a range
of dimmers, except dimmer [c] in channel patch or park.
•
You can use [Except] multiple times to remove multiple dimmers from the selection:
<S7 - More Softkeys> [S3 - Dim] [1] [Thru] [1][0] [Except] [5] [Except] [7], selects
dimmers 1-4, 6 and 8-10 in Patch or Park displays.
Select fixtures:
•
Press [Fixture] [x] to select a fixture number. Use [And], [Thru] and [Except] to select
multiple fixtures.
•
In Emphasis Visualization, you can click on a fixture symbol to select its channels. See
the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on selecting fixtures
using the mouse.
Maintained Channel/Fixture Selection
Selected channels and fixtures remain selected through a record operation. By pressing
[Only] you can maintain selection of the same fixtures/channels or you can press another
number to deselect the previous fixtures/channels and select new ones. In Blind mode, to
select a cue, group, submaster or focus point after a record operation, press [Cue],
[Group], [Sub] or [Focus Point].
Examples:
•
[Fixture] [1] [Thru] [5] [Full] [Record] [Enter] [Only] will leave fixtures 1-5 selected
and when [Only] is pressed, the keypad will wait for new values for these fixtures.
•
[Fixture] [1] [Thru] [5] [Full] [6] will cause fixtures 1-5 to be deselected and fixture 6
to be selected instead.
Concepts
In Emphasis Visualization, you can create groups of fixtures (conventional or moving light
fixtures). These are called concepts and are found in the Shortcut bar. Use concepts to
select groups of channels and fixtures, then set levels either with the mouse or with the
Emphasis Console features described in the next section. See the Emphasis Visualization
User Manual for more information on creating concepts and setting levels within
Visualization.
4
Live Editing
87
C h a n n e l s e l e c t i o n i n F le x i c h a n n e l
In Flexichannel mode (see Flexichannel, page 32), channel selection using the [Thru] key
changes slightly. In Flexichannel, only channels used in the show are visible on screen.
When you use the [Thru] key in Flexichannel, only visible channels will be selected. To
select all channels in the range, regardless of their visibility, press [Thru] twice: <Channel>
[x] [Thru] [Thru] [z].
Channels selected with:
<Channel> [7][0]
[Thru] [1][0][1]
Channels selected with:
<Channel> [7][0]
[Thru] [Thru] [1][0][1]
88
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Set Levels
Once channels or fixtures are selected, you will want to set a level. Levels indicate the
intensity level for conventional channels, or the attribute setting for fixtures. Emphasis
Console displays channel levels as a two-digit percentage from 00 to FL (100%).
Note:
You can view the raw data for 16 Bit channels (pan and tilt) in the fixture box (see Moving
Light Control, page 95), otherwise the percentage equivalent is displayed in the channel
area of the Emphasis Console displays.
Channel levels can be set directly, or by reference to a focus point (see Focus Points, page
96). Direct levels are stored into focus points, and can be recorded into groups (see
Groups, page 108), cues and submasters.
Direct Levels
The simplest way to set a channel level is to do it directly using the [At], [Full] and [Level]
keys, or the level wheel/trackpad. This is most frequently used for setting levels for
channels that control intensity (dimmers).
When you use fixtures, you can set levels directly by channel, or by using the encoders, or
the arrow keys and trackpad.
If you are selecting fixtures using the mouse in Emphasis Visualization, you can set levels
using the right-click menu or the Design tools. See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual
for more information on selecting fixtures and setting levels within Visualization.
Set levels using [At]:
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Press [At] [x], where [x] is the two-digit percentage. You can repeat pressing [At]
[x] until you have achieved the output you like without re-selecting the channels
each time, unless you record those levels or otherwise deselect the channels.
Note:
<Channel> [1] [At] [5] [Enter] sets channel 1 to a level of 50%. Using this syntax, you
can skip the zero in levels like 10, 20, 30 and so on. If you want to set a level lower than
10, you must enter the leading zero - [At] [0][5] to set 5%.
Set levels using [Full] or [Level]:
4
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Press [Full] to set the channel(s) to 100%, or press [Level] to set the channel(s)
to the output level set in Default Level, page 52.
Live Editing
89
Set levels using the level wheel (Expression/Insight only):
Note:
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Roll the level wheel away from you to raise the level, or toward you to lower the
level.
Control channels that are not part of a fixture or accessorized channel now default to
control by the Intensity attribute. If you have not modified the encoder setup of your
console (see Encoder Setup Options, page 64), the Intensity attribute will default to the
Y (Level) wheel. If you have adjusted your encoder setup to facilitate the use of moving
lights and you have moved Intensity from the Y wheel to another encoder, all control
channels that are not part of a fixture or are assigned as the intensity portion of an
accessorized channel will be controlled by that new encoder assignment.
Set levels using the trackpad (Express only)
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Slide your finger from bottom to top of the trackpad to raise the level, or from top
to bottom to lower the level. You can change the resolution of the trackpad by
pressing the coarse and fine pads to the left of the main trackpad. The coarse
pad has a rougher texture than the fine pad. When you set the resolution to
coarse, levels change faster when you slide your finger up and down. Use the
fine setting to move levels only a few points at a time.
Coarse pad
Y - Axis
(Tilt)
X - Axis (Pan)
Fine pad
Set levels using Frame Tables:
Note:
90
Step 1:
Select an accessory or accessorized fixture channel using the procedure
described in Select Channels, Dimmers and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Press [At][At], the value box for the accessory will appear, and you will be
prompted to enter a frame number.
Step 3:
Press [x][Enter], where [x] is the number of the frame you want to use. The
accessory channel will automatically jump to the center level of the frame you
have selected.
For [At][At] to function, you must assign a frame table to the accessory channel. For
more information on assigning frame tables see Channel Attributes, page 58. For more
information on creating Frame Tables see Frame Tables, page 97
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
C a p tu r e E D M X
Capture EDMX allows you to grab EDMX levels for selected channels (which may be
generated by another EDMX source on the network, such as a guest console on a DMX
Input Node or another ETCNet2 native controller) and record them into a cue, group, etc.
EDMX addresses must be patched to Emphasis control channels in order to be captured.
In the case of multiple EDMX addresses patched to a single channel, only the level from
the first address will captured. EDMX levels are captured regardless of priority or HTP state.
Capture EDMX levels for selected channels:
4
Step 1:
Select channels using the numeric keypad.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S1 - Capture EDMX] in the Stage display or
[S8 - Capture EDMX] in the Blind display. The EDMX levels are captured and
the appropriate level is displayed on screen.
Live Editing
91
Captured channels and [Release]
When you set channels to levels and then move on to select other channels, the channels
you have just set are displayed in red and become captured. Captured channels have been
set to levels using manual control, and they may have been recorded into a cue, group,
focus point or submaster. Captured channels remain at their set level until you release
them.
Captured
channel
indicator
Selected
channels on the
wheel/trackpad
Captured channels in red
Channels with certain attribute settings (see Channel Attributes, page 58) respond to the
[Release] command differently.
92
•
Selected dependent channels are released with the first press of [Release]. Selected
independent channels are released with the second press of [Release].
•
Unselected (captured) dependent channels are released with the first press of
[Release] if there are no selected channels. Unselected (captured) independent
channels are released with the second press of [Release].
•
If you had dependent and independent channels captured, and some of those channels
selected, it’s possible for you to have to press [Release] up to four times to release all
captured channels.
•
First press releases selected dependent channels.
•
Second press releases selected independent channels.
•
Third press releases unselected (captured) dependent channels.
•
Fourth press releases unselected (captured) independent channels.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Dimmer and Channel Check
Often before a rehearsal or performance, you will want to check that all your lights are
working. Emphasis offers a feature called Dimmer Check that allows you to step
sequentially through your dimmers (EDMX addresses), setting the current dimmer to the
level of your choice. If you want to do this on a channel level, rather than on the EDMX level,
you have a number of choices, described below.
Use Dimmer Check:
Step 1:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S3 - Dim] [x], where [x] is the first dimmer you
want to check.
Step 2:
Press [At] [y] [Enter], where [y] is the level you want the dimmers to go to. The
dimmer will unpatch itself temporarily and output the level you set.
Step 3:
Press [+] to move to the next dimmer, or [-] to move to the previous dimmer. As
you press [+] or [-], each dimmer will temporarily unpatch itself and output the
level you set in step 2.
Step 4:
When you are done checking dimmers, press any key other than [+] or [-] to
release the last dimmer.
Note:
Only one dimmer can be checked at a time using the Dimmer Check feature. Dimmer
check tests all dimmers, regardless of patch.
Channel check using the keypad:
Step 1:
Press <Channel> [x] [Full], where [x] is the first channel you want to check.
Step 2:
Press [At] [0][0] [+] [Full] to set the first channel to zero output and the next
channel to full.
Step 3:
Repeat step 2 until all channels have been checked.
Step 4:
Press [Release] to release the captured channels. You may need to press
[Release] multiple times, depending on your channel attribute settings.
Note:
This type of channel check is typically used for channels patched to dimmers, not for
moving lights. You can create a macro to automate this process. See Sample Macros,
page 189.
Channel check using the [S8 - Flash] softkey:
Step 1:
Press <Channel> [x], where [x] is the first channel you want to check.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> and press and hold [S8 - Flash]. The channel will
jump to full output.
Step 3:
While pressing [S8 - Flash], press [+] to move to the next channel, or [-] to move
to the previous channel. As you press [+] or [-], each channel will temporarily
jump to full output.
Step 4:
Release [S8 - Flash] to return the last channel to its stage level.
Note:
4
Live Editing
Independent channels will not respond to this kind of channel check.
93
Solo
The solo function can be used to suppress the levels of unselected channels. This is helpful
if you want to temporarily change the stage look to just a few channels, or record a cue,
group or submaster containing only a few of the channels in the current stage look.
Set levels using [S3 - Solo]:
Note:
94
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89.
Step 3:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S3 - Solo]. In Stage and Fader, all unselected
dependent channels will be temporarily set to zero level. In Blind, all unselected
channels will be set to zero level.
Step 4:
In Stage, press [S3 - Solo] again to restore levels for unselected channels. In
Blind, press [Release] to restore recorded levels.
In Blind, pressing [S3 - Solo] again clears all levels, regardless of channel selection.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Mo v i n g L i g h t C o n tr o l
Moving lights require multiple control channels to control all their attributes. Collectively,
these channels are called a fixture. Fixtures are patched in Emphasis Visualization using
personalities that automatically match up their control channels to attributes and categories
in Emphasis Console. There are tools for controlling fixtures directly from Emphasis
Visualization. See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on
selecting fixtures and setting levels within Visualization.
There are also features for controlling fixtures directly from the Facepanel. Expression and
Insight facepanels have encoders for easily controlling the attributes of fixtures. See
Moving Light Functions, page 60 for information on setting up fixture attributes and
encoders.
Note:
You can access fixture attributes using the trackpad and arrow keys on Express
facepanels. On Expression/Insight 2x facepanels without the MLM, use the arrow keys
and the level wheel.
When you have fixtures patched in your show, they will appear in the console displays as
channels surrounded by a gray bar. As you select fixtures, their available attributes and
encoder assignments are displayed in the fixture box. You can set levels for channels within
a fixture by direct selection as well.
Fixture
channels
Fixture Box
Encoder assignment
Fixture attribute
16 Bit data
Current page
Control fixtures using the encoders (Expression/Insight 3 or 2x with MLM):
4
Step 1:
Press [S8 - Fixture] [x], where [x] is the fixture number you want to select. Use
[And], [Thru] and [Except] to select multiple fixtures. The fixture box will be
displayed.
Step 2:
Press [Focus Point] [Enter] to prepare the fixture for control.
Step 3:
Press the page keys to move from one encoder page to the next.
Step 4:
Spin the encoder corresponding to the attribute you want to change. Attributes
assigned to TX and TY are controlled by a serial trackball or other pointing device
connected to the Facepanel or MLM.
Step 5:
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have completed all the changes you want to
make.
Live Editing
95
Control fixtures with the arrow keys (Express & Expression/Insight 2x without MLM):
Step 1:
Press [S8 - Fixture] [x], where [x] is the fixture number you want to select. Use
[And], [Thru] and [Except] to select multiple fixtures. The fixture box will be
displayed.
Step 2:
Press [Focus Point] [Enter] to prepare the fixture for control.
Step 3:
Press up- and down-arrow keys ([u] or [v]) to move from one encoder page to
the next.
Step 4:
Press left- and right-arrow keys ([s] or [t]) to move to the attribute you want to
change.
Step 5:
Use the trackpad or level wheel to adjust the attribute level.
Step 6:
Repeat steps 2 through 4 until you have completed all the changes you want to
make.
Focus Points
Focus points are special groups that can be used to set levels in cues and submasters by
reference. When you set channels and fixtures to a focus point, they will take their levels
from those recorded in the focus point. If you make changes to a focus point, any channels
in a cue or submaster with a reference to that focus point will play back with the new levels.
This is very useful for pan and tilt of moving lights. If you are touring a show, or if the final
placement of furniture on your set is not determined, you can create a focus point for each
of your focus positions. When you write your cues with reference to these focus points, and
the furniture placement gets changed, you can simply refocus your lights and update the
focus points with new pan and tilt values, and all your cues will play back using that new
focus information.
Focus points can be associated with focus positions in Emphasis Visualization. See the
Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on linking a focus position to a
focus point.
Note:
Focus points can store data for any channel in your show, not just fixtures or pan and tilt
data.
Record a focus point:
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89, or by using the
encoders, or by direct control through Emphasis Visualization.
Step 3:
Press [Record] [Focus Point] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the number of the focus
point.
Recall a focus point for selected channels:
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Press [Focus Point] [x], where [x] is the focus point number. Channels will be
captured at the level recorded in the focus point, and the number [x] will be
indicated below the level.
Use focus points as selection groups:
Step 1:
96
Press [Focus Point] [x], where [x] is the number of the focus point you want to
use to select channels.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Step 2:
Press:
•
[At] [y], where [y] is a proportional level, or use the level wheel/trackpad.
When you do this, you are using the focus point like it is a group. No
reference to recorded levels is created or maintained. Direct levels are
recorded in any subsequent record command.
•
[Focus Point] [y] [Enter], where [y] is the focus point you want to reference
to. This could be the same as the focus point you used in step 1, if you
wanted to look at the entire focus point on stage, for example. Or, you can
use the focus point in step 1 as a selection tool, and the focus point here as
a level setting tool.
Frame Tables
Frame Tables allow you to catalog and edit information when using accessories such as
color scrollers or effects wheels. By naming and defining the range of possibilities, you can
enhance the speed and accuracy of including these devices in your show.
Frame Tables are a generated list of DMX values relative to the options available in your
device. The information is displayed in a table indicating the name of each frame, as well
as the DMX value to reach the start, center, and end of that frame.
For example, if you have a color scroller with 20 frames of equal size, you can quickly
formulate a table for that device, name each frame individually, and see at what DMX value
each frame begins, centers, and ends.
Create Frame Tables
4
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [1][1] [Enter] to access the Moving Light Functions
menu.
Step 2:
Press [6][Enter] to display the Frame Table List
Step 3:
Type a number to indicate the new table and press [S3 - Edit Table]. The new
frame table will open.
Step 4:
Press [S1 - Number of Frames] and then type the number of frames or options
that the device has. Press [Enter]. The table will autofill the start, center, and
ending DMX values for all available frames for the device.
Step 5:
Press [S3 - Frame Label] and then type the number of the frame you want to
label. Press [Enter]. Type the name of the indicated frame and Press <Enter>
or press <F7> to move to the next frame label.
Live Editing
97
Edit Frame Table Values
Note:
Step 1:
From an open Frame table press <S7 - More Softkeys> and then choose
between <S1 - Start Value>, <S2 - Center Value>, or <S3 - Ending Value>.
Step 2:
Type the new DMX value for the respective field.
Step 3:
Press [Enter]. The cursor will automatically jump from start value, to center
value, to end value. After the end value it will ask you to select another frame.
Frame Tables are not referenced data. When recorded, they are only recorded as DMX
values, not as frames. Therefore, changes to Frame Tables will not automatically update
any recorded data (i.e. cues, focus points) attributed to those tables. Any recorded data
associated with a changed Frame Table will need to be re-written to accomodate for the
changes made to the frame table.
Palettes
If you want to create a quick color select, you can use palettes. Palettes are stored in
Emphasis Visualization as a shortcut in the Emphasis mode. They are not referenced by
cues and submasters, but do provide a quick way to recall colors. See the Emphasis
Visualization User Manual for more information on palettes.
Only and Solo
The [Only] and [S3 - Solo] functions can be used with fixtures to limit selections and record
commands to the attribute categories. This is useful if you only want to set the color
channels of a fixture to a focus point, or if you only want to record position channels to a
focus point, for example. You can also use [S3 - Solo] to step through your fixtures,
adjusting them individually, then return to the whole stage look.
Note:
98
Only is found on [S4 - Only] in Stage, Blind and Fader on Express facepanels.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Select and adjust fixtures using [S3 - Solo]:
Step 1:
Press [S8 - Fixture] [x] <S7 - More Softkeys> [S3 - Solo], to select fixture [x]
and force all other intensities temporarily to zero.
Step 2:
Adjust fixture [x].
Step 3:
Press [+] to select the next fixture, or [-] to select the previous fixture.
Step 4:
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have completed making your adjustments.
Step 5:
Press [S3 - Solo] to return to the full stage look.
Select fixture attributes using [Only]:
Step 1:
Press [S8 - Fixture] [x], where [x] is the fixture number you want to select. Use
[And], [Thru] and [Except] to select multiple fixtures. The fixture box will be
displayed.
Step 2:
Press [Only] [S1 - Position] to select the position channels of the fixture. You
can substitute [S2 - Image], [S3 - Color], [S4 - Beam] or [S5 - Other] to select
channels assigned to those categories. If you press [Only] [S6 - Attribute] [y],
where [y] is an attribute number, you can limit your selection to one attribute.
Note:
See Attribute Setup, page 61 for information on attributes and their categories.
Step 3:
Press [Focus Point] [z], where [z] is the focus point number. Channels will be
captured at the level recorded in the focus point, and the number [z] will be
indicated below the level. You can also set direct levels using the encoders or the
[At] key.
You can use [Only] and [S3 - Solo] to limit the channels you record into a focus point. This
is helpful if you want to create focus points for one attribute category, like position, without
having to clear out all other channels.
Record a focus point using [Only] and [S3 - Solo]:
Step 1:
Press [S8 - Fixture] [x], where [x] is the fixture number you want to select. Use
[And], [Thru] and [Except] to select multiple fixtures. The fixture box will be
displayed.
Step 2:
Press [Only] [S1 - Position] to select the position channels of the fixture. You
can substitute [S2 - Image], [S3 - Color], [S4 - Beam] or [S5 - Other] to select
channels assigned to those categories. If you press [Only] [S6 - Attribute] [y],
where [y] is an attribute number, you can limit your selection to one attribute.
Step 3:
Set levels using the procedure described in Moving Light Control, page 95.
Step 4:
Press [Record] [Focus Point] [y] [S3 - Solo] to record focus point [y] with levels
for the selected attribute(s) only.
Dynamic Effects
Dynamic effects create complex movement effects for moving lights or accessories for
conventional fixtures (such as color scrollers) using a combination of device lists, dynamic
templates and editable parameters. Dynamic effects can be created in Stage or in Blind and
recorded to submasters or cues for playback. Dynamic effect cues and submasters can
also be edited in Stage or in Blind. Base templates provide a starting point for common
dynamic movements such as “circle”, “can can”, “step square” for pan and tilt attributes,
“mark on” and “mark off” for intensity, and stepping or fading color dynamics. Dynamic
effects can be modified by adjusting parameters of the effect in the dynamic effect editing
display.
4
Live Editing
99
Dynamic effects are recorded to cues and submasters. They contain only the dynamic
effect information. For example, a dynamic effect cue containing a “circle” effect contains
only the pan and tilt information for the fixtures in the effect. This gives you the freedom to
play the same effect over various cues or submasters containing other fixture attribute
settings. You may want to use the same color dynamic effect on fixtures that are upstage
in white at one point of the show, and again on the same fixtures downstage in a gobo later
on. The same dynamic effect cue or submaster can be used to perform the color chase in
each case.
Create a Dynamic Effect
Dynamic effects can be initially created in the Stage display or in Blind and recorded to a
cue or submaster. If you create a dynamic effect in Stage, you can see the effect take shape
as you add fixtures, change templates and modify parameters live.
Note:
You can use the Emphasis mode Console layout to create Dynamic Effects using your
mouse to click on softkeys and menu items instead of using the Facepanel keypad.
Create a simple dynamic effect:
Step 1:
Note:
You can also create dynamic effects in Blind. Press [Cue] or [Sub] [Type] [6] to set the
selected cue or submaster to the dynamic effect type.
Step 2:
100
Press [Stage].
Press [S8 - Dynamic Effects] to view the Dynamic Effects Status display.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
4
Step 3:
Press [S2 - Create] to view the Dynamic Effect editing display.
Step 4:
Select the fixtures and/or channels you want in this effect. This can be done by
entering fixture and channel numbers using the keypad, or by clicking on fixtures
in the wireframe view in Emphasis Visualization. When you have selected all of
the intended devices press [Enter]. Use [And] and [Thru] to select multiple
fixtures; use [Except] to remove fixtures or channels from the Device List.
Fixtures and channels will be entered into the list in the order in which they are
selected. Fixture numbers will be preceeded with an “F” and accessory channels
will be preceeded with a “C”.
Live Editing
101
Note:
Dynamic Effects will not run for fixtures that are not patched. However, you may record
dynamic effects that contain unpatched fixtures.
Step 5:
Step 6:
To quickly change the order of fixtures/channels in the list, press:
•
[S7 - Sort Devices] [1] [Enter] to sort all fixtures, then channels, in
ascending order.
•
[S7 - Sort Devices] [2] [Enter] to sort all channels, then fixtures in
descending order.
•
[S7 - Sort Devices] [3] [Enter] to sort all fixtures and channels in random
order. Repeat this step to rearrange the devices in another random order, if
desired.
Press [S3 - Template] to view the available templates. Use the [+], [–] or
numeric keys to navigate the Dynamic Template List. When the template you
want to use is selected, press [Enter]. Alternatively, you can use the mouse to
click the template you want in the template list on the Emphasis Visualization
console screens. If you are creating the dynamic effect in Stage, the fixtures in
the Fixture List will begin to perform the movements as set by the template
you’ve selected.
For more information on templates, see The Dynamic Template List, page 65.
Note:
Certain combinations of fixtures and dynamic effects may not create the “shape”
indicated in the template name. This can be due to the fixture type, hanging location,
base point and other variables. For example, fixtures with moving heads at their 50/50
pan/tilt position will not create “circle” or “square” effects that look like circles or squares
– they will move in “figure 8” shapes.
Step 7:
102
Press:
•
[Record] <Cue> [n] [Enter] to record the dynamic effect to a cue.
•
[Record] [Sub] [n] [Enter] or [Record] [Sub-Bump n] to record the
dynamic effect to a submaster.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Note:
Dynamic effects are only recorded when the Dynamic Effect editing display is visible. If
you have returned to the Stage display while the dynamic effect is running and you record
a cue or submaster, the static “base” channel levels will be recorded to that target - not
the dynamic effect. Make sure to record your dynamic effects from the Dynamic Effect
editing display.
Editing the Device List
The order of devices in the Device List can be adjusted more specifically than the simple
[S7 - Sort Devices] command will allow. These methods are listed below.
•
Enter fixtures or channels one at a time in the order in which you want them to cycle
through the dynamic effect. Use [And] and [Thru] to select multiple devices at a time.
•
Use [Except] to remove specific channels from the fixture list.
•
Use the mouse in the Emphasis mode console displays to select fixtures within the list.
Fixtures added when another fixture number is selected (displayed in yellow) will be
inserted above the selected fixture.
Adjustable Parameters in Dynamic Effects
Every dynamic effect will be created from a base Dynamic Effect Template. These
templates contain specific information to initially set up dynamic movement of a specific
type. You can alter the appearance of a dynamic effect by overriding these parameters and
recording the adjusted effect to a cue or submaster. You can make these parameter
adjustments in Stage as you create the effect (which allows you to immediately see how
your adjustments change the effect), or you can view the recorded dynamic effect in Blind
and adjust parameters there.
4
Live Editing
103
Adjust the parameters of a dynamic effect:
Step 1:
View the dynamic effect in the Dynamic Effect editing display or by viewing the
selected cue or submaster in Blind.
Step 2:
Press [S6 - Edit Parameter].
Step 3:
Press:
•
[1] [Enter] to select Size. Enter a size value between 0-2000%. 100% is the
normal value, less than 100 will contract the size of the movement, above
100 will expand the size of the movement.
•
[2] [Enter] to select Rate. Enter a rate value between 0-2000%. 100% is the
normal value, less than 100 will slow the movement, above 100 will speed
up the movement.
•
[3] [Enter] to select Offset Relation(ship). The offset relationship determines
the spread of fixtures along the path. For example, if the movement is a pan/
tilt “circle”, the offset relationship determines the spread of fixtures around
that circle. Offset relationship may be set to:
•
104
•
All - all fixtures move together.
•
Even - the total number of fixtures is spread evenly along the path.
•
Ratios - the total number of fixtures is distributed in groupings set by
the selected ratio. For example, 1:2 creates two groupings of fixtures
(like odd/even); 1:3 creates groupings of every third fixture, and so on.
[4] [Enter] to select Delay Relation(ship). The delay relationship determines
whether fixture groupings take turns or not. Delay relationship may be set to:
•
All - all fixtures move together - no delay.
•
Even - Each fixture takes a turn; the first completes a full cycle of the
dynamic effect before the next fixture starts, and so on.
•
Ratios - delay is determined by groupings of fixtures set by the
selected ratio. For example, 1:2 delays two groupings of fixtures (like
odd/even); 1:3 delays groupings of every third fixture, and so on.
•
[5] [Enter] to select % Distance. Percent (%) of distance determines how
long each fixture (or group of fixtures) waits for its turn to run when the delay
relationship is not set to “All”. For example, four fixtures in an even delay
relationship performing a pan/tilt “circle” with a distance of 25% will appear
to “follow the leader” around the circle.
•
[6] [Enter] to select Fade. The fade setting modifies how the fixtures start
and end dynamic effects. Press:
•
[0] [Enter] to set no fade, which causes the fixtures to “jump” to their
starting positions when the dynamic effect is activated.
•
[1] [Enter] to fade in by size.
•
[2] [Enter] to fade in by rate.
•
[3] [Enter] to fade in by size and rate.
•
[7] [Enter] to select the Number of Loops. A value of “0” causes the dynamic
effect to run infinitely. Any other setting will cause the dynamic to execute
that number of cycles then stop at the end of the final cycle.
•
[8] [Enter] to select Form. Form settings can be used to constrain pan or tilt
in a dynamic effect. 100 is the normal value, 0-99 will compress pan, 101200 will compress tilt.
•
[9] or [1][0] or [1][1] [Enter] to select the Size, Rate or Form Channel. These
three settings allow you to assign any console control channel to control the
size, rate or form of this dynamic effect. You can then record levels for these
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
channels in other cues and/or submasters that will modify a running dynamic
effect. The control channel need not be patched to any EDMX address to be
used as a Size, Rate or Form channel.
Note:
The size, rate and form channel setting has no affect on the EDMX patch of assigned
channels, so you can have a channel patched to EDMX and controlling dimmers or
devices as well as controlling the size, rate or form of dynamic effects.
Dynamic Effect Playback
Dynamic effects can be recorded to cues or submasters for playback. When you create or
play back a dynamic effect, the movement created by that effect is calculated on top of any
channel levels including background fades, active cues and submasters and captured
channels. This gives you the ability to change the base point of a dynamic effect while the
effect is running by playing cues, activating submasters, or by manual control.
Cues and submasters containing dynamic effects do not contain any other channel data.
You will need to have a “base” look active in addition to the dynamic effect to create the
final stage look. For example, a pan/tilt dynamic effect is recorded at Sub 1. When you
activate the submaster, only pan and tilt channels will be actively moving on stage - no
intensity, no color, no other attributes are recorded in this submaster. To get the pan/tilt
dynamic to move around the desired base point, and have intensity and color and any other
settings you might want, you will need to run a cue along with the submaster.
To have them play back at the desired time in your show, you can fire the dynamic effect
manually or link the dynamic effect to a cue for automatic playback. Some playback options
are listed below.
•
Manually via Subs .. Record the dynamic effect to a submaster. The submaster bump
button becomes the “on/off” button for the dynamic effect. The
submaster’s fader has no function when the sub contains a
dynamic effect. When the submaster is active, the LED blinks at a
fast rate. Using this method, you can simply activate the dynamic
effect as needed with any other manually set levels, cues or
submasters as the base.
•
Manually via Cues .. Record the dynamic effect to a cue. Press [Cue] [n], where [n] is
the number of the dynamic effect cue, to make cue [n] the next cue
for playback. Press [Go] on the fader pair you want to play the cue
in. You can pile-on dynamic effects by playing back other dynamic
effect cues without clearing the fader pair. Dynamic effects will
continue to run until the fader pair is cleared, background fades
are cleared, or another dynamic effect cue with the same fixture
attributes is played back.
•
Linking a Sub ......... You can link submasters directly to cues. See the Emphasis
Console User Manual for directions on linking submasters to cues.
•
Linking a Macro ...... For complex cue sequences, you may find that linking a macro to
a cue allows you to create exactly the effect combination you want.
See Create Macros, page 182 for directions on creating macros
and linking them to cues.
Modifying Rate and Size
You can modify the rate and size of running dynamic effects “on the fly” using the X and Y
wheels on Expression and Insight facepanels or the left and right halves of the trackpad on
Express facepanels. The rate and size parameters are automatically placed on the wheels/
4
Live Editing
105
trackpad when you view or edit a live dynamic effect. They stay assigned to the wheels/
trackpad when you return to the Dynamic Effect Status display until you press [Release] or
return to Stage or some other display.
Modify size and/or rate of running dynamic effects:
Step 1:
Press [Stage].
Step 2:
Press [S8 - Dynamic Effects] to view the Dynamic Effects Status display.
Step 3:
Press [S1 - Select Effect] [n] [Enter], where [n] is the number of the running
effect in the Dynamic Effect Status display. The size of the selected effect is
placed on the “Y/Level” wheel or the right half of the trackpad on your Facepanel.
Rate is placed on the “X/Rate” wheel or the left half of the trackpad. Effects
placed on the wheels (or trackpad) are shown in light blue in the Dynamic Effect
Status display.
Step 4:
Move the wheels (or slide your finger up and down the appropriate side of the
trackpad) to adjust the size and rate of the selected effect(s). The “DE Not
Recorded” message will flash on screen to indicate that changes have been
made but not recorded. Also, a blinking asterisk will appear next to the effect
number that has been modified but not recorded.
Step 5:
If desired, record the new size and/or rate levels to the dynamic effect cue(s) or
submaster(s).
a: Press [n] [Enter], where [n] is the effect you want to record.
b: Press [Record] <x> [Enter], where <x> is the cue or submaster number, to
record the adjusted dynamic effect. If you are recording the adjusted dynamic
effect back to its original source cue or submaster, you do not need to re-enter
the number.
Modify size and/or rate of running dynamic effect cue using [Rate]:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Rate] on the fader pair currently running the dynamic effect cue. The size
of the selected effect is placed on the “Y/Level” wheel or the right half of the
trackpad on your Facepanel. Rate is placed on the “X/Rate” wheel or the left half
of the trackpad.
Step 2:
Move the wheels (or slide your finger up and down the appropriate side of the
trackpad) to adjust the size and rate of the selected effect(s). The “DE Not
Recorded” message will flash on screen to indicate that changes have been
made but not recorded. Also, in the Dynamic Effects Status display, a blinking
asterisk will appear next to the effect number that has been modified but not
recorded.
Step 3:
Press [S8 - Dynamic Effects] to view the Dynamic Effects Status display.
Step 4:
Press [n] [Enter], where [n] is the effect number, to view the adjusted dynamic
effect.
Step 5:
Press [Record] [Enter] to record the adjustments back into the source cue.
You can also record the dynamic effect to a different cue number or to a submaster.
Modify size and/or rate of a dynamic effect submaster using [S5 - Rate]:
Step 1:
106
Press [Sub] [n] <S7 - More Softkeys> [S5 - Rate], where [n] is the submaster
number containing the dynamic effect. The size of the selected effect is placed
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
on the “Y/Level” wheel or the right half of the trackpad on your Facepanel. Rate
is placed on the “X/Rate” wheel or the left half of the trackpad.
Step 2:
Move the wheels (or slide your finger up and down the appropriate side of the
trackpad) to adjust the size and rate of the selected effect(s). The “DE Not
Recorded” message will flash on screen to indicate that changes have been
made but not recorded. Also, in the Dynamic Effects Status display, a blinking
asterisk will appear next to the effect number that has been modified but not
recorded.
Step 3:
Press [S8 - Dynamic Effects] to view the Dynamic Effects Status display.
Step 4:
Press [n] [Enter], where [n] is the effect number, to view the adjusted dynamic
effect.
Step 5:
Press [Record] [Enter] to record the adjustments back into the source
submaster.
Note:
You can also record the dynamic effect to a different cue number or to a submaster.
Sneak
With the sneak function, you can manually set direct levels over time. When you use the
[At], [Full], [Level] and [Release] keys, the new level takes affect immediately. When you
use the level wheel or trackpad, you may not fade to the new level evenly. If you need to
change channel levels, and you want the change to be smooth or go unnoticed (like in a
performance situation), you can use the sneak function to have channels assume new
levels (or restore to recorded levels) over a given period of time. You can use the default
sneak time, set in Default Sneak Time, page 53, or you can set the sneak time yourself.
Note:
You cannot sneak to a focus point, only to direct levels.
Set channel level using [S6 - Sneak]:
Step 1:
Press <Stage>. The sneak softkey is only available in the Stage display.
Step 2:
Press [S6 - Sneak]. This activates the sneak mode.
Step 3:
Select the channels you want to sneak using the procedure described in Select
Channels, Dimmers and Fixtures, page 86. You do not need to press [Channel].
Step 4:
Choose one of the following options:
Note:
4
Live Editing
•
Press [Enter] to sneak the channels out, or to recorded levels, in the default
Sneak time.
•
Press [Time] [y] [Enter] to sneak the channels out, or to recorded levels, in
the time [y].
•
Press [At] [x] [Enter], to sneak to level [x] in the default Sneak time.
•
Press [At] [x] [Time] [y] [Enter] to sneak to level [x] in the time [y].
To sneak all captured channels out or to their recorded levels in the default sneak time,
press [S6 - Sneak] [Enter].
107
Channel Faders (Express Two-Scene/Insight only)
On Express Two-Scene facepanels and on Insight facepanels you have the option of
setting channel levels using the channel faders. Express Two-Scene facepanels have
dedicated channel faders, and Insight facepanels share channel and submaster faders.
Channel levels set with the channel faders are not captured, but will remain active under
HTP operation until the channel fader is moved back to the zero position.
To operate an Express Two-Scene console using channel faders, please see Express
Facepanel Two-Scene Operation, page 302 .
Use channel faders on Insight facepanels:
Step 1:
The facepanel defaults to Submaster faders (the [Sub Mode] LED is lit). Press
[Sub Mode] to turn off the LED and switch to channel mode.
Step 2:
Slide the faders to the levels you require.
Groups
If you find yourself selecting the same groupings of channels over and over, or you always
want to set levels for certain channels proportionally relative to each other, you can record
those channels with levels to a group. A group is a simple way to select multiple channels
with minimal key presses. You can also use recorded cues and submasters as groups, see
Using Cues as Groups, page 116 and Using Submasters as Groups, page 124 for more
information.
Record a group:
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89. Only channels
with levels are recorded into groups.
Step 3:
Press [Record] [Group] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the group number.
Recall a group:
•
Press [Group] [x] [Full], where [x] is the group number, to recall the group as it was
recorded.
•
Press [Group] [x] [At] [y], where [x] is the group number and [y] is a level, to recall the
group at a proportional level. For example, you recorded the channels in group 1 at full.
When you recall [Group] [1] [At] [7][5], all the channels in group 1 will be set to 75%.
If the channels were recorded into group 1 at 80%, that same syntax would set the
group 1 channels to 60% (75% of 80).
Recall groups using [Only]:
108
Step 1:
Press [Group] [x] to select the first group. You can use [And] and [Thru] to
select multiple groups.
Step 2:
Press [Only] [Group] [y] to select only the channels that are common to groups
[x] and [y].
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Park
Parked channels and dimmers are set to a level that they will maintain regardless of manual
control, cue or submaster playback. Parked levels are not recorded into cues, groups or
submasters and are independent of most other instructions, with the following exception:
•
[Blackout] affects parked dependent channels. Independent channels are not affected
by [Blackout].
Channels and dimmers that are unparked will return to whatever control input has the
highest level, or they will return to zero output.
Note:
Since you can park channels and dimmers separately, it is possible to park a channel and
its patched dimmer at different levels. In this case, the parked dimmer level will take
precedence. When the dimmer is unparked, the channel’s parked level will take
precedence.
Park Dimmers
When you park dimmers, they will stay at their parked level and ignore any instructions they
get from the channel they are patched to. So, you can park a dimmer to a specific level (to
maintain worklight, or for troubleshooting purposes, for example) and still be setting
channel levels and recording cues.
Park dimmers at direct levels:
4
Step 1:
In the Stage display, press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S6 - Park]. In the Park
display, you do not need to press a softkey before selecting dimmers.
Step 2:
Select dimmers using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers and
Fixtures, page 86.
Step 3:
If selected dimmers are not already at the levels you require, press [At] [x],
where [x] is the level you desire. If they are at the levels you require, skip this
step.
Step 4:
Press [Enter] to park the dimmers. In the Park display, dimmers will display the
level they are parked to.
Live Editing
109
Park Channels
You can park channels at direct levels, or with reference to a focus point. Channels parked
at a focus point will update their parked level if the corresponding focus point is changed.
See Focus Points, page 96 for more information.
Park channels at direct levels:
Step 1:
In the Stage display, press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S6 - Park]. In the Park
display, you do not need to press a softkey before selecting channels.
Step 2:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 3:
If selected channels are not already at the levels you require, press [At] [x],
where [x] is the level you desire. If they are at the levels you require, skip this
step.
Step 4:
Press [Enter] to park the channels. In the Park display, channels will display the
level they are parked to.
Park channels at focus points:
Step 1:
In the Stage display, press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S6 - Park]. In the Park
display, you do not need to press a softkey before selecting channels.
Step 2:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 3:
Press [Focus Point] [x], where [x] is the number of the focus point.
Step 4:
Press [Enter] to park the channels. In the Park display, channels will display the
level they are parked to and the focus point number they are referencing.
Park Groups, Focus Points, Cues and Submasters
You can park channels at levels based upon recorded groups, focus points, cues and
submasters. When you park based upon recorded levels, you have the option of parking at
the recorded levels, or at a proportional level.
Park channels relative to recorded levels:
110
Step 1:
In the Stage display, press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S6 - Park]. In the Park
display, you do not need to press a softkey before selecting channels.
Step 2:
Press [Group] [x], where [x] is the group number. [Group] can be replaced with
[Cue], [Sub] or [Focus Point] as needed.
Step 3:
Press [Full] to park at recorded levels, or press [At] [y], where [y] is the
proportional level. For example, channel 1 is recorded into group 1 at full (100%).
You park [Group] [1] [At] [5][0]. Channel 1 will park at 50%.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Park Fixtures
If you need to park a moving light, you can park whole fixtures one at a time or in ranges.
You can park them with direct levels or with reference to a focus point. You can only park
fixtures from the Stage display, and when you park a fixture, all associated channels are
parked whether you select them to set levels or not.
Park fixtures:
Step 1:
Press [Stage].
Step 2:
Select fixtures using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers and
Fixtures, page 86.
Step 3:
Set levels for the fixture(s) as described in Moving Light Control, page 95.
Step 4:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S6 - Park] [Enter]. The selected fixture(s)
channels will be parked at their direct level, or at the level generated by a
referenced focus point, or at zero if they were without a set level when parked.
Unpark
When you unpark channels and dimmers, they are released to the highest control input
level or are sent to zero output.
Unpark channels:
Step 1:
In the Stage display, press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S6 - Park]. In the Park
display, you do not need to press a softkey before selecting channels.
Step 2:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86. You can also select channels to unpark by [Group],
[Cue], [Sub] and [Focus Point].
Step 3:
Press [Release] to unpark the channel(s).
Note:
To unpark all channels from Stage, press [S6 - Park] [Release] [Enter]. To unpark all
channels in the Park display, press [Release] [Enter].
Unpark dimmers:
Step 1:
In the Stage display, press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S6 - Park]. In the Park
display, you do not need to press a softkey before selecting dimmers.
Step 2:
Select dimmers using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers and
Fixtures, page 86.
Step 3:
Press [Release] to unpark the dimmer(s).
Note:
4
Live Editing
To unpark all dimmers from Stage, press [S6 - Park] <S7 - More Softkeys> [S3 - Dim]
[Release] [Enter]. To unpark all dimmers in the Park display, press <S7 - More
Softkeys> [S3 - Dim] [Release] [Enter].
111
Cues
Cues are one of the fundamental playback methods in your Emphasis Control System. A
cue is a recorded stage look that exists within a structure known as a cue list. Cues can be
played back individually or in sequential order in the A/B and C/D fader pairs (see A/B and
C/D Fader Pairs, page 170). Cues contain fade times, and can contain wait and follow
instructions (see Time Functions, page 125), links to other cues, macros or submasters
(see Link Functions, page 113), and can be labeled (see Label, page 130).
Emphasis has a 9,999 cue capacity. You can number cues from 0.1 - 999.9. Cues can be
used as groups (see Using Cues as Groups, page 116), and are the basic unit for
subroutines (see Subroutines, page 143).
Cue Types
In general, when you play back cues, you are simply fading one stage look into another.
There are six cue types that can affect how cues play back, or how cues are edited.
Crossfade
In a crossfade cue, channels that are moving to a higher level will fade in the upfade time,
and channels that are moving to a lower level will fade in the downfade time. Channels may
be tracked through crossfade cues.
Allfade
Allfade cues force all unused channels to move to zero, and create move instructions for all
tracking channels in the cue. This cue type will stop a track record from changing levels in
subsequent cues (see Tracking, page 114). This is a useful cue type to use at the end of
scenes or acts. An allfade cue also clears the other fader pair when played back.
Block
A block cue forces all LTP channels to fade to completion in background cue timing and
then runs in a physical fader like any other cue. Use block cues to end effects running in
the background, without having to use the [S3 - Background Overrides] command.
Effect
Instead of simply fading from one stage look to another, an effect cue runs a dynamic series
of steps at a given rate. Each step contains channels or groups at levels. An example of a
simple effect is a chase, where lights turn on and off in sequence. Complex effects can be
made as well, to emulate lightning or fire or reflections off water, for example. Effects can
also be used with moving lights. See Stage Effects, page 117 for information on creating
effect cues.
Dynamic Effect
See Create a simple dynamic effect:, page 100.
Subroutine
Subroutine cues are like effects, but instead of using channels and groups as the base
element, subroutines use cues. In a sense, a subroutine is a cue list of its own, that can run
as an automated loop, or can wait for a manual go for each step. Subroutines are very
useful for creating complex moving light effects. Subroutine cues are slightly different than
Subroutines-on-Submasters, described in Subroutines on Submasters (Subs-on-Subs),
page 179.
112
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Record Cues
Emphasis provides two basic recording functions – [Record] and [Track]. The [Record]
function saves all channels at their Stage levels in the cue, group or submaster you specify.
When you use [Record] for cues, only the cue you specify is affected. [Track], on the other
hand, can make changes across a series of cues (see Tracking, page 114).
Record cues:
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95.
Step 3:
Press [Record] <Cue> [x] [Enter], where [x] is the target cue number. If the
target cue number has already been recorded, a “Cue Recorded” message will
blink on the stage display. If you choose to record to a used number, the new look
will overwrite the old look.
Note:
Remember that the [Record] function will store all Stage levels in the cue, group or
submaster you specify. Make sure that you have cleared all unwanted channels before
recording your cues. Stray channel levels may come from captured channels, active
submasters, cues in the fader pairs, or channels in the background. If you need to leave
a channel or dimmer at a level, but you do not want to record it at that level in your cues,
use the Except or Solo commands (see Special Functions, page 128) or the Park
command (see Park, page 109).
Link Functions
There are times when you want cues to play back out of numerical order, or you may want
other things to happen in your Emphasis Control System when a cue is played back. You
can use the [Link] function to change the order of the cue list, without having to re-record
all your cues, and to link cues to submaster bumps and macros. You can enter links in
Stage, Blind, Fader and Cue List displays.
When you link a cue to another cue you change the playback order of your cue list. For
example, you have a cue list of five cues numbered 1-5 and you link cue 1 to cue 5. When
you play back cue 1, cue 5 becomes the next cue, skipping over cues 2-4. By linking cues
in both directions, you can create link loops. In a link loop, pressing [Go] will keep you within
the loop.
Link a cue to another cue:
Step 1:
Press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the first cue to play back.
Step 2:
Press [Link] <Cue> [y] [Enter], where [y] is the cue to jump to in the cue list.
Link to macros
You can link a cue to a macro. A macro is a recorded series of commands (see Macros,
page 181). The macro will fire as soon as you press [Go], unless you have entered a
[Follow] time in the cue (see Follow, page 126).
Link a cue to a macro:
4
Step 1:
Press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the cue you are linking the macro to.
Step 2:
Press [Link] [Enter Macro] [y] [Enter], where [y] is the macro number.
Live Editing
113
Link to submasters
You can also link a cue to a submaster (see Submasters, page 121). Submaster links have
two components - sub-bump on and sub-bump off. This allows you to fire a submaster
automatically when you press [Go]. Use sub-bump on to fade in the submaster, and subbump off to fade out the submaster. The submaster will fire as soon as you press [Go],
unless you have entered a [Follow] time in the cue.
Link a cue to a submaster:
Step 1:
Press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the cue you are linking the submaster to.
Step 2:
Press:
•
[Link] [Sub] [+] [y] [Enter], where [y] is the submaster number, to link to a
sub-bump on.
•
[Link] [Sub] [-] [y] [Enter], where [y] is the submaster number, to link to a
sub-bump off.
•
You can press the actual submaster bump button instead of entering the
number - [Link] [Sub] [+] [Sub-Bump y] [Enter]. You still need to indicate
[+] or [-] to indicate whether you want the submaster to turn on or off.
Clear a link
You can only have one item linked to a single cue at a time. If you have a cue linked to
another cue, and then link a macro to that same cue, the cue link will be replaced with the
macro link. You can also clear a link completely. Clearing a link does not clear any
associated [Follow] time (see Follow, page 126).
Clear a link:
Step 1:
Press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the cue number containing the link.
Step 2:
Press [Link] [Clear]. This removes the link.
Tracking
Tracking is an editing method that enables you to change channel levels through
consecutive cues. You can track forward, track backward, or both directions at once.
Tracking is a powerful tool that should be used with care, as it can make sweeping changes
in your show with only a few key presses.
When you have channel levels that stay the same through a series of consecutive cues,
those levels are said to track through those cues (shaded cells in the table below show
tracking channels). Track recording will change the whole series of cues in one record
action. A track record stops changing cues when the tracked channel’s level moves to a
different level, the channel is blocked (see Blocked Channels, page 137), or a block or
allfade cue is encountered (see Cue Types, page 112).
Channels
Cue 1
Cue 2
Cue 3
Cue 4
Cue 5
Note:
114
1
00
FL
FL
FL
00
2
25
25
25
25
25
3
00
60
50
50
50
4
FL
FL
FL
FL
00
5
30
25
50
30
65
If you use [Track] and have blackout cues in your show, make them allfade cues. This
will keep channels from unintentionally tracking through your blackouts.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Track Record
[Track] will modify tracking levels in cues in a forward direction in the cue list. Changes
made to cue 3 with a [Track] record will affect the cue list as shown below in bold levels:
Channels
Cue 1
Cue 2
Cue 3
Cue 4
Cue 5
1
00
FL
50
50
00
2
25
25
75
75
75
3
00
60
75
75
75
4
FL
FL
80
80
00
5
30
25
65
30
65
Track changes forward through the cue list:
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95.
Step 3:
Press [Track] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the cue number you want to track from.
Changes will be made to all channels that remain at the same level from the
source cue, forward through the cue list, until a move, channel block or allfade
cue is encountered.
B a c k T r a ck
[Track] [Track] will modify tracking levels in cues in a backward direction in the cue list.
Changes made to cue 3 with a [Track] [Track] record will affect the cue list as shown below
in bold levels:
Channels
Cue 1
Cue 2
Cue 3
Cue 4
Cue 5
1
00
50
50
FL
00
2
75
75
75
25
25
3
00
60
75
50
50
4
80
80
80
FL
00
5
30
25
65
30
65
Track changes backward through the cue list:
4
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95.
Step 3:
Press [Track] [Track] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the cue number you want to track
from. Changes will be made to all channels that remain at the same level from
the source cue, backward through the cue list, until a move, channel block or
allfade cue is encountered.
Live Editing
115
Fill Track
[Track] [Track] [Track] will modify tracking levels in cues in both directions in the cue list.
Changes made to cue 3 with a [Track] [Track] [Track] record will affect the cue list as
shown below in bold levels:
Channels
Cue 1
Cue 2
Cue 3
Cue 4
Cue 5
1
00
50
50
50
00
2
75
75
75
75
75
3
00
60
75
75
75
4
80
80
80
80
00
5
30
25
65
30
65
Track changes forward and backward through the cue list:
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95.
Step 3:
Press [Track] [Track] [Track] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the cue number you want
to track from. Changes will be made to all channels that remain at the same level
from the source cue, forward and backward through the cue list, until a move,
channel block or allfade cue is encountered.
Using Cues as Groups
Recorded cues can be used for channel selection and level setting just like groups. When
you use the [Group] [Cue] command, all the channels recorded in that cue are selected,
and their recorded levels can be recalled proportionally. You can also use [Group] [Cue]
with [Only] to selectively recall levels for selected channels or fixtures from recorded cues.
Note:
Cues containing an effect, dynamic effect, or subroutine cannot be used as groups.
Use a cue as a group:
Step 1:
Press [Group] [Cue] [x], where [x] is the cue number you would like to use as a
group. This will select all the channels recorded in that cue.
Step 2:
Press [At] [y], where [y] is the proportional level, or use the level wheel/trackpad.
Use [Full] to recall the recorded levels in the cue.
Use [Group] [Cue] with [Only]:
116
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Press [Only] [Group] [Cue] [x], where [x] is the recorded cue containing the
levels you want to recall.
Step 3:
Press [Full] to recall the levels as recorded in cue [x]. Use the level wheel,
trackpad, or [At] to recall proportional levels.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Stage Effects
Effect cues can be created in Stage or Blind (see Blind Effects, page 149). The advantage
of working in Stage is that you can see the look of each effect step as it is created. An effect
is made up of channels at levels in steps. Steps are played back in the effect at a given rate
and in a given direction. Typically, effects will loop their steps so that they can play
continuously. In Blind, effect steps can be randomized and can be assigned other attributes
that affect their playback.
Create an effect in Stage:
Step 1:
Press [Stage].
Step 2:
Press [Cue] [x] [Type] [3] to set cue [x] to the effect type. The attribute bar will
indicate that the cue is now an effect.
Step 3:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86. You can select channels, fixtures, groups or focus points.
Step 4:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95. If a channel references a focus point for its level, the level
will update when the focus point is changed.
Step 5:
Press [Record] [Enter]. Active channels will be recorded to step 1 of the effect.
Step 6:
Repeat steps 3-5, making sure that only the channels you want to include in a
step are active. Each time you press [Record] [Enter], the next consecutive step
will be recorded.
Note:
If you want to record steps out of order, press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S8 - Step] to select
the step you want to record.
Move Before Bright (MBB)
Move Before Bright (MBB) automates the process of presetting a fixture to its position prior
to fading up. With MBB enabled, Emphasis will look ahead one cue and move any fixtures
at zero intensity to their new position in a given delay and fade time. This feature can be
enabled and disabled globally or disabled by cue. Also, new shows created in v1.7.1 and
beyond will default to MBB enabled. Shows opened in v1.7.1 and beyond, but created in
previous versions of Emphasis, will default to MBB disabled.
To use MBB, you will need to understand a few terms:
4
•
“Dark” cue: the cue before a bright cue, in which the fixtures to be moved are at zero
intensity. MBB will move the “dark” fixtures into place after the completion of the current
cue plus the MBB delay time.
•
“Bright” cue: the cue after a dark cue, in which the fixtures fade up.
•
Moving: MBB presets channels that change level, or “move”, between the dark cue
and the bright cue. Channels that are at the same level, but are provided their level by
different focus points in the two cues are also considered to be “moving”.
•
MBB Delay: Set in System Settings, the MBB Delay adds time between the completion
of the “dark” cue and the start of the MBB move. The default delay time is 0.
•
MBB Fade: Set in System Settings, the MBB Fade sets the duration of the MBB move.
The default fade time is 5 seconds.
Live Editing
117
MBB R u les:
Any cue that fits all of the requirements below will execute an MBB delay and fade all
moving non-intensity channels of fixtures that fade their intensity up from zero in the next
cue:
•
The next (bright) cue must have one or more non-intensity (pan, tilt, color, etc.) fixture
channels that move
•
The next cue must have the fixtures’ associated intensity channel(s) on (at a level
above zero)
•
The current (dark) cue must have the fixtures’ associated intensity channel(s) off (at
zero)
•
The MBB flag for the next cue must be enabled. This applies to subroutine steps as well
as cues in the cue list
•
Move Before Bright must be enabled in System Settings.
There shall be no MBB execution in any of the following situations:
•
The dark cue is run by pressing the [Back] button
•
Quickstep is enabled
•
The dark cue is executed because of a “Jump to Cue” step in a subroutine.
View MBB Status
You can view the MBB status of channels and cues. Channel information is displayed in the
About Channel window. Channel status may be noted as “Wait”, “Running”, “Done” or
“None”. Channels affected by MBB are displayed in blue on the Stage display.
Cue status is indicated in the A/B and C/D fader status displays and in the Subroutine
window. If MBB will run at the end of the running cue or subroutine step, the window
displays “Wait”. If MBB is currently fading, the display indicates “MBB”. If the MBB has
finished, but the bright cue has not yet started, the display indicates “Done”.
MBB S e ttings
To enable MBB and set the delay and fade times, you will need to use the System Settings
menu.
118
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Enable/Disable MBB for the system:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to view the System Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [1][4] [Enter] to select Move Before Bright.
Step 3:
Press:
Note:
•
[1] [Enter] to enable MBB.
•
[0] [Enter] to disable MBB.
MBB must be enabled in System Settings for MBB to occur in a show. Use individual cue
settings to turn MBB off for specific cues when needed.
Set the MBB Delay and Fade times:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to view the System Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [1][5] [Enter] to select the MBB Times.
Step 3:
Enter the desired delay time between 0 seconds and 99:59 minutes and press
[Enter].
Step 4:
Enter the desired fade time between 0 seconds and 99:59 minutes and press
[Enter].
MBB Settings per Cue
You can disable MBB for cues where you want to see a move occur live. While you can edit
the MBB setting for individual cues regardless of whether MBB has been enabled at the
System Settings level, MBB will only occur if the option has been enabled in the Systems
Settings menu.
You can edit MBB for a cue in the Stage, Blind, Fader displays, and in the Blind Cue List.
Which softkey MBB appears on depends upon which display you are using. Generally,
[S1- MBB] appears in Stage and Fader displays and [S8 - MBB] appears in Blind displays.
Disable/Enable MBB for a specific cue:
4
Step 1:
Enter the display you want to use to edit the cue.
Step 2:
Press [Cue] [x] <S7 - More Softkeys> [S1- MBB or S8 - MBB]:
Live Editing
•
[1] [Enter] to enable MBB.
•
[0] [Enter] to disable MBB.
119
Disable/Enable MBB for a subroutine step:
120
Step 1:
View the subroutine cue in the Blind display.
Step 2:
Press [S1 - Step] [x] <S7 - More Softkeys> [S1 - MBB].
Step 3:
Press:
•
[0] [Enter] to set dynamic MBB, which uses the MBB state recorded in the
source cue for the step.
•
[1] [Enter] to enable MBB regardless of the recorded MBB state in the
source cue.
•
[2] [Enter] to disable MBB regardless of the recorded MBB state in the
source cue.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Submasters
Submasters are available on every Emphasis Facepanel. A submaster is a fader that
contains channel levels, an effect or a subroutine. Submasters can also be turned into
Supermasters. A Supermaster acts as a master fader for a number of assigned
submasters.
Submasters can contain timing, but they cannot be played back in the A/B or C/D fader
pairs. Submasters can also be activated by a cue by using a link.
Channels in submasters are treated as HTP regardless of their attribute settings, except
when the submaster contains a subroutine, or the submaster is inhibitive.
Submaster Types
There are six different submaster types. Only Pile-On and Inhibitive submasters can be
created and edited in Stage.
P i l e - On
The typical submaster behaves in a pile-on manner. This means that you have created a
stage look and have recorded those channels directly to a submaster. You can also load
channel levels from a recorded cue, group or focus point into a submaster.
I n h i bi t i v e
Inhibitive submasters proportionally inhibit levels on stage for recorded channels. This is
useful for theatres using a main curtain, where you want to be able to manually inhibit frontof-house lights from illuminating the curtain during bows, for example. If you have a channel
recorded into multiple inhibitive submasters, it will be the lowest inhibitive submaster that
determines the output for that channel.
Inhibitive submasters do not contain any channel levels. Channels recorded into an
inhibitive submaster are inhibited proportionally to their recorded level. When the inhibitive
submaster is at full, channels play back as recorded. When the inhibitive submaster is
below full, channels play back at that percentage of recorded levels. For example, you have
an inhibitive submaster at 50%, channels recorded at full will play back at 50%. When an
inhibitive submaster’s fader is at the zero position, those channels will not play back at all.
Note:
Inhibitive submasters do not affect captured channels.
Effect
Effect submasters can be created in Stage or Blind (see Blind Effects, page 149). The
advantage of working in Stage is that you can see the look of each effect step as it is
created. An effect is made up of channels at levels in steps. Steps are played back in the
effect at a given rate and in a given direction. Typically, effects will loop their steps so that
they can play continuously. In Blind, effect steps can be randomized and can be assigned
other attributes that affect their playback.
Dynamic Effects
See Create a simple dynamic effect:, page 100.
Subroutine
See Subroutines on Submasters (Subs-on-Subs), page 146.
4
Live Editing
121
Supermaster
See Supermasters, page 158.
Record Submasters
Recording a submaster is very similar to recording a cue. All active channels are recorded
to the submaster unless you use the Except or Solo commands (See Special Functions,
page 128).
Note:
Remember that the [Record] function will store all Stage levels in the cue, group or
submaster you specify. Make sure that you have cleared all unwanted channels before
recording your cues. Stray channel levels may come from captured channels, active
submasters, cues in the fader pairs, or channels in the background. If you need to leave
a channel or dimmer at a level, but you do not want to record it at that level in your cues,
use the Except or Solo commands (see Special Functions, page 128) or the Park
command (see Park, page 109).
Record pile-on submasters:
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95.
Step 3:
Press [Record] [Sub] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the target submaster number. If
the target submaster number has already been recorded, a “Sub Recorded”
message will blink on the stage display. If you choose to record to a used
number, the new look will overwrite the old look. You may also press [Record]
[Sub-Bump] to record a look directly to a submaster.
Record inhibitive submasters:
Note:
122
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95. In the Stage display, only channels with levels are
recorded to a submaster.
Step 3:
Press [Record] [Sub] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the target submaster number. If
the target submaster number has already been recorded, a “Sub Recorded”
message will blink on the stage display. If you choose to record to a used
number, the new look will overwrite the old look. You may also press [Record]
[Sub-Bump] to record a look directly to a submaster.
Step 4:
Press [Sub] [x] [Type] [2] [Enter] to set the Inhibitive type for submaster [x]. The
submaster’s LED will blink until you raise the fader to full. For submasters 13-24
(73-108 on Insight), the red LED will light instead of the green one, to indicate the
submaster is inhibitive.
If you change an inhibitive submaster back into a pile-on submaster, channels recorded
in that submaster will return to their previously recorded levels.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Record effect submasters in Stage:
Step 1:
Press [Stage].
Step 2:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86. You can select individual channels, fixtures, groups or
focus points.
Step 3:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95. If a channel references a focus point for its level, the level
will update when the focus point is changed.
Step 4:
Press [Record] [Sub] [x] [Type] [3] [Enter] to set submaster [x] to the effect
type and record the first step. The attribute bar will indicate that the submaster is
now an effect.
Step 5:
Select channels and set levels for the next step you want to record.
Step 6:
Press [Record] [Sub] [x] [Enter]. Active channels will be recorded to the next
step of the effect.
Step 7:
Repeat steps 5-6, making sure that only the channels you want to include in a
step are active.
Note:
If you want to record steps out of order, press [Record] [Sub] [x] <S7 - More Softkeys>
[S8 - Step] [y] [Enter] to select the step you want to record.
Using [Load Sub]
You can load a cue, group or focus point into a submaster using the [Load Sub] command.
[Load Sub] records the contents of the cue, group or submaster into the target submaster
with a few keystrokes. Cues loaded into submasters will maintain any focus point
references recorded in them. Focus points will load as if they are groups, losing the
reference to the focus point itself. [Load Sub] does not affect submaster timing.
Record a submaster using [Load Sub]:
Step 1:
Press [Load Sub] [x] to select submaster [x], or [Load Sub] [a] [Thru] [c] to
select a range of submasters..
Step 2:
Press:
Note:
4
Live Editing
•
[Cue] [y] [Enter] to load cue [y].
•
[Group] [y] [Enter] to load group [y].
•
[Focus Point] [y] [Enter] to load focus point [y].
•
Load a range of cues, groups or focus points by selecting a range equal to
the number of submasters selected in step 1 and pressing [Enter].
Load Sub is found on <S7 - More Softkeys> [S2 - Load Sub] in Stage on Express
facepanels.
123
Using Submasters as Groups
Recorded pile-on submasters can be used for channel selection and level setting just like
groups. When you use the [Group] [Sub] command, all the channels recorded in that
submaster are selected, and their recorded levels can be recalled proportionally. You can
also use [Group] [Sub] with [Only] to selectively recall levels for selected channels or
fixtures from recorded submasters.
Use a submaster as a group:
Step 1:
Press [Group] [Sub] [x], where [x] is the submaster number you would like to
use as a group. This will select all the channels recorded in that submaster.
Step 2:
Press [At] [y], where [y] is the proportional level, or use the level wheel/trackpad.
Use [Full] to recall the recorded levels in the submaster.
Use [Group] [Sub] with [Only]:
Note:
124
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Press [Only] [Group] [Sub] [x], where [x] is the recorded submaster containing
the levels you want to recall.
Step 3:
Press [Full] to recall the levels as recorded in submaster [x]. Use the level wheel,
trackpad, or [At] to recall proportional levels.
Effect, dynamic effect, Subroutine and Supermaster submasters cannot be used as
groups.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Time Functions
Cues and submasters can fade levels in time. In a cue, you can establish upfade,
downfade, wait and follow times. Submasters can be assigned up, dwell and down times.
Both cues and submasters can be modified by rate, which applies a multiplier to the
recorded fade times, either speeding up or slowing down the playback.
Use the following guidelines when entering time values in Emphasis:
•
Times can range from 0.1 seconds to 99:59 minutes. Zero timing is also available.
•
Use a decimal point for times less than one second: 0.1-0.9 second.
•
Two-digit entries are calculated in seconds: 42=42 seconds, 90=1 minute 30 seconds.
•
Three- and four-digit entries are calculated in minutes and seconds: 330=3 minutes 30
seconds, 1075=11 minutes 15 seconds.
Cues
Cue timing is assigned as an upfade time and a downfade time. Upfade time is the amount
of time it takes channels at a lower level to fade to their new higher level when a cue plays
back. Downfade time is the amount of time it takes channels at a higher level to fade to their
new lower level when a cue plays back. These times may be the same, or they can be
different (known as a split-fade). The timing a channel follows is determined solely by the
level the channel is at when the cue is played back. You will only see the effect of timing
during the transition from one cue to another.
Assign fade time to a cue:
Step 1:
Record the cue (see Record Cues, page 113), or press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the
cue number you want to select.
Step 2:
Press [Time] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the upfade time.
Step 3:
Press <y> [Enter], where <y> is the downfade time, if it is different from the
upfade time.
Wait
Wait timing delays the upfade or downfade of a cue. You can only apply one wait time on
a cue to either the upfade or downfade – not both. Upfade waits are indicated by an up
arrow (u) beside the wait time, and downfade waits are indicated by a down arrow (v).
Assign wait time to a cue:
Step 1:
Record the cue (see Record Cues, page 113), or press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the
cue number you want to select.
Step 2:
Press [Wait] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the upfade wait time. To enter a downfade
wait time, press [Wait] [Wait] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the downfade wait time.
Step 3:
Press [Enter].
Clear a wait time:
4
Step 1:
Press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the cue number containing the wait time.
Step 2:
Press [Wait] [Clear]. This removes the wait time.
Live Editing
125
Follow
Follow timing is used to trigger cues automatically, or to delay the activation of submasters
and macros linked to cues. When a follow time is attached to a cue with no linked
submaster or macro, the next cue (or a linked cue) will automatically play back when the
follow time completes. Follow times start their countdown from the moment you press [Go].
When a follow time is attached to a cue with a linked submaster or macro, the activation of
the submaster or macro is delayed until the follow time completes.
Assign follow time to a cue:
Step 1:
Record the cue (see Record Cues, page 113), or press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the
cue number you want to select.
Step 2:
Press [Follow] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the follow time.
Clear a follow time:
Step 1:
Press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the cue number containing the follow time.
Step 2:
Press [Follow] [Clear]. This removes the follow time.
Note:
Follow is found on [S5 - Follow] in Stage on Express facepanels.
Rate
You can assign a rate to a cue or submaster. A rate applies a multiplier to fade timing that
either slows down or speeds up the playback of that cue or submaster. A rate value of 100
equals the recorded time of the cue or submaster. A rate of zero would stop the playback,
a rate of 2000 is the maximum rate causing the fastest playback. You can add a rate value
to a cue or submaster manually, or you can apply a rate to a cue or submaster as it is played
back, then update the rate to the cue or submaster.
Add a rate manually to a cue or submaster:
Step 1:
Press [Cue] [x] to select the cue, or [Sub] [x], to select the submaster, where [x]
is the cue or submaster number.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S5 - Rate] [y] [Enter], where [y] is the rate value
between 0-2000.
Clear a rate:
Step 1:
Press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the cue number containing the link.
Step 2:
Press [S5 - Rate] [Clear]. This removes the rate.
M u lt i - P a r t C u e s
There are occasions where you want a single cue to be able to fade different channels in
different times. This can be accomplished with a part cue. A cue can be split into up to eight
parts, each of which contains discrete channels (a channel can only move in a single part
of a cue) and discrete fade times.
For example, as an actor walks across the stage, you would like channels 1-5 to fade out
as he crosses from stage left to stage right. You do not want the channels to fade out
together, you would rather have each channel fade out as the actor leaves the area that
channel is lighting. You can accomplish this either by writing five cues, one for each light,
and playing back each cue manually (or with follow times), or you can write this transition
as a part cue. The advantage of a part cue is that it is stored as a single cue number in the
cue list.
126
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
You can create part cues from scratch, or you can convert an existing cue into a part cue.
See Multi-Part cues, page 136 for information on editing cues in Blind.
Note:
Part is found on <S7 - More Softkeys> [S1 - Part] in Stage on Express facepanels.
Write a part cue:
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95.
Step 3:
Press [Record] <Cue> [x] [Part] [y] [Enter] to record captured channels into
part [y] of cue [x] (you do not have to start with part 1, you can record parts in any
order).
Step 4:
If you want to change the fade times for the part, press [Time] [x] [Enter] <y>
[Enter], where [x] is the upfade time and <y> is the downfade time (if different
from the upfade time) for the part.
Step 5:
Press [Wait] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the desired wait time. Wait time on a part
delays the start of the part, counting from the [Go] press. Do not enter wait times
if you want all parts to play with the [Go] press.
Step 6:
Repeat steps 1-3 until you have recorded all the parts you need in this cue. You
do not need to continue to enter the cue number, just the part number, for each
subsequent part.
Submasters
Submasters can be played back manually using the fader, or they can be played back using
the submaster bump button. The bump button defaults to a flash function, but can be used
to fade a submaster in and out using recorded timing. Timing set at the submaster level
governs the fade up, duration and fade down of the whole submaster, including static
submasters and effect submasters. Subroutines on submasters have different timing rules,
see Subroutines on Submasters (Subs-on-Subs), page 146.
Submasters may have an up time, dwell time and a down time recorded. Up timing
determines the upfade of the submaster when activated using the bump button. Down
timing determines the time it takes for the recorded channels to fade out. Dwell timing
determines how long the submaster will stay at full before fading out.
Dwell can be set to manual, which means the submaster will fade up in the in time, and stay
active as long as you are pressing the bump button. Dwell can also be set to hold, which
means the submaster will activate when you press and release the bump button, fade up
in the up time, and then remain active until you press the bump button again.
Apply timing to submasters:
4
Step 1:
Press [Sub] [x] [Time], where [x] is the submaster number you want to select.
Step 2:
Press <a> [Enter], where <a> is the up time, if required.
Step 3:
Press <b> [Enter], where <b> is the dwell time, if required. You can also press
[Clear] instead of a time value until either Manual or Hold is displayed.
Step 4:
Press <c> [Enter], where <c> is the down time, if required.
Live Editing
127
Special Functions
The functions listed in this section can be used for cues, submasters, groups and focus
points.
Except
If you need to record a cue, submaster, group or focus point and there are levels on stage
you don’t want to include in the record, you can use the [Except] command to remove a
channel, group, cue or submaster from the record instruction.
Record using [Except]:
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95.
Step 3:
Press [Record] <Cue> [x], where [x] is the target cue number. You can replace
<Cue> with [Sub], [Group] or [Focus Point].
Step 4:
Press:
Step 5:
•
[Except] [y], where [y] is the channel number you want to exclude.
•
[Except] [Group] [y], where [y] is the group number, to exclude channels in
that group.
•
[Except] [Sub] [y], where [y] is the submaster number, to exclude channels
in that submaster.
•
[Except] [Cue] [y], where [y] is the cue number, to exclude channels in that
cue.
Press [Enter].
Solo
The [S3 - Solo] command can be used in a similar way as [Except] to limit channels that
are recorded into a cue, submaster, group or focus point. When you use [Except], you
need to know and select all the channels you want to exclude from a record command. With
[S3 - Solo], you can select the channels you want to record, and exclude all unselected
channels. When used in this way, [S3 - Solo] does not force any channel levels to zero, so
your Stage output is not affected.
Note:
[S3 - Solo] causes only SELECTED channels, not captured channels to be recorded.
Make sure that all the channels you want to include are selected, not just captured.
Record using [S3 - Solo]:
128
Step 1:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 2:
Set levels, if required, using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and
Moving Light Control, page 95.
Step 3:
Press [Record] <Cue> [x], where [x] is the target cue number. You can replace
<Cue> with [Sub], [Group] or [Focus Point].
Step 4:
Press<S7 - More Softkeys> [S3 - Solo].
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Update
Update is a record function that allows you to add or modify channel levels for a cue,
submaster, effect step, group or focus point. When you use [S2 - Update], only captured
channels are recorded into the destination. You can use the [Only] command to limit which
captured channels are stored. Update is useful when you need to make changes to a cue,
submaster, effect step, group or focus point and you do not want to include the whole stage
picture. You can also update cues, submasters, groups and focus points that are not
currently on stage.
Note:
Only is found on [S4 - Only] in Stage, Blind and Fader on Express facepanels.
Update a cue, submaster, group or focus point in Stage:
Step 1:
Press [Stage].
Step 2:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 3:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95.
Step 4:
Press [S2 - Update]. Captured channels will become selected and you will be
prompted to enter the cue number you want to update.
Step 5:
Press:
•
[x], where [x] is the cue number. If you are updating an effect step, press <S7
- More Softkeys> [S8 - Step] [y] to select step [y] of cue [x].
•
[Sub] [x] , where [x] is the submaster number. If you are updating an effect
step, press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S8 - Step] [y] to select step [y] of
submaster [x].
•
[Group] [x] , where [x] is the group number.
•
[Focus Point] [x] , where [x] is the focus point number.
Step 6:
If you would like to limit the channels that will be updated, press [Only] [x] to
select the channel you want to keep in the update command. You can also use
[And] and [Thru] to select multiple channels.
Step 7:
Press [Enter].
Note:
When you use [S2 - Update] with rates applied, Emphasis will add the rate value to the
cue or submaster. It will not recalculate or otherwise change the recorded timing.
Del e te
When you delete a cue, it is removed from the cue list, along with its channel data. Since
each cue stores all channel levels, deleting a cue will have no affect on tracked channels.
If a deleted cue is an allfade or block cue, it may have an affect on editing or playback of
background channels.
When you delete an inactive submaster, the submaster is emptied immediately and its LED
turns off. If you delete an active submaster, its levels will not disappear immediately. The
submaster LED will blink until you return the fader to zero, at which time the LED will turn
off to indicate the submaster is empty.
4
Live Editing
129
Deleting groups can affect recorded effects, since groups can be used as elements within
steps. Deleting a group has no affect on any other type of cue or submaster. Deleting a
focus point, however, can affect cues and submasters. Cues and submasters containing a
reference to a deleted focus point will retain the reference, but any levels that would be
generated by that focus point play back as zeros.
Delete a cue, submaster, group or focus point in Stage:
Step 1:
Press [Stage].
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S6 - Delete]. You will be prompted to enter the
cue number you want to delete.
Step 3:
Press:
Step 4:
•
[x], where [x] is the cue number.
•
[Sub] [x] , where [x] is the submaster number.
•
[Group] [x] , where [x] is the group number.
•
[Focus Point] [x] , where [x] is the focus point number.
Press [Enter] [Enter] to delete. The second [Enter] is used to confirm that you
really want to delete the cue, submaster, group or focus point.
Label
You can label groups, submasters and cues. Labels can be up to 16 characters long and
can contain any combination of letters, numbers and symbols.
Enter a label:
Note:
130
Step 1:
Press [Cue] [x] [Label], where [x] is the cue number. You can replace [Cue] with
[Group] or [Sub] to label groups and submasters.
Step 2:
Type the label on the optional alphanumeric keyboard. The label will appear in
the keypad corner as you type.
Step 3:
Press [Enter]. The label will be visible in the Playback display, and in the Blind
Cue List (or Group List, or Sub List, as appropriate).
Label can be found on <S7 - More Softkeys> [S2 - Label] on Express facepanels.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Chapter 5
Blind Editing
This chapter contains information about selecting and controlling channels and fixtures for
use in a “blind” environment, where changes happen on screen only. Levels on stage are
unaffected. Blind editing is useful when making changes during rehearsals, or when you
need to see data across many cues.
This chapter contains the following sections:
5
Blind Editing
•
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
•
Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
•
Subroutines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
•
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
•
Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
•
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
•
Focus Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
131
Displays
There are more displays available when working blind. You can use the Blind display, which
looks just like the Stage display, or you can use the list and spreadsheet displays to view
and edit data for multiple cues, submasters, groups or focus points on one screen.
Bl ind
The Blind display is accessible from the Facepanel by pressing [Blind]. All list and
spreadsheet displays are accessible from the Blind display.
The Blind display allows you to view previously recorded cues, submasters, groups and
focus points. You can also create these in the blind display. Channel levels are displayed
in the same configuration as in the Stage display, and you can only view one cue,
submaster, group or focus point at a time. When viewing cues, color coding of levels
indicates level relationships between the current cue and the previous cue in the list (see
Colors in Displays, page 28).
Blue channels
move to a higher
level in this cue.
132
Green channels
move to a lower
level in this cue.
Purple channels
do not move in
this cue.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
List Displays
The list displays show cues and submaster numbers, as well as any timing or other
assigned attributes. You can edit the timing and attributes directly in the Cue List or
Submaster List display. Group List and Focus Point List displays show all recorded groups
and focus points and their labels.
5
Blind Editing
133
Spreadsheets
Spreadsheets are available through softkeys in the Blind display. You can use
spreadsheets to view channel data across a number of cues, groups, submasters and
focus points.
134
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Tracksheet
The Tracksheet displays all the cue information for a single channel. You can see each
recorded level for a single channel across the entire cue list, viewing how many cues the
channel is recorded into, where the channel moves up or down, as well as where the
channel tracks through consecutive cues at the same level. You can also make edits to a
cue or a range of cues for that channel.
5
Blind Editing
135
Cues
Blind allows you to edit cues and cue attributes without affecting the stage output. This is
useful when you are in the middle of a rehearsal or performance and you need to make a
change. Blind also allows you to see more detailed information about cues that contain
multiple parts, effects or subroutines.
Edit cues in Blind:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [x] [Enter] to select cue [x]. You can also use the [+] and [-] keys to
increment and decrement through the cue list.
Step 3:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 4:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95. “Not Recorded” will blink in the lower left corner of the
channel area.
Step 5:
Press [Record] <Cue> <x> [Enter], where [x] is the target cue number.
When you edit cues, submasters, groups or focus points in Stage, Fader or Blind,
changes to channel levels or effects are not recorded until you press [Record] [Enter].
Changes to overall cue or submaster timing do not require [Record] [Enter].
M u lt i - P a r t cu e s
In Blind, you can view a multi-part cue as a whole, or by part. When viewing individual parts,
other channels recorded in the cue are displayed with grey levels. A channel may only be
recorded into one part of a multi-part cue.
Edit multi-part cues in Blind:
Note:
136
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [x] [Enter] to select cue [x]. You can also use the [+] and [-] keys to
increment and decrement through the cue list. The whole cue will be displayed
until you select a specific part to view or edit.
Step 3:
Press [Part] [y] to select part [y]. You can also use the [+] and [-] keys to
increment and decrement through the parts.
Step 4:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 5:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95. “Not Recorded” will blink in the lower left corner of the
channel area.
Step 6:
Press [Record] [Part] [y] [Enter], where [y] is the target part number.
Alternatively, you can press [Record] [Enter] to record modified levels back into their
source part. This way you can modify levels across the cue without having to edit each
part individually. Channels added to the cue will be recorded into part 8, unless you
specifically choose a part in the record command.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Blocked Channels
In some cases, you may want to be able to stop a [Track] record for a specific channel or
channels, but you may not want to create a block cue. To accomplish this, you can place a
block instruction on a channel and record it into a cue.
Place a channel block:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [x] [Enter] to select cue [x]. You can also use the [+] and [-] keys to
increment and decrement through the cue list.
Step 3:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 4:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S6 - Block].
Step 5:
Press [1] [Enter] to set a block on selected channels. Blocked channels’ levels
will be displayed in white. Alternatively, press [0] [Enter] to clear a block from
selected channels.
Cue List
In the Cue List display, you can view and edit the cue numbers and their attributes. You can
edit one or a number of cues at a time, using the arrow keys to navigate within the list.
Edit cue attributes within the cue list display:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [S2 - Cue List] to display the cue list.
Step 3:
Press [x] [Enter] to select cue [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except]
to select multiple cues. You may also use the up- and down arrow ([v] and [u])
keys to scroll through the cue list.
Step 4:
If necessary, press [Part] [y] to select part [y] of cue [x]. Only timing functions
can be edited for cue parts. To add a link, follow time and/or rate to a part cue,
select the whole cue number.
Step 5:
Press:
•
5
Blind Editing
[Type] to change the cue type for the selected cue(s). See Cue Types, page
112.
137
•
[Time] to change the upfade time for the selected cue(s). See Time
Functions, page 125.
•
[Time] [Time] to change the downfade time for the selected cue(s).
•
[Wait] to change the upfade wait time for the selected cue(s). See Wait, page
125.
•
[Wait] [Wait] to change the downfade wait time for the selected cue(s).
•
[Link] to link the selected cue(s) to another cue, macro or submaster. See
Link Functions, page 113.
•
[Follow] to change the follow time for the selected cue(s). Follow is found on
[S2 - Follow] on Express facepanels. See Follow, page 126.
•
[S3 - Rate] to change the rate setting for the selected cue(s). See Rate, page
126.
•
[Label] to add a label to the selected cue(s). See Label, page 130.
•
Alternatively, you can press the right- and left-arrow ([t] and [s]) keys to
move through the cue list columns. The prompt area will display instructions
for setting each available attribute as you move from column to column.
Delete cues within the cue list display:
138
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [S2 - Cue List] to display the cue list.
Step 3:
Press [S6 - Delete Cue].
Step 4:
Press [x] to select cue [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except] to select
multiple cues.
Step 5:
Press [Enter] to delete the selected cue(s). To delete the cue(s) and any levels
tracking forward, press [Track] [Enter]. To abort the delete command, press
[Clear].
Step 6:
Press [Enter] to confirm that you really want to delete the cue(s).
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Spreadsheet
In the Cue Spreadsheet, you can see channel levels for recorded cues in a spreadsheet
layout. You can edit or delete cues one at a time, or by selecting ranges. You can also use
[Track] to edit cues and you can create new cues within the spreadsheet. Using the replace
level feature, you can change channels at one level to a new level, without having to select
them individually.
Set the track status in the spreadsheet display:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the cue spreadsheet.
Step 3:
Press [S7 - Enable Track] to change the track status. [S7] will always indicate
the next available setting: Enable Track, Enable Backtrack, Enable Filltrack or
Disable Track. You can also use the [Track] key, instead of [S7], if you wish. The
current track status is displayed below the keypad corner.
CAUTION:
5
Blind Editing
Unlike the Stage and Blind displays, changes made in the spreadsheet are
recorded immediately without the need for the additional [Record] or [Track]
command. Levels will track or not track based on the track status, indicated below
the keypad corner. Changes made in the spreadsheet will be stored, but will not
update levels on stage until you play back the cue again.
139
Edit cues in the spreadsheet display:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the cue spreadsheet.
Step 3:
Adjust the track status as necessary, see above.
Step 4:
Press [x] to select cue [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except] to select
multiple cues.
Step 5:
Press [Channel] [y] to select channel [y]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple channels.
Step 6:
Press [At] [z] to change levels for the selected channel(s) in the selected cue(s)
to level [z]. To remove levels from a cue, press [At] [Clear].
To deselect channels after pressing [At], but before entering a new level, simply press
[Channel] or [Cue].
Create cues in the spreadsheet display:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the cue spreadsheet.
Step 3:
Adjust the track status as necessary, see above.
Step 4:
Press [S2 - Create Cue] [x] [Enter] to create cue [x].
Step 5:
Press <Channel> [y] to select channel [y]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple channels.
Step 6:
Press [At] [z] to set selected channels to level [z].
Step 7:
Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all required levels are set.
Delete cues in the spreadsheet display:
Note:
140
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the cue spreadsheet.
Step 3:
Press [S6 - Delete Cue].
Step 4:
Press [x] to select cue [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except] to select
multiple cues.
Step 5:
Press [Enter] to delete the selected cue(s).
Step 6:
Press [Enter] to confirm that you really want to delete the cue(s).
When you delete cues in the spreadsheet display, channels that track into other cues will
not be deleted regardless of the track status. To delete a cue and its tracking levels, use
the Blind display.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Replace levels in the spreadsheet display:
5
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the cue spreadsheet.
Step 3:
Press [x] to select cue [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except] to select
multiple cues.
Step 4:
Press [Channel] [y] to select channel [y]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple channels.
Step 5:
Press [S3 - Replace Level] [z] [Enter], where [z] is the level you want to replace.
Only channels at that level are selected. Use the [Full] key to select channels at
that level.
Step 6:
Press [a] [Enter], where [a] is the level you want to replace the level [z].
Blind Editing
141
Tracksheet
In the Tracksheet display, you can view one channel and all its recorded levels across the
cue list. You can edit the level of that channel for one cue, or for ranges. You can also use
[Track] to edit cues within the Tracksheet.
Edit cues in the Tracksheet display:
Note:
142
Step 1:
Press [Tracksheet]. Cue data for channel 1 will be displayed.
Step 2:
Press <Channel> [x] to select channel [x]. Only one channel may be selected at
a time.
Step 3:
Press [Cue] [y] to select cue [y]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except]
to select multiple cues.
Step 4:
Press [At] [z] to set channel [x] to level [z] in the selected cue(s).
Step 5:
Press:
•
[Record] [Enter] to record your changes to the selected cue(s).
•
[Track] [Enter] to record changes and track levels forward. You cannot use
back track or fill track in the Tracksheet display.
Tracksheet can be found on <S7 - More Softkeys> [S8 - Tracksheet] in the Blind display
on Express facepanels.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Subroutines
Subroutine is a special type of cue or submaster that places other cues within steps to be
played back in order. Steps can either contain a cue or be set to a style. A style step
contains an instruction that controls the subroutine’s playback. Styles include filters to limit
playback to a certain group of channels, loop and jump commands, and other playbackspecific styles. Available styles depend on whether the subroutine is recorded to a cue or
to a submaster.
Subroutines in Cues
Subroutines in cues play back within the cue list and can be played back on the A/B and
C/D fader pairs. If you use [Load Sub] to place a cue containing a subroutine on a
submaster, the subroutine will retain the characteristics of a subroutine cue, not a
subroutine-on-submaster.
Cue Steps
Cue steps execute the cue number they reference. If you change channel levels in a
referenced cue, any subroutine that contains that cue will play back the modified levels.
Cue steps can be given any of the standard cue fade types:
•
Crossfade. . . . . . . A crossfade cue step fades all increasing levels in the upfade time
and all decreasing levels in the downfade time.
•
Allfade . . . . . . . . . An allfade cue step fades all increasing levels in the upfade time
and all decreasing levels in the downfade time and clears the other
fader pair.
•
Blocking . . . . . . . . A blocking cue step stops all background fades before running in
the physical fader.
You can choose to play back the referenced cue as it was originally written (known as a
dynamic playback), or you can override the recorded levels proportionally, and override the
recorded timing with times you enter in the cue step.
5
•
Level . . . . . . . . . . . Sets an intensity level for the cue within the subroutine. The level
proportionally affects channel levels recorded in the referenced
cue.
•
Fade times . . . . . . Fade times can be set to dynamic (values displayed in purple),
which means the cue will run as recorded, manual, which means
that you will have to move the faders to zero and then up to full to
manually fade in the cue step, or to a specific upfade and/or
downfade time, which overrides the recorded time in the
referenced cue.
•
Follow time . . . . . Follow time can be set to dynamic, which means the next step will
execute as soon as the selected step completes, hold, which
means that you will have to press [Go] to execute the next step,
or to a specific follow time, which executes the next step that long
after the selected step starts its fade.
Blind Editing
143
Style Steps
The following style steps are available in subroutine cues:
•
Loop to Step . . . . The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a loop to
step style step. You can set which step to loop back to and how
many times to run the loop.
•
Bounce . . . . . . . . . The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a bounce
style step. The subroutine will then run backwards through the
steps until it reaches the first step and then starts again. The
subroutine will bounce for the number of times you set in the
bounce step (one bounce equals one pass forward and one pass
backward).
•
Jump to Cue . . . . The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a jump to
cue style step. It then exits the subroutine and automatically starts
another cue in the main cue list.
•
Hold for Go . . . . . The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a hold for go
style step. It then pauses until you press [Go].
•
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . Filter steps are usually placed in the first step of the subroutine. A
filter determines which channels will respond to subroutine
commands. A filter of group “0” includes all patched channels. Any
other group can be used to limit playback to the channels recorded
in the group. Only one group may be entered in this step.
•
Macro . . . . . . . . . . A macro step executes a macro from within a subroutine.
Fixed settings
displayed in grey.
Dynamic settings
displayed in purple.
144
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Create a subroutine cue:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press <Cue> [x], where [x] is the cue you want to use.
Step 3:
Press [Type] [4] [Enter] to set the type to Subroutine.
Step 4:
Press [1] to set Step 1.
Step 5:
Press the right-arrow [t] key to move to the step contents column.
Step 6:
Press [y], where [y] is a recorded cue number, to set the cue number referenced
in step 1.
Step 7:
Press right-arrow [t] key to move to the fade type column.
Step 8:
Press:
Step 9:
•
[1] to set a Crossfade fade type. This setting overrides the fade type
recorded with the referenced cue.
•
[2] to set an Allfade fade type. This setting overrides the fade type recorded
with the referenced cue.
•
[3] to set a Blocking fade type. This setting overrides the fade type recorded
with the referenced cue.
•
Press [Clear] to set a dynamic fade type. The dynamic fade type, displayed
in purple, follows the fade type stored with the cue.
Press right-arrow [t] key to set the Upfade time. This can be fixed, dynamic or
manual. Type a time value or press [Clear] to set dynamic or manual fade time.
The dynamic fade time, displayed in purple, follows the fade time stored with the
cue.
Step 10: Press right-arrow [t] key to set the Downfade time. This can be fixed, dynamic
or manual. Type a time value or press [Clear] to set dynamic or manual fade
time. The dynamic fade time, displayed in purple, follows the fade time stored
with the cue.
Step 11: Press right-arrow [t] key to set the Follow time. This can be fixed, dynamic or
manual. Type a time value or press [Clear] to set dynamic fade time or Hold.
Hold takes the place of a “Hold for Go” command (see below).
Step 12: Press the down-arrow [v] key to move to the next step. Repeat steps 5 through
12 for each step in the subroutine that contains cue information.
Step 13: Press [Record] [Enter] to record the subroutine.
To add a subroutine style to a step:
5
Step 1:
Select the step you want to modify and press [S8 -Style].
Step 2:
Press:
Blind Editing
•
[1] [Enter] for Loop to Step and enter the step number to loop to, and the
number of loops you want the subroutine to perform. The Loop to Step style
is typically entered in the last step of a subroutine.
•
[2] [Enter] for Bounce and enter the number of bounces you want the
subroutine to perform. The Bounce style is typically entered in the last step
of a subroutine, unless a Subroutine Fade step is also in the subroutine. In
that case, the Bounce step will be the next-to-last step.
•
[3] [Enter] for Jump to Cue and enter the cue number to jump to. The Jump
to Cue style is typically entered in the last step of a subroutine.
•
[4] [Enter] for Hold for Go. A Hold for Go step causes the subroutine to stop
and wait for a press of the submaster bump button. Placing a Follow time of
Hold on a cue step performs the same function.
145
•
Note:
[5] [Enter] for Filter settings. Enter the Group number you want to perform
the subroutine. Use Group zero (0) to filter all channels. Over-arching Filter
settings usually are placed in the first step of a subroutine.
You can place many filters in one subroutine. The later filters will reset the earlier ones.
This way you can have a single subroutine affect different lights in different steps.
•
[6] [Enter] for Jump to Step and enter the step number to jump to. This style
can be placed anywhere within the subroutine.
•
[7] [Enter] for Macro and enter the macro number to fire. This style can be
placed anywhere within the subroutine.
Subroutines on Submasters (Subs-on-Subs)
Subroutines on submasters can be used to create alternate cue stacks, increasing your
playback options. In essence, each submaster becomes its own playback fader, running
cues automatically or by pressing the submaster bump button. Subroutines on submasters
are almost identical to subroutine cues, with identical cue steps and attributes. Style steps,
however, have slightly different options.
Style Steps
The following style steps are available in subroutines on submasters:
146
•
Loop to Step . . . . The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a loop to
step style step. You can set which step to loop back to and how
many times to run the loop.
•
Bounce . . . . . . . . . The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a bounce
style step. The subroutine will then run backwards through the
steps until it reaches the first step and then starts again. The
subroutine will bounce for the number of times you set in the
bounce step (one bounce equals one pass backward and one
pass forward).
•
Subroutine Fade . The subroutine fade style allows you to place a fadeout time on the
whole subroutine. This is not an executable step, rather a time
instruction that is used when [S1 - Fadeout Subr] command is
executed in the Stage display. If no subroutine fade time is
included in a subroutine, the [S1 - Fadeout Subr] command will
use the default fader clear time set in the System Settings display.
•
Hold for Go . . . . . The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a hold for go
style step. It then pauses until you press the submaster bump
button.
•
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . Filter steps are usually placed in the first step of the subroutine. A
filter determines which channels will respond to subroutine
commands. A filter of group “0” includes all patched channels. Any
other group can be used to limit playback to the channels recorded
in the group. Only one group may be entered in this step.
•
Jump to Step . . . . The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a jump to
step style step. You can set which step to jump to.
•
Macro . . . . . . . . . . A macro step executes a macro from within a subroutine.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Dynamic settings
displayed in purple.
Create a subroutine on a submaster:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Sub] [x], where [x] is the submaster you want to use.
Step 3:
Press [Type] [4] [Enter] to set the type to Subroutine.
Step 4:
Press [1] to set Step 1.
Step 5:
Press right-arrow [t] key to move to the step contents column.
Step 6:
Press [y], where [y] is a recorded cue number, to set the cue number referenced
in step 1.
Step 7:
Press right-arrow [t] key to move to the fade type column.
Step 8:
Press:
Step 9:
•
[1] to set a Crossfade fade type. This setting overrides the fade type
recorded with the referenced cue.
•
[2] to set an Allfade fade type. This setting overrides the fade type recorded
with the referenced cue.
•
[3] to set a Blocking fade type. This setting overrides the fade type recorded
with the referenced cue.
•
Press [Clear] to set a dynamic fade type. The dynamic fade type, displayed
in purple, follows the fade type stored with the cue.
Press right-arrow [t] key to set the Upfade time. This can be fixed, dynamic or
manual. Type a time value or press [Clear] to set dynamic or manual fade time.
The dynamic fade time, displayed in purple, follows the fade time stored with the
cue.
Step 10: Press right-arrow [t] key to set the Downfade time. This can be fixed, dynamic
or manual. Type a time value or press [Clear] to set dynamic or manual fade
5
Blind Editing
147
time. The dynamic fade time, displayed in purple, follows the fade time stored
with the cue.
Step 11: Press right-arrow [t] key to set the Follow time. This can be fixed, dynamic or
manual. Type a time value or press [Clear] to set dynamic fade time or Hold.
Hold takes the place of a “Hold for Go” command (see below).
Step 12: Press the down-arrow [v] key to move to the next step. Repeat steps 5 through
12 for each step in the subroutine that contains cue information.
Step 13: Press [Record] [Enter] to record the submaster. You can also press [Record]
and a submaster bump button to record the subroutine to another submaster.
To add a subroutine style to a step:
Note:
148
Step 1:
Select the step you want to modify and press [S8 -Style]. Use [And] and [Thru]
to select multiple steps.
Step 2:
Press:
•
[1] [Enter] for Loop to Step and enter the step number to loop to, and the
number of loops you want the subroutine to perform. The Loop to Step style
is typically entered in the last step of a subroutine.
•
[2] [Enter] for Bounce and enter the number of bounces you want the
subroutine to perform. The Bounce style is typically entered in the last step
of a subroutine, unless a Subroutine Fade step is also in the subroutine. In
that case, the Bounce step will be the next-to-last step.
•
[3] [Enter] for Subroutine Fade and enter the fade time. This step will not
auto execute, rather it is an embedded command for the ‘Fade Subroutine’
softkey. Subroutine fade is typically entered in the last step of a subroutine.
•
[4] [Enter] for Hold for Go. A Hold for Go step causes the subroutine to stop
and wait for a press of the submaster bump button. Placing a Follow time of
Hold on a cue step performs the same function.
•
[5] [Enter] for Filter settings. Enter the Group number you want to perform
the subroutine. Use Group zero (0) to filter all channels. Over-arching Filter
settings usually are placed in the first step of a subroutine.
You can place many filters in one subroutine. The later filters will reset the earlier ones.
This way you can have a single subroutine affect different lights in different steps.
•
[6] [Enter] for Jump to Step and enter the step number to jump to. This style
can be placed anywhere within the subroutine.
•
[7] [Enter] for Macro and enter the macro number to fire. This style can be
placed anywhere within the subroutine.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Effects
Instead of simply fading from one stage look to another, an effect runs a dynamic series of
steps at a given rate. Each step contains channels, groups or focus points at levels. An
example of a simple effect is a chase, where lights turn on and off in sequence. Complex
effects can be made as well, to emulate lightning or fire or reflections off water, for example.
Effects can also be used with moving lights.
You can record effect steps in the Stage and Fader displays (see Stage Effects, page 117),
or in Blind. When you work in Blind, you cannot see the stage look of each step as you
create them, but you can edit more information about each step and the effect as a whole.
Effects can be recorded in cues, or directly into submasters. You can also load a submaster
with an effect cue. Other than playback method, there is no difference between cue effects
and submaster effects.
Blind Effects
Effects displayed in Blind show you the contents of each step, and any timing applied to the
steps, and the low and high levels the step will fade between. Each step can have a step
time, which indicates how quickly the steps will fire. The default step time is 0.2 second,
indicating that a step will fire every 2/10 of a second.
Note:
Effects created in Stage will assume the default timing values for effect steps: 0.2 second
step time, In/Dwell/Out timing at 0/0/0, and low/high levels of 0/FL. You must display the
effect in Blind to edit step timing and low/high levels.
Steps can also have In/Dwell/Out timing applied. This timing defaults to 0/0/0, which means
each step will pop from the low level to the high level and back again in rapid succession.
If you prefer to have a step linger after it fires, add some dwell time. To have a step fade in
and out, rather than pop, set In timing for the fade up and Out timing for the fade out.
In/Dwell/Out timing is often used to create wave effects, where one step is fading out as
another fades in. To create a wave, make sure the step time is shorter than the total In/
Dwell/Out timing.
You can also apply timing to the overall effect by adding Up/Dwell/Out timing to the effect
cue or submaster. Up timing determines the upfade of the running effect. Down timing
determines the time it takes for the running effect to fade out. Dwell timing determines how
long the effect will run before fading out. Dwell timing at the cue or submaster level is the
time between the upfade of the first step and the downfade of the last step of the effect. A
dwell time of hold means the effect will run until another cue is played in the fader, or until
you press the submaster bump button to start the downfade.
If the timing you have entered at the step level and at the cue or submaster level need to
be adjusted, you can also add a rate value to the effect. The rate value will cause the step
rate to slow down or speed up proportionally to the recorded times. It will not affect the
overall Up/Dwell/Down timing of the effect. This is an easy way to adjust effect timing
without having to change each step individually. You can also apply random rate to an
effect. When you adjust the random rate settings, you apply minimum and maximum rate
limits. The effect will play back at random rates between the minimum and maximum you
set.
5
Blind Editing
149
Step containing channels
Attribute setting
Random Rate settings
Step containing a
focus point
Effect Cue (or
Submaster) Attributes
Create an effect:
150
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press <Cue> [x] to select cue [x]. If you want to record an effect directly to a
submaster, press [Sub] [x], where [x] is the submaster you want to record.
Step 3:
Press [Type] [3] [Enter] to set the effect type. The blind effect display will appear
on the screen and the prompt area and keypad corner will request that you enter
a step number.
Step 4:
Press <S1 - Step> [1] [Enter] to create step 1 and move to the contents column.
You can also create a range of steps using the [Thru] key.
Step 5:
Select channels:
•
Select channels one at a time, or with the [Thru], [And] and [Except] keys.
•
Select groups using the [Group] key. You can also select channels recorded
in cues and submasters using [Group] [Cue] and [Group] [Sub]. When you
use grouped channels in an effect step, the channels and levels recorded in
the group are entered in the step, but there is no reference to the group. If
the group changes, the effect step will not.
•
Select focus points using the [Focus Point] key. When you place a focus
point in an effect step, it does create a reference to that focus point. If levels
change in the referenced focus point, the effect will play back those changes.
Step 6:
Press [S8 - Add Channels] to place selected channels into selected steps.
Step 7:
Press [At] [y] to assign level [y] to selected channels. You can set direct levels
for any channel, or set a level by reference to a focus point.
Step 8:
Repeat steps 4 through 6 for additional steps or ranges of steps.
Step 9:
Press [Record] [Enter] to record the effect.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Note:
If you create a range of steps and then add a range of channels, the selected channels
will be added one-to-one in each selected step. For example, if you create or select steps
1 through 10, and then add channels 1 through 10, channel 1 will be placed in step 1,
channel 2 into step 2, and so on. This feature will not split up groups or focus points
across steps. Groups and focus points are always entered into a step in their entirety.
Delete channels from a step in an effect:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press <Cue> [x] to select cue [x]. If you want to modify an effect recorded directly
to a submaster, press [Sub] [x], where [x] is the submaster you want to modify.
Step 3:
Press [S1 - Step] [y] to select the step containing the channels you want to
delete.
Step 4:
Press [Channel] [z] to select channel [z]. You can use the [And], [Thru] and
[Except] keys to select multiple channels.
Step 5:
Press [Clear] to delete the channels from the step.
Step 6:
Press [Record] [Enter] to record the effect.
Modify step timing and levels in an effect:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press <Cue> [x] to select cue [x]. If you want to modify an effect recorded directly
to a submaster, press [Sub] [x], where [x] is the submaster you want to modify.
Step 3:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> to view the effect step softkeys.
Step 4:
Press [S1 - Step] [y] to select step [y]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple steps.
Step 5:
Press [S2 - Step Time] [z] to assign a step time of [z]. Step times can be set to
0.1 second through 9:59 minutes.
Step 6:
Press [S3 - In/Dwell/Out] to set the In, Dwell and Out times. Each time you press
[S3] you will move from column to column within the In/Dwell/Out portion of the
screen. When the column is highlighted, enter the time value you want for that
setting. In/Dwell/Out times can be set to 0 seconds through 9:59 minutes.
Step 7:
Press [S4 - Low/High] to set the low and high levels of the step. If channels in
the step have levels assigned, the low and high levels are proportional settings.
If there are no levels assigned to channels in the step, the low and high levels
are absolute. Each time you press [S4] you will move from column to column
within the Lo/Hi portion of the screen. When the column is highlighted, enter the
level you want for that setting.
Step 8:
Repeat steps 4 through 7 to adjust more steps.
Step 9:
Press [Record] [Enter] to record the effect.
Note:
5
Blind Editing
You can use the arrow keys to move about the effect display instead of the Softkeys.
151
Apply a random rate to an effect:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press <Cue> [x] to select cue [x]. If you want to modify an effect recorded directly
to a submaster, press [Sub] [x], where [x] is the submaster you want to modify.
Step 3:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> to view the effect step softkeys.
Step 4:
Press [S7 - Random Rate] [y] [Enter], where [y] is the low random rate. Rate
values can be set to 0-2000.
Step 5:
Press [z] [Enter], where [z] is the high random rate.
Step 6:
Press [Record] [Enter] to record the effect. When the effect plays back it will use
random rate settings between the low and high random rates entered here.
Insert a step in an effect:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press <Cue> [x] to select cue [x]. If you want to modify an effect recorded directly
to a submaster, press [Sub] [x], where [x] is the submaster you want to modify.
Step 3:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> to view the effect step softkeys.
Step 4:
Press [S5 - Insert Step] [y] [Enter], where [y] is the number of the new step you
want to create. The old step [y] and all subsequent steps will increment their step
number by one and the new empty step [y] will appear. Only one step may be
inserted at a time.
Step 5:
Add channels and modify timing as described in the procedures above.
Step 6:
Press [Record] [Enter] to record the effect.
Note:
You may use the [u] and [v] keys to select the step you want to insert.
Delete steps in an effect:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press <Cue> [x] to select cue [x]. If you want to modify an effect recorded directly
to a submaster, press [Sub] [x], where [x] is the submaster you want to modify.
Step 3:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> to view the effect step softkeys.
Step 4:
Press [S6 - Delete Step] [y], where [y] is the number of the step you want to
delete.You can delete multiple steps at a time, using the [And] and [Thru] keys.
All subsequent steps will renumber themselves to close the gap.
Step 5:
Press [Record] [Enter] to record the effect.
Note:
You may use the [u] and [v] keys to select the step(s) you want to delete.
Lastly, you can apply attributes to an effect to change the playback order and direction.
Available attributes include:
•
152
Positive/Negative An effect can be either Positive or Negative, but not both. A
positive effect sets inactive steps to their low level and as each
step fires, it fades to its high level. A negative effect sets inactive
steps to their high level and as each step fires, it fades to its low
level.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
•
Alternate. . . . . . . . When you add the Alternate attribute, the effect will alternate
between positive and negative playback. The first pass will play
back at the positive or negative setting of the effect, and then begin
to alternate in each subsequent pass through the steps.
•
Reverse . . . . . . . . A Reverse effect runs its steps from last to first.
•
Bounce . . . . . . . . . A bounce effect funs in one direction on the first pass, and then
back in the opposite direction on the next pass. The direction it
runs first depends on whether the reverse attribute has been set.
•
Build . . . . . . . . . . . A Build effect starts with all channels at their low level in a positive
effect, or at their high level in a negative effect. As each step fires,
it does not fade out. Each subsequent step builds on the last one
until all steps are at their high level in a positive effect or low level
in a negative effect. All steps then fade out together and the
sequence starts again.
Note:
The above attributes can all be assigned to an effect at the same time or in any
combination. This means you can create a Negative Alternate Reverse Bounce Build
effect if you like.
•
Random . . . . . . . . As soon as you set an effect to Random, all other attributes are
removed except for Positive or Negative. A random effect plays
back its steps in random order. Step timing is not affected.
Modify effect attributes:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press <Cue> [x] to select cue [x]. If you want to modify an effect recorded directly
to a submaster, press [Sub] [x], where [x] is the submaster you want to modify.
Step 3:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> to view the effect step softkeys.
Step 4:
Press:
Step 5:
5
Blind Editing
•
[S1 - Negative] to change the effect from Positive to Negative. When
pressed, [S1] will toggle to Positive. Press [S1] again to return the effect to
Positive. An effect must be either Positive or Negative.
•
[S2 - Alternate] to apply the Alternate attribute. Press [S2 - Alternate] again
to remove this attribute.
•
[S3 - Reverse] to apply the Reverse attribute. Press [S3 - Reverse] again
to remove this attribute.
•
[S4 - Bounce] to apply the Bounce attribute. Press [S4 - Bounce] again to
remove this attribute.
•
[S5 - Build] to apply the Build attribute. Press [S5 - Build] again to remove
this attribute.
•
[S6 - Random] to apply the Random attribute. Press [S6 - Random] again
to remove this attribute.
Press [Record] [Enter] to record the effect.
153
Submasters
Blind allows you to edit submasters without affecting the stage output. This is useful when
you are in the middle of a rehearsal or performance and you need to make a change. Blind
also allows you to see more detailed information about submasters that contain effects,
subroutines, or are set as Supermasters.
Edit submasters in Blind:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
If required, press [Page] [x] [Enter] to select the submaster page you want to
view. There are ten pages available.
Step 3:
Press [Sub] [y] [Enter] to select submaster [y]. You can also use the [+] and
[-] keys to increment and decrement through the submasters on the current
submaster page.
Step 4:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 5:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95. “Not Recorded” will blink in the lower left corner of the
channel area.
Step 6:
Press [Record] <Sub> <y> [Enter], where [y] is the target submaster number.
When you edit cues, submasters, groups or focus points in Stage, Fader or Blind,
changes to channel levels or effects are not recorded until you press [Record] [Enter].
Changes to overall cue or submaster timing do not require [Record] [Enter].
Submaster List
In the Submaster List display, you can view and edit the submaster numbers and their
attributes. You can edit one or a number of submasters at a time, using the arrow keys to
navigate within the list. You can only view and edit one page of submasters at a time. To
view and edit submasters on other pages, press [Page] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the page
number. The current level of each submaster’s fader is displayed in the “%” column.
154
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Edit submaster attributes within the Submaster List display:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Sub] [Enter] to view submasters in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S2 - Sub List] to display the Submaster List.
Step 4:
Press [x] [Enter] to select submaster [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple submasters. You may also use the up- and downarrow ([v] and [u]) keys to scroll through the Submaster List.
Step 5:
Press:
•
[S1 - Bump Status] to change the status of the submaster(s) bump button.
Press [1] [Enter] to enable the sub bump for normal operation, [2] [Enter]
to disable the sub bump entirely (a “D” is displayed in the column), or [3]
[Enter] to enable Solo operation for the selected submaster(s). Solo
operation causes channels not contained in the submaster to go to zero
when the sub’s bump button is pressed.
•
[Time] to change the upfade time for the selected submaster(s). See Time
Functions, page 125.
•
[Time] [Time] to change the dwell time for the selected submaster(s).
•
[Time] [Time] [Time] to change the downfade time for the selected
submaster(s).
•
[Type] to change the type for the selected submaster(s). See Submaster
Types, page 121.
•
[S3 - Rate] to change the rate setting for the selected submaster(s). See
Rate, page 126.
•
[Label] to add a label to the selected submaster(s). See Label, page 130.
•
Alternatively, you can press the right- and left-arrow ([t] and [s]) keys to
move through the Submaster List columns. The prompt area will display
instructions for setting each available attribute as you move from column to
column.
Delete submasters within the Submaster List display:
5
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Sub] [Enter] to view submasters in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S2 - Sub List] to display the Submaster List.
Step 4:
Press [S6 - Delete Sub].
Step 5:
Press [x] to select submaster [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except]
to select multiple submasters.
Step 6:
Press [Enter] to delete the selected submaster(s). To abort the delete command,
press [Clear].
Step 7:
Press [Enter] to confirm that you really want to delete the submaster(s).
Blind Editing
155
Submaster Spreadsheet
In the Submaster Spreadsheet, you can see channel levels for all pile-on submasters on a
page in a spreadsheet layout. You cannot view the contents of effect or subroutine
submasters, but you can see the submaster type setting. Inhibitive submasters display “IN”
for channels recorded to them. You can edit or delete submasters one at a time, or by
selecting ranges. Using the replace level feature, you can change channels at one level to
a new level, without having to select them individually.
CAUTION:
Unlike the Stage and Blind displays, changes made in the spreadsheet are
recorded immediately without the need for the additional [Record] command.
Changes made in the spreadsheet will be stored, but will not update levels on stage
until you move the submaster fader to zero and back to a level. The submaster LED
will blink to indicate that the active submaster has been changed.
Edit submasters in the spreadsheet display:
Note:
156
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Sub] [Enter] to view submasters in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the submaster spreadsheet.
Step 4:
Press [x] to select submaster [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except]
to select multiple submasters.
Step 5:
Press [Channel] [y] to select channel [y]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple channels.
Step 6:
Press [At] [z] to change levels for the selected channel(s) in the selected cue(s)
to level [z]. To remove levels from a submaster, press [At] [Clear].
To deselect channels after pressing [At], but before entering a new level, simply press
[Channel] or [Sub].
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Delete submasters in the spreadsheet display:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Sub] [Enter] to view submasters in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the submaster spreadsheet.
Step 4:
Press [S6 - Delete Sub].
Step 5:
Press [x] to select submaster [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except]
to select multiple submasters.
Step 6:
Press [Enter] to delete the selected submaster(s).
Step 7:
Press [Enter] to confirm that you really want to delete the submaster(s).
Replace levels in the spreadsheet display:
5
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Sub] [Enter] to view submasters in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the submaster spreadsheet.
Step 4:
Press [x] to select submaster [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except]
to select multiple submasters.
Step 5:
Press [Channel] [y] to select channel [y]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple channels.
Step 6:
Press [S3 - Replace Level] [z] [Enter], where [z] is the level you want to replace.
Only channels at that level are selected. Use the [Full] key to select channels at
that level.
Step 7:
Press [a] [Enter], where [a] is the level you want to replace the level [z].
Blind Editing
157
Supermasters
Submasters may be set as Supermasters. A Supermaster masters a number of assigned
submasters. When you press the bump button for a Supermaster, you are pressing the
bump buttons for all associated submasters.
To create a Supermaster:
158
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
If required, press [Page] [x] [Enter] to select the submaster page you want to
view. There are ten pages available.
Step 3:
Press [Sub] [y] [Enter] to select submaster [y]. You can also use the [+] and
[-] keys to increment and decrement through the submasters on the current
submaster page.
Step 4:
Press [Type] [5] [Enter] to set the Supermaster type.
Step 5:
Press [z] to select submaster [z]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except]
to select multiple submasters.
Step 6:
Press [t] [1] to enable the assignment. Press [0] to disable the assignment.
Inhibitive submasters and other Supermasters will not be affected by a
Supermaster.
Step 7:
Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have assigned all the submasters you want to the
Supermaster.
Step 8:
Press [Record] [Enter] to record the Supermaster. You can also press [Record]
and a submaster bump button to record these settings to another submaster.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Groups
If you find yourself selecting the same groupings of channels over and over, or you always
want to set levels for certain channels proportionally relative to each other, you can record
those channels with levels to a group. A group is a simple way to select multiple channels
with minimal key presses. You can record and edit groups in Stage or in Blind. In Blind, you
have access to the additional Group List and Group Spreadsheet displays.
Edit groups in Blind:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Group] [y] [Enter] to select group [y]. You can also use the [+] and
[-] keys to increment and decrement through the recorded groups.
Step 3:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 4:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95. “Not Recorded” will blink in the lower left corner of the
channel area.
Step 5:
Press [Record] <Group> <y> [Enter], where [y] is the target group number.
Note:
5
Blind Editing
When you edit cues, submasters, groups or focus points in Stage, Fader or Blind,
changes to channel levels or effects are not recorded until you press [Record] [Enter].
159
Group List
The Group List displays the number and label of each recorded group. Use the Group List
to quickly find available group numbers, or to label groups individually or in ranges. You can
also delete groups within the Group List display.
Edit group labels within the Group List display:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Group] [Enter] to view groups in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S2 - Group List] to display the Group List.
Step 4:
Press [x] [Enter] to select group [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple groups. You may also use the down- and up-arrow
([v] and [u]) keys to scroll through the Group List.
Step 5:
Press [Label] and type in the label you want to apply to the selected group(s).
•
Note:
Alternatively, you can press the right- and left-arrow ([t] and [s]) keys to
move through the Group List columns.
Label can be found on <S7 - More Softkeys> [S2 - Label] on Express facepanels.
Delete groups within the Group List display:
160
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Group] [Enter] to view groups in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S2 - Group List] to display the Group List.
Step 4:
Press [S6 - Delete Group].
Step 5:
Press [x] to select group [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except] to
select multiple groups.
Step 6:
Press [Enter] to delete the selected group(s). To abort the delete command,
press [Clear].
Step 7:
Press [Enter] to confirm that you really want to delete the group(s).
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Group Spreadsheet
In the Group Spreadsheet, you can see channel levels for all recorded groups in a
spreadsheet layout. You can edit or delete groups one at a time, or by selecting ranges.
Using the replace level feature, you can change channels at one level to a new level,
without having to select them individually.
CAUTION:
Unlike the Stage and Blind displays, changes made in the spreadsheet are
recorded immediately without the need for the additional [Record] command.
Changes made in the spreadsheet will be stored, but will not update levels on stage
until you recall the group(s) again.
Edit groups in the spreadsheet display:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Group] [Enter] to view groups in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the group spreadsheet.
Step 4:
Press [x] to select group [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except] to
select multiple groups.
Step 5:
Press [Channel] [y] to select channel [y]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple channels.
Step 6:
Press [At] [z] to change levels for the selected channel(s) in the selected cue(s)
to level [z]. To remove levels from a submaster, press [At] [Clear].
Note:
5
Blind Editing
To deselect channels after pressing [At], but before entering a new level, simply press
[Channel] or [Sub].
161
Create groups in the spreadsheet display:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Group] [Enter] to view groups in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the group spreadsheet.
Step 4:
Press [S2 - Create Group] [x] [Enter] to create group [x].
Step 5:
Press <Channel> [y] to select channel [y]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple channels.
Step 6:
Press [At] [z] to set selected channels to level [z].
Step 7:
Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all required levels are set.
Delete groups in the spreadsheet display:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Group] [Enter] to view groups in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the group spreadsheet.
Step 4:
Press [S6 - Delete Group].
Step 5:
Press [x] to select group [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except] to
select multiple groups.
Step 6:
Press [Enter] to delete the selected group(s).
Step 7:
Press [Enter] to confirm that you really want to delete the group(s).
Replace levels in the spreadsheet display:
162
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Group] [Enter] to view groups in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the group spreadsheet.
Step 4:
Press [x] to select group [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except] to
select multiple groups.
Step 5:
Press [Channel] [y] to select channel [y]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple channels.
Step 6:
Press [S3 - Replace Level] [z] [Enter], where [z] is the level you want to replace.
Only channels at that level are selected. Use the [Full] key to select channels at
that level.
Step 7:
Press [a] [Enter], where [a] is the level you want to replace the level [z].
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Focus Poi nts
Focus points are special groups that can be used to set levels in cues and submasters by
reference. When you set channels and fixtures to a focus point, they will take their levels
from those recorded in the focus point. If you make changes to a focus point, any channels
in a cue or submaster with a reference to that focus point will play back with the new levels.
This is very useful for pan and tilt of moving lights. If you are touring a show, or if the final
placement of furniture on your set is not determined, you can create a focus point for each
of your focus positions. When you write your cues with reference to these focus points, and
the furniture placement gets changed, you can simply refocus your lights and update the
focus points with new pan and tilt values, and all your cues will play back using that new
focus information.
You can record and edit focus points in Stage or in Blind. In Blind, you have access to the
additional Focus Point List and Focus Point Spreadsheet displays.
Note:
Focus points can store data for any channel in your show, not just fixtures or pan and tilt
data.
Edit focus points in Blind:
5
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Focus Point] [y] [Enter] to select focus point [y]. You can also use the
[+] and [-] keys to increment and decrement through the recorded focus points.
Step 3:
Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels, Dimmers
and Fixtures, page 86.
Step 4:
Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels, page 89 and Moving
Light Control, page 95. “Not Recorded” will blink in the lower left corner of the
channel area.
Step 5:
Press [Record] <Focus Point> <y> [Enter], where [y] is the target focus point
number.
Blind Editing
163
Note:
When you edit cues, submasters, groups or focus points in Stage, Fader or Blind,
changes to channel levels or effects are not recorded until you press [Record] [Enter].
Focus Point List
The Focus Point List displays the number and label of each recorded focus point. Use the
Focus Point List to quickly find available focus point numbers, or to label focus points
individually or in ranges. You can also delete focus points within the Focus Point List
display.
Edit focus point labels within the Focus Point List display:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Focus Point] [Enter] to view focus points in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S2 - Focus List] to display the Focus Point List.
Step 4:
Press [x] [Enter] to select focus point [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple focus points. You may also use the down- and uparrow ([v] and [u]) keys to scroll through the Focus Point List.
Step 5:
Press [Label] and type in the label you want to apply to the selected focus
point(s).
•
Note:
164
Alternatively, you can press the right- and left-arrow ([t] and [s]) keys to
move through the Focus Point List columns.
Label can be found on <S7 - More Softkeys> [Sx - Label] on Express facepanels.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Delete focus points within the Focus Point List display:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Focus Point] [Enter] to view focus points in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S2 - Focus List] to display the Focus Point List.
Step 4:
Press [S6 - Delete Focus].
Step 5:
Press [x] to select focus point [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except]
to select multiple focus points.
Step 6:
Press [Enter] to delete the selected focus point(s). To abort the delete
command, press [Clear].
Step 7:
Press [Enter] to confirm that you really want to delete the focus point(s).
Focus Point Spreadsheet
In the Focus Point Spreadsheet, you can see channel levels for all recorded focus points in
a spreadsheet layout. You can edit or delete focus points one at a time, or by selecting
ranges. Using the replace level feature, you can change channels at one level to a new
level, without having to select them individually.
CAUTION:
5
Blind Editing
Unlike the Stage and Blind displays, changes made in the spreadsheet are
recorded immediately without the need for the additional [Record] command.
Changes made in the spreadsheet will be stored, but will not update levels on stage
until you replay cues or submasters, or recall the focus point(s) again.
165
Edit focus points in the spreadsheet display:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Focus Point] [Enter] to view focus points in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the Focus Point Spreadsheet.
Step 4:
Press [x] to select focus point [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except]
to select multiple focus points.
Step 5:
Press [Channel] [y] to select channel [y]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple channels.
Step 6:
Press [At] [z] to change levels for the selected channel(s) in the selected cue(s)
to level [z]. To remove levels from a submaster, press [At] [Clear].
To deselect channels after pressing [At], but before entering a new level, simply press
[Channel] or [Focus Point].
Create focus points in the spreadsheet display:
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Focus Point] [Enter] to view focus points in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the Focus Point Spreadsheet.
Step 4:
Press [S2 - Create Focus] [x] [Enter] to create focus point [x].
Step 5:
Press <Channel> [y] to select channel [y]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple channels.
Step 6:
Press [At] [z] to set selected channels to level [z].
Step 7:
Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all required levels are set.
Delete focus points in the spreadsheet display:
166
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Focus Point] [Enter] to view focus points in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the Focus Point Spreadsheet.
Step 4:
Press [S6 - Delete Focus].
Step 5:
Press [x] to select focus point [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except]
to select multiple focus points.
Step 6:
Press [Enter] to delete the selected focus point(s).
Step 7:
Press [Enter] to confirm that you really want to delete the focus point(s).
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Replace levels in the spreadsheet display:
5
Step 1:
Press [Blind]. The Blind display defaults to cues.
Step 2:
Press [Focus Point] [Enter] to view focus points in Blind.
Step 3:
Press [S3 - Spread Sheet] to display the Focus Point Spreadsheet.
Step 4:
Press [x] to select focus point [x]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and [Except]
to select multiple focus points.
Step 5:
Press [Channel] [y] to select channel [y]. You can also use [And], [Thru] and
[Except] to select multiple channels.
Step 6:
Press [S3 - Replace Level] [z] [Enter], where [z] is the level you want to replace.
Only channels at that level are selected. Use the [Full] key to select channels at
that level.
Step 7:
Press [a] [Enter], where [a] is the level you want to replace the level [z].
Blind Editing
167
This page intentionally blank.
168
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Chapter 6
Playback
This chapter covers the playback options in the Emphasis Control System. With the various
facepanels available, you have a number of choices when it comes to playing back your
show. Two-scene preset operation of Express consoles is described in Appendix D:
Express Facepanel Two-Scene Operation, page 302.
This chapter contains the following sections:
6
Playback
•
A/B and C/D Fader Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
•
Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
169
A/B and C/D Fader Pairs
Your Facepanel has two timed fader pairs, called the A/B and C/D fader pairs, that are used
to play back recorded cues. The left-hand fader in each pair controls the upfade, and the
right-hand fader controls the downfade of a crossfading cue.
You may play back cues using the recorded fade timing or by taking control of the fade
manually (see Manual control, page 174). You can also affect the speed of a cue using the
rate override feature (see Rate, page 175).
You may play back cues in order, or by calling up individual cues one at a time. You can
also have active cues in both fader pairs at the same time.
F a d e r C o n tr o l s
Each fader pair has a dedicated set of controls. On Expression and Insight facepanels,
each fader pair has a set of LEDs that track the current completion level of crossfading
cues. These LEDs also indicate when the contents of the fader is a subroutine or effect.
Go
Each fader pair has a [Go] key. When you press [Go], the next cue in the cue list will play
back in that fader pair. The “next cue” may be the next-higher cue number, or it may be
determined by a [Link] command in the current cue. Regardless of which fader pair you
chose to run a cue in, a [Go] press on either fader pair will play back the next cue.
Note:
If you alternate between A/B [Go] and C/D [Go], you will see the output of both fader
pairs (two cues) on stage at the same time. In general, if you want to crossfade from one
cue in the cue list, use only one [Go] key for playback.
Hold
The [Hold] key is found to the right of the [Go] key. When pressed, the [Hold] key pauses
the current fade and holds it at that level. To resume the fade, press [Go] on the same fader
pair.
If the [Hold] key is pressed twice, the current fade is cancelled at it’s stopping point. A [Go]
press after this cancellation causes the initial cue to be “skipped” and the next cue to play
back.
Back
The [Back] key is found above or to the side of the fader pair. The [Back] key causes the
playback to move backwards through the cue list. When you move backwards through the
cue list, cue link commands are ignored.
Rate
The [S5 - Rate] key is found above or to the side of the fader pair. When the [S5 - Rate]
key is pressed, the fade rate of the currently-fading cue can be altered using the rate wheel
or the trackpad. Once the current cue completes its fade, the rate control is released from
the fader.
170
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Clear
The fader [Clear] key is found above or to the side of the fader pair. When the fader [Clear]
key is pressed, the contents of that fader are cleared from the Stage output. You can use
the default fader clear time of zero seconds, or you can set your own fader clear time (see
Default Fader Clear Time, page 52).
Additional Fader Clear Functionality
In addition to the normal [AB Clear] and [CD Clear] functions, if the fader pair is cleared
(Clear LED on solid) and [AB Clear] or [CD Clear] is pressed, all background cues that
were launched from that fader pair will be aborted and their channels cleared.
Fader contains Fader contains
static cue - not static cue and is
a source of
source of
background
background
channels.
channels
Fader contains
running effect
with a dwell of
Hold and is not
a source of
background
channels
Fader contains
running effect
with a dwell of
Hold and is a
source of
background
channels
First press
Clears contents of
fader pair in Fader
Clear time as set in
System Settings.
Clears active
channels in Fader
Clear time as set in
System Settings,
background cues
remain.
Starts downfade of
effect (in the
recorded downfade
time), does not clear
contents.
Starts downfade of
effect (in the
recorded downfade
time), does not clear
contents.
Second press
Overrides fader
clear time set in
system settings and
clears fader in a
zero count.
Overrides fader
clear time set in
system settings and
clears fader in a
zero count background cues
remain.
Clears contents of
fader pair in Fader
Clear time as set in
System Settings.
Clears contents of
fader pair in Fader
Clear time as set in
System Settings.
Clears background
channels sourced
by fader pair.
Overrides fader
clear time set in
system settings and
clears fader in a
zero count.
Overrides fader
clear time set in
system settings and
clears fader in a
zero count background cues
remain.
[AB Clear]
or
[CD Clear]
Third press
Fourth press
6
Playback
Clears background
channels sourced
by fader pair.
171
Playback Cue List
The playback cue list is visible in Stage, Blind, Fader and Tracksheet displays on Express
facepanels. On the Expression and Insight, the playback cue list is always visible on the
second monitor, unless the channel display has been expanded. The playback cue list
displays all recorded cues with their timing and any assigned attributes. As you play back
cues, the most recently played cue appears at the top of the list in grey. The current cue
appears in red with a yellow “>” to the left of the cue number as the cue is fading, the cue
number turns yellow upon completion of the fade. The next cue appears in white, and
subsequent cues follow in grey. As you play back cues, the list scrolls upward.
Note:
Subroutine cues appear in white when they are the current cue.
Last Cue
Current Cue
(If the current
cue is mid-fade,
it is displayed in
red.)
Next Cue
Fader Status
Expression/Insight
Express
Current Cue
(If the current
cue is mid-fade,
it is displayed in
red.)
Next Cue
172
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
F a d e r S t a tu s d i s p l a y
The Fader Status display shows the contents of each fader pair, the percentage of
completion of the up- and downfades, and an indication of manual control, if applicable.
Crossfading Cue Running
Cue in fader
Percentage of completion
Time remaining in fade
Crossfading Cue under Manual Control
Cue in fader
Manual crossfade indicator
Percentage of completion
Effect Cue Running
Cue in fader
Dwell time indicator
Effect step indicator
Subroutine Cue Running
Time remaining in step fade
and percentage of step
completion
Cue in fader (dark red
indicates a subroutine step)
Subroutine cue number in fader
Subroutine Cue with Hold for Go
Hold for Go indicator
Cue in fader (dark red
indicates a subroutine step)
Subroutine cue number in fader
6
Playback
173
Cue Playback
Playing back cues is as simple as pressing the [Go] key on a fader pair. With each [Go]
press, the selected cue (or next cue) will play back in that fader pair. If you have cues
recorded and you have just turned on your system or loaded a new show, the cue with the
lowest cue number automatically becomes the next cue, and you are ready to play back
your show. If, however, you need to start with a different cue number, you can easily select
the cue to play back next at any time.
To play back cues using the recorded fade times, make sure that the A/B and C/D faders
are at the top of their travel (level 10, furthest away from you).
I n s eq u e n c e
To play back cues in numerical sequence, or in the sequence determined by [Link]
commands on cues, simply press [Go] on the fader pair of your choice. Each time you
press [Go], the next cue in the cue list (or the next cue as determined by a [Link] command)
will play back in that fader pair.
Note:
If you alternate between A/B [Go] and C/D [Go], you will see the output of both fader
pairs (two cues) on stage at the same time. In general, if you want to crossfade from one
cue in the cue list, use only one [Go] key for playback.
Out of sequence
To play cues out of sequence, or start sequential playback somewhere other than the
lowest cue number in your cue list, you will need to select the cue manually and then press
[Go].
Select the cue to play back:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Stage]. You must be in the stage display to select a cue for playback.
Step 2:
Press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the number of the cue you want to play back.
Step 3:
Press [Go] on the fader pair of your choice.
You may select a cue to play back out of sequence at any time. Use this procedure to
jump to a required cue, or to exit a link loop (see Link Functions, page 113).
Manual control
You can override the recorded fade times manually by “grabbing” the crossfade with the
faders. You can choose to start the cue and then grab the fade in progress, or you can start
with the faders at zero and use manual control for the entire crossfade. Remember that the
left fader in the pair controls upfade time, and the right fader controls downfade time. By
moving the faders individually, you can manually control the upfade separate from the
downfade, creating a manual split-fade.
Grab a crossfade for manual control:
174
Step 1:
Press [Stage]. You must be in the stage display to select a cue for playback.
Step 2:
If required, press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the number of the cue you want to play
back.
Step 3:
Press [Go] on the fader pair of your choice.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Step 4:
Bring both faders down until they meet the current level of the crossfade. When
they meet that level, the crossfade transfers from timed fades to manual fade.
Step 5:
Raise the faders to move forward through the crossfade manually. Once you
reach level 10 on the faders, the crossfade completes and you no longer have
control over the levels in the cue. You could also pull the faders down to zero to
return to the previous cue state and then fade the cue up manually from there.
Note:
Grabbing crossfades manually is useful if you need to quickly force a cue to completion,
like when you need to setup for a scene in a rehearsal, or if you need to edit a cue with
a long crossfade.
Start a cue with manual control:
Step 1:
Press [Stage]. You must be in the stage display to select a cue for playback.
Step 2:
If required, press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the number of the cue you want to play
back.
Step 3:
Bring both faders down to the zero level (closest to you).
Step 4:
Press [Go] on the fader pair of your choice. The cue will load, but will not begin
its fade until you slide the faders off the zero level.
Step 5:
Raise the faders to move forward through the crossfade manually. Once you
reach level 10 on the faders, the crossfade completes and you no longer have
control over the levels in the cue.
Rate
You can also temporarily modify a cue’s playback by applying a [S5 - Rate] to the fader
pair. [S5 - Rate] settings are applied on a per cue basis and will not override the whole cue
list’s recorded times. If you apply a rate to a standard crossfading cue, the rate will affect
the time to completion of that cue. Once the cue completes, you lose [S5 - Rate] control
over the cue. If you apply a [S5 - Rate] to an effect or subroutine cue that loops
continuously, the [S5 - Rate] will apply until you play back another cue in the fader pair.
[S5 - Rate] adjustments at the fader level can be updated into a cue. This is especially
useful for adjusting effect times. You can apply and adjust the fader rate live, and then
update the setting into the cue. Each time the cue is played back after that, the rate will
automatically be applied.
Rates are expressed as percentages of recorded fade times. A rate of 100 will play back at
recorded times. A rate of 200 will play back twice as fast as the recorded time: 10 second
recorded time will play back at 5 seconds. A rate of 50 will play back half as fast as the
recorded time: 10 second recorded time will play back at 20 seconds. You can set rates
anywhere between zero and 2000. A rate of zero stops the fade.
Apply a rate to a fader pair:
6
Playback
Step 1:
Press [Stage]. You must be in the stage display to select a cue for playback.
Step 2:
If required, press [Cue] [x], where [x] is the number of the cue you want to play
back.
Step 3:
Press [Go] on the fader pair you wish to use.
Step 4:
Press [S5 - Rate] on the same fader pair. As the cue runs you can adjust its rate
live by using the rate wheel or trackpad. When the cue completes, the rate on the
fader reverts to 100.
175
Background fades
If your show contains LTP channels (see LTP, page 47), you may see channels fading in
the background. If an LTP channel has the same level in a series of cues, and the first cue
of the series is not allowed to complete before you play back subsequent cues, the channel
will complete its fade in the background in the fade time of the first cue.
Channels levels fading in the background are displayed in purple. You can view cues
running in the background using the Fader display.
Clear background fades:
Note:
176
Step 1:
Press [S3 - Backgrnd Overrides] to view the Background Overrides display.
Step 2:
Press [x] [Enter], where [x] is the cue number you want to clear out of the
background. To clear all background levels, enter “0”.
Step 3:
Press:
•
[1] [Enter] to clear the selected cue’s levels from the background.
•
[2] [Enter] to cancel the fade of the selected cue. This will stop the selected
cue at its current fade level and keep the channels in the background.
•
[3] [Enter] to finish the selected cues fade immediately and keep the
channels in the background.
•
[4] [Enter] to place the selected cue on the X wheel or trackpad for manual
control of the fade.
•
[5] [Enter] to adjust the selected cue’s fade rate using the X wheel or the
trackpad.
•
[Clear] [Clear] on the numerical keypad to cancel the window.
To quickly clear all background channels, press [S3 - Backgrnd Overrides] [Enter]
[Enter]. To quickly clear the active and background channels sourced by a fader pair,
press [Clear] for that fader pair up to four times.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Quickstep
Quickstep suppresses recorded cue timing, causing cues to play back at full speed
(time = 0). When Quickstep is enabled, upfade, downfade, wait and follow times are
ignored. Cues that would auto-follow based on follow timing do not execute until you press
[Go]. Link commands are respected for playback order, and subroutine and effect cues are
not affected beyond not executing upfade, dwell and downfade times at the effect cue level.
Note:
Quickstep is a useful tool for stepping through your cue list quickly. You can verify that
the end state of all your cues is correct without waiting for the individual fade times to
complete.
Enable or disable Quickstep:
Step 1:
Press [Stage] or [Fader]. Quickstep is only available in the Stage and Fader
displays.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S1 - Enable Quickstep]. “Quickstep” will blink in
each Fader Status display to indicate that Quickstep is active. Quickstep will
always affect both fader pairs at the same time. [S1] will toggle to [S1 - Disable
Quickstep].
Step 3:
Press [S1 - Disable Quickstep] to disable Quickstep and return to normal fader
operation.
Multi-part Cues
Multi-part cues play back the same as any other crossfading cue. All the parts and their
timing attributes are displayed individually in the playback cue list and the Fader Status
display will show the time remaining and completion percentage for the whole cue, not on
a per part basis. When a part cue plays back, the levels for all channels that will move in
the cue turn green on the stage display as soon as [Go] is pressed. Movement of those
channels depends on the fade times recorded in the part, and whether or not a [Wait] time
is applied to the part.
Effect Cues
When you play back an effect cue in a fader pair, the faders take on different functions. The
left-hand fader in the pair becomes a level master for the running effect. The LEDs for the
right-hand fader only move to 50 to indicate that an effect is running.
To fade out of an effect with a dwell time of hold, press [Clear] on the fader pair to start the
downfade. To clear an effect cue entirely, press [Clear] [Clear].
Subroutine Cues
When you play back a subroutine cue, you are actually playing back a series of cues at a
given rate (see Subroutines, page 143). The Fader Status display will indicate the
subroutine cue number, as well as the currently running cue based on the subroutine’s
steps (see Fader Status display, page 173). The faders behave as they do when running
an effect cue. The left-hand fader in the pair becomes a level master for the running
subroutine. The LEDs for the right-hand fader only move to 50 to indicate that a subroutine
is running.
6
Playback
177
Play back a subroutine using Go To Step:
178
Step 1:
Playback the subroutine cue in either the A/B or C/D fader pair.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S5 - Go To Subr Step] [x], where [x] is the step
number you want to go to.
Step 3:
Press [Go] on the fader pair currently running the subroutine. The step indicated
in step 2 above will play back and the subroutine will continue to run as recorded.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Submasters
Submasters can contain recorded channel levels, effects or subroutines. Submasters can
also be set to the Supermaster style, which allows them to master other submasters.
Playing back submasters that do not contain subroutines always follow the pile-on, or
Highest-Takes-Precedence, convention. This includes effect submasters, and submasters
created with the [Load Sub] command.
Submaster Pages
There are ten submaster pages available. If submasters are active when a new page is
loaded, the levels for active subs will not change to the new contents until you bring the
submaster fader back to zero and raise it again. The submaster’s LED will blink to indicate
that the active levels do not match the current page.
To load a new page of submasters, press [Page] [x], where [x] is the page number.
Effects
Effects on submasters are always running. They do not appear on stage until you raise the
fader on the submaster. The submaster fader masters the channel levels in the effect. You
can also play the effect using the submaster’s bump button. In this case, the submaster will
follow the bump status set in the Submaster List (see Submaster List, page 154), and will
play the effect in the timing recorded to the submaster (see Submasters, page 127).
Subroutines on Submasters (Subs-on-Subs)
When Subs-on-Subs are played back, it is as if you have added fader pairs to the system.
LTP and HTP channels interact as if they are playing back on the A/B or C/D fader pairs.
The submaster fader masters the intensity channels.
Play back a subroutine on a submaster:
Step 1:
Bring the submaster fader up to full (or to the level you want).
Step 2:
Press the submaster bump button to start the subroutine running.
Play back a subroutine using Go To Step:
Step 1:
If the subroutine is not currently active, make sure the submaster fader is above
zero.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S5 - Go To Subr Step] [x], where [x] is the step
number you want to go to.
Step 3:
Press the bump button of the submaster containing the subroutine. The step
indicated in step 2 above will play back and the subroutine will continue to run as
recorded.
Fade out a subroutine on a submaster:
6
Playback
Step 1:
Press [Stage] or [Fader]. The Fadeout Subroutine command is only available in
the Stage and Fader displays.
Step 2:
Press [S1 - Fadeout Subr] and then the bump button of the submaster
containing the subroutine you want to fade out. Press [Enter] instead of a bump
button to fade out all running subroutines on submasters. The subroutine’s
intensity channels will fade out in the fade time imbedded in the subroutine (see
Subroutines on Submasters (Subs-on-Subs), page 146), or in the fader clear
time if a subroutine fade time is not included.
179
Submaster Rate
You can place a rate on a submaster to adjust the playback of effects and subroutines. This
rate can be added to the submaster so that the effect or subroutine plays back at that rate
automatically.
Place a rate on a submaster:
Step 1:
Press [Stage] or [Fader]. The Rate command is only available in the Stage and
Fader displays.
Step 2:
Activate the submaster containing the effect or subroutine.
Step 3:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S5 - Rate] and press the submaster’s bump
button.
Step 4:
Adjust the rate using the rate wheel or trackpad. The rate adjustment will occur
live.
Step 5:
If you want to add the rate to the submaster, press [Enter]. The rate will be set
for that submaster, and the effect or subroutine will play back at that rate until you
clear or set a new rate. To set the rate back to 100, press [S5 - Rate] [Sub
Bump] [Clear] [Enter].
Supermasters
Submasters set as Supermasters do not play back anything themselves. They do not
contain any channel levels and cannot contain effects or submasters. They do contain
assignments to other submasters containing channel levels, effects or subroutines. When
the Supermaster’s fader is at full, the assigned submasters can play back their full output
(dependent upon the fader levels of the individual assigned submasters). As you bring
down the Supermaster’s fader, the levels of the assigned submasters are mastered
proportionally.
Note:
180
Supermasters have no effect on inhibitive submasters.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Chapter 7
Macros
Macros are very powerful tools that can be used to customize your working environment,
and increase playback options. This feature allows you to record up to 1,000 console
commands to a single macro that can be activated by a single key-press, or can be linked
to a cue for automatic activation. You can have 2,000 macros in a show file.
This chapter contains the following sections:
7
Macros
•
Create Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
•
Playback Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
•
Startup Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
•
Sample Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
181
Create Macros
Macros can be created using direct entry, or by learning the commands as you perform
them. Macros can contain any button-press command, as well as some ETCLink functions.
Fader, trackpad and encoder movements cannot be recorded into macros.
You can enter wait times into macros to pause their playback, and you can fire macros from
other macros. Macros can be triggered directly, by links to cues, within subroutines, and by
using Remote Macros (see Remote Macros, page 205 for configuration information and
Using Remote Macros, page 257 for information on wiring).
Note:
You cannot store MIDI commands within macros.
Learn Macro
One of the easiest ways to enter commands into a macro is to simply learn the series as
you perform the action(s). This way you can see what will happen when you play back the
macro. You can view and edit the macro once it is recorded using the View Macro and Edit
Macro displays. You can learn macros in any display but the macro displays.
CAUTION:
Do not perform actions within Emphasis Visualization while learning macros.
Unexpected behavior may occur.
Learn a macro:
Step 1:
In any display but the macro displays, press [Learn] [x] [Enter] to learn the
commands for macro [x]. The [Enter Macro] key’s LED will blink to indicate that
the facepanel is in learn mode.
Step 2:
Perform the commands you want to record into the macro.
Step 3:
When complete, press [Enter Macro] to record your commands.
Display Macros
You can access the macro editing tools through the Setup Menu. Recorded macros and
their labels are displayed in the Macro List. Use the Macro List to select the macro you want
to view or edit.
Display the Macro List:
182
Step 1:
Press [Setup] to access the Setup menu.
Step 2:
Press [6] [Enter] to display the Macro List.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Add a label to a macro:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [6] [Enter] to display the Macro List.
Step 2:
Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press [Enter]. You can use
[And] and [Thru] to select multiple macros.
You can also select macros for viewing and editing using the mouse in Emphasis
Visualization. Simply click the macro number or label in the Console Screens, Console
or Monitor layout.
Step 3:
Press [Label] or [S2 - Label] and type the label. If a label exists for that macro,
press F6 to clear the label from the cursor position to the end.
Step 4:
If you want to continue labeling macros, press F7 to move up to the previous
macro, F8 to advance to the next available macro. If you are done, press [Enter]
to complete your label.
Copy macros:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [6] [Enter] to display the Macro List.
Step 2:
Press [S7 - Copy Macro].
Step 3:
Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
You can also select macros for viewing and editing using the mouse in Emphasis
Visualization. Simply click the macro number or label in the Console Screens, Console
or Monitor layout.
Step 4:
7
Macros
Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press [Enter]. If the target
macro already exists, you will have to press [Enter] again to confirm that you
really want to copy over it.
183
Delete macros:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [6] [Enter] to display the Macro List.
Step 2:
Press [S6 - Delete Macro].
Step 3:
Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press [Enter]. You can use
[And] and [Thru] to select multiple macros.
Step 4:
Press [Enter] to confirm you want to delete the selected macros.
View the contents of a macro:
Step 1:
Note:
Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
You can also select macros for viewing and editing using the mouse in Emphasis
Visualization. Simply click the macro number or label in the Console Screens, Console
or Monitor layout.
Step 2:
Press [S3 - View Macro] to display the contents of the selected macro.
Step 3:
Press [S8 - Return] to return to the Macro List, or press [S1 - Edit Macro] to edit
the macro.
Macro Editing
The Macro Editing display can be used to create new macros or to edit existing macros
using direct entry. When you work in the Edit Macro display, commands are not executed
on stage as they are added to the selected macro.
Note:
184
Because you can place any command in any order, it is possible to create non-functional
macros within Emphasis. You may want to test your macro after you create it to make
sure that it does what you want it to do. Also, macros that are imported with an older
Express or Expression v3.1 show may contain commands that are not valid in the
Emphasis Control System. This is especially true of Setup menu commands.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
A Key List is provided to facilitate the entry of ETCLink commands and commands typically
found on softkeys. Use [S6 - Key List Help] to get a help message for any command in the
Key List.
Note:
The <S7 - More Softkeys> command cannot be entered in a macro in the Macro Editing
display. If you are creating a macro to page to a certain group of softkeys, use the [Learn]
command to create the macro.
Create a macro in the Macro Editing display:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [6] [Enter] to display the Macro List.
Step 2:
Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
Step 3:
Press [S1 - Edit Macro] to access the Macro Editing display.
Step 4:
Press:
Step 5:
Note:
7
Macros
•
Facepanel keys to insert commands.
•
[S8 - Key List] to insert softkey and ETCLink commands. In the Key List, use
[S4 - Previous Page] or [S5 - Next Page] to move through the pages of
available commands. Commands are listed alphabetically, not by softkey
number. Type the command number and press [Enter]. Press [S8 - Return]
to return to the Macro Editing display.
Press [Enter Macro] to record your macro.
To have a macro fire another macro, simply press the macro key, or the [M*] key, the
macro number and [Enter]. Linked macros must fall at the end of the list of commands.
185
Edit an existing macro in the Macro Editing display:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [6] [Enter] to display the Macro List.
Step 2:
Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
You can also select macros for viewing and editing using the mouse in Emphasis
Visualization. Simply click the macro number or label in the Console Screens, Console
or Monitor layout. You can also click the command to be edited.
Step 3:
Press [S1 - Edit Macro] to access the Macro Editing display. If there are
commands in the macro already, the first command is highlighted in yellow.
Step 4:
Press facepanel keys to insert commands before the selected (yellow)
command.
Step 5:
To select a command to edit, press:
Step 6:
Step 7:
186
•
Right-arrow [t] to move forward through the recorded commands one by
one.
•
Left-arrow [s] to move backward through the recorded commands one by
one.
•
Down-arrow [v] to move forward through the recorded commands in tencommand increments. If there are less than ten commands, this jumps to the
end of the list.
•
Up-arrow [u] to move backward through the recorded commands in tencommand increments. If there are less than ten commands, this jumps to the
beginning of the list.
Press:
•
Facepanel keys, or use the Key List, to insert commands before the selected
(yellow) command.
•
[S2 - Replace] to replace the selected command with a new command.
•
[S3 - Delete Entry] to remove the command from the macro.
When done, press [Enter Macro] to record your changes.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Special Macro Functions
Some commands are available to perform special functions within macros. These include
Macro Wait for inserting pauses in macros, some specific submaster functions, and
ETCLink functions.
M a cro W a it
Macro Wait commands may be entered at any point in a macro, and you may have more
than one Macro Wait within a single macro. To program a pause in a macro, press [Macro
Wait], type the amount of time you want to have the macro pause and press [Enter]. You
can then continue to enter macro commands, if necessary. Macro Waits can be
programmed from 0.1 seconds to 99:59 minutes.
Submaster Functions
Submaster functions within macros include commands to turn submaster bump buttons on
and off, as well as a special function to force-load an active submaster without having to
pull the fader down. To insert these commands in a macro in the Macro Editing display,
press:
•
[S1 - On Sub-Bump] then type the submaster number and press [Enter].
•
[S2 - Off Sub-Bump] then type the submaster number and press [Enter].
•
[S5 - Force Sub Load] then type the submaster number and press [Enter].
To include a command to start a timed submaster, or change the direction of a running fade,
simply press the actual submaster bump button while programming the macro.
ETCLink Functions
You can perform some ETCLink functions within macros, including Record Backup Look,
and Play Backup Look. These commands are only accessible from the Key List and cannot
be learned. To insert these commands in the Macro Editing display, press [S8 - Key List]
and find the RecdLook- and the PlayLook- commands. Type their command number and
press [Enter] to insert them in your macro.
Note:
For ETCLink commands to function, you must have a Link-enabled Emphasis Control
System. To purchase an upgrade, contact your dealer.
Remote Trigger Functions
Express facepanels and Video Nodes have the ability to perform a switch closure based
upon a macro command. For information on wiring the Remote Trigger, see Wiring Remote
Macros, page 258. Remote Trigger commands are only accessible from the Macro Editing
display or the Key List. To insert these commands in a macro in the Macro Editing display,
press:
7
Macros
•
[S3 - On Trigger] to close the switch.
•
[S4 - Off Trigger] to open the switch.
187
Playback Macros
Macros can be fired directly using the macro keys [M1] through [M3] on Express
facepanels, [M1] through [M5] on Expression and Insight facepanels. To access macros
above the direct keys, use the [M*] key, type the macro number and press [Enter].
To cancel the playback of a macro, press [M*].
You can also fire macros directly from cues, or within a subroutine step. For information on
linking macros to cues, see Link to macros, page 113. For information on inserting a macro
into a subroutine step, see Style Steps, page 144.
When you activate a series of macros, they will queue up in the order of activation. As each
macro completes, the next macro in the queue will fire.
R e m ot e M a c r o s
You can use an optional set of switches or keys to fire macros remotely using the Remote
Macros function. See Remote Macros, page 205 for configuration information and Using
Remote Macros, page 257 for information on wiring. When you activate a series of macros
remotely, they will queue up in the order of activation. As each macro completes, the next
macro in the queue will fire.
CAUTION:
By activating a series of macros remotely, they will queue up in the order of
activation. As each macro completes, the next macro in the queue will fire. When
cue loops are required, use subroutines instead of macros. Macros that fire
themselves are not recommended as the self-repeating macro never completes
and therefore successive macros will not be triggered. If subroutines do not
produce the cue structure needed, consider a time code program using the internal
time clock function for playback.
Startup Macro
You can also set the system to fire a macro at startup. The Startup Macro executes as soon
as the show file completely loads into Emphasis Console and Emphasis Visualization. The
Emphasis Visualization option Reload last document on startup must be enabled for the
Startup Macro to run. See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on
setting the startup preferences.
Enable the Startup Macro:
188
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [2] [Enter] to view the Options Settings.
Step 2:
Press [7] [Enter] to select Startup Macro.
Step 3:
Press:
•
[x] [Enter] to set macro [x] as the Startup Macro. An “S” will be displayed
next to the macro number in the Macro List, and the “Startup Macro”
message will be displayed in the View Macro and Macro Editing displays.
•
[0] [Enter] to clear the Startup Macro.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Sample Macros
The following macros are provided as useful samples. There are more macros available at
the ETC website: http://www.etcconnect.com/service/service_macros.asp.
Note:
Not all Expression macros are valid for the Emphasis Control System.
Channel Check
[At] [0][0] [+] [Full]
Each time you activate this macro, the next channel is brought to full as the previous
channel is taken out.
Automated Channel Check
[At] [0][0] [+] [Full] [Macro Wait - 5 seconds] [M#]
In this macro, each channel is brought to full for 5 seconds, then the macro repeats itself,
bringing up the next channel. [M#] is the macro’s own number.
Delayed Automated Channel Check
Macro 1: [Macro Wait - 1 minute] [M2]
Macro 2: [At] [0][0] [+] [Full] [Macro Wait - 5 seconds] [M2]
Sometimes you are responsible for doing the channel check and running the console. If you
need to have the automated channel check run, but you also need time to get from the
console to the stage, you can use these two macros to accomplish this task.
Turn Worklights On and Clear the Fader Pairs
[Channel] [x] [Full] [Clear - AB] [Clear - CD]
This macro brings a worklight channel [x] to full then clears the cues from the A/B and C/D
fader pairs. You can add a range of channels to your selection using the [And] and [Thru]
commands, if needed.
Turn Worklights On and Clear Both Faders and Background Channels
[Channel] [x] [Full] [Clear - AB] [Clear - CD] [S3 - Backgrnd Overrides] [Enter] [Enter]
This macro brings a worklight channel [x] to full then clears the cues from the A/B and C/D
fader pairs and any background channels. You can add a range of channels to your
selection using the [And] and [Thru] commands, if needed.
Turn Worklights On and Clear All Playbacks
[Channel] [x] [Full] [Clear - AB] [Clear - CD] [S3 - Backgrnd Overrides] [Enter] [Enter]
[S1 - Fadeout Subr] [Enter]
This macro brings a worklight channel [x] to full then clears the cues from the A/B and C/D
fader pairs, any background channels and any running subroutines on submasters. You
can add a range of channels to your selection using the [And] and [Thru] commands, if
needed.
7
Macros
189
Turn All Channels Off Except Worklights
[Channel] [1] [Thru] [-] [At] [0][0] [Enter] [Channel] [x] [Full]
This macro selects all channels and sets them to zero and brings up the worklights channel
[x] to full.
Clear Unused Channels in Flexichannel Mode
[Setup] [1] [Enter] [S1 - Purge Flexi] [Stage]
This macro clears any unused channels from the Flexichannel display.
Playback Macros
Any command used for playback, like loading a cue into a fader pair, pressing [Go] or
pressing submaster bump buttons can be recorded into a macro and linked to a cue for
automatic playback. These are show specific, therefore there are no samples, but if you find
yourself needing to do multiple playback controls at one given moment, use a macro to
simplify that playback.
190
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Chapter 8
Real Time Programs
Real Time Programs (RTP) are used in situations where your Emphasis Control System is
running on its own, playing back events at specific times of day. You will often find this type
of operation in retail situations, where the lights need to change at certain points in the day
or week.
This chapter contains the following sections:
8
•
Real Time Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
•
Time and Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Real Time Programs
191
Real Ti me Programs
You can program your Emphasis Control System with Real Time Programs. A Real Time
Program executes a macro automatically at a specific time of day. As long as your
Emphasis Control System is powered up and running, the Real Time Programs can take
care of themselves, turning lights on and off without an operator.
Real Time Programs can be setup to play back every day, only on certain days of the week,
or even only on specific dates. You can assign absolute time of day, or you can assign a
relative time based upon sunrise and sunset times for your location using the system’s
astronomical time clock feature.
It is possible to have Real Time Programs recorded, but not allow them to play back. Before
you can properly use the Real Time Programs you will need to set the time and location
settings, and you will need to enable the Real Time Programs so that they will play back.
Setting the time and location
To use real time programs, you will need to set the time and date in Emphasis (see Clock
Functions, page 56). If you want to use astronomical time clock functions to activate events
based on sunrise and sunset times, you will also need to set the location of the Emphasis
Control System. Tables of location data are in the next section (Time and Location, page
198).
Note:
192
Setting the astronomical time clock functions here does not transfer to the astronomical
time clock settings in Emphasis Visualization for daylight rendering. You will need to set
the location data in both places to use both features.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Set latitude:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [3] [Enter] to access the Clock Functions menu.
Step 2:
Press [1] [Enter] to choose Latitude.
Step 3:
Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel, type in the
desired degrees of latitude, press [+] for North or [-] for South, and press [Enter].
Step 4:
Type in the desired minutes of latitude and press [Enter].
Set longitude:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [3] [Enter] to access the Clock Functions menu.
Step 2:
Press [2] [Enter] to choose Longitude.
Step 3:
Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel, type in the
desired degrees of longitude, press [+] for West or [-] for East, and press [Enter].
Step 4:
Type in the desired minutes of longitude and press [Enter].
Set time zone:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [3] [Enter] to access the Clock Functions menu.
Step 2:
Press [3] [Enter] to choose Time Zone.
Step 3:
Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel, type in the
desired offset from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), press [+] for West or [-] for
East, and press [Enter].
Set 12/24 hour clock:
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [3] [Enter] to access the Clock Functions menu.
Step 2:
Press [4] [Enter] to choose 12/24 Hour Clock.
Step 3:
Press [0] [Enter] to set a 12 hour clock, or [1] [Enter] to set a 24 hour clock.
Set daylight saving time:
8
Step 1:
On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis
Visualization, press [Setup] [3] [Enter] to access the Clock Functions menu.
Step 2:
Press [5] [Enter] to choose Daylight Savings Time.
Step 3:
Press [1] [Enter] to set daylight time, or [0] [Enter] to set standard time.
Real Time Programs
193
Create and Edit Real Time Programs
You may have up to 500 Real Time Programs recorded in your show file. Each program
executes a single macro. You can assign a specific or relative time and a day of week or
date for each program to play back on.
CAUTION:
By activating a series of macros remotely, they will queue up in the order of
activation. As each macro completes, the next macro in the queue will fire. When
cue loops are required, use subroutines instead of macros. Macros that fire
themselves are not recommended as the self-repeating macro never completes
and therefore successive macros will not be triggered. If subroutines do not
produce the cue structure needed, consider a time code program using the internal
time clock function for playback.
Emphasis automatically sorts the programs in the Real Time Programs display according
to time of day when you exit the display or when you move, copy or delete programs. You
can force a sort anytime you are in the display by pressing <S7 - More Softkeys> [S8 Sort].
Create a Real Time Program:
194
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [8] [Enter] to view the Real Time Programs display.
Step 2:
Press <S1 - Select Program> [x] [Enter] to select program number [x] and
move to the Time column. Time follows the 12-hour or 24-hour clock setting in
the Clock Functions menu. To change the clock settings, see Setting the time
and location, page 192.
Step 3:
Enter the time of day:
•
Enter absolute time directly using the numerical keypad. The keypad corner
displays your entry as you type. Make sure the correct time is displayed in
the keypad corner before pressing [Enter]. When you press [Enter], you are
moved to the Days/Date column.
•
Enter time using the astronomical time clock by pressing [S3 - Astro Clock].
You will need to enter the type of offset you want; [1] for before sunrise, [2]
for after sunrise, [3] for before sunset, [4] for after sunset, or [0] for none.
Press [Enter] and then enter the amount of time in hours and minutes. The
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
keypad corner displays your entry as you type. Make sure the correct time is
displayed in the keypad corner before pressing [Enter]. When you press
[Enter], you are moved to the Days/Date column.
Step 4:
Press:
•
[1] for Monday, [2] for Tuesday, [3] for Wednesday, [4] for Thursday, [5] for
Friday, [6] for Saturday or [7] for Sunday. Use [And] and [Thru] to select
multiple days of the week. Press [Enter] when you have the days selected.
•
[S4 - Days/Date] to enter a specific date. Enter the date and press [Enter],
enter the numerical month and press [Enter], then enter the last two digits
of the year and press [Enter]. Use a date of “0” to indicate all days of the
selected month.
•
Once you have entered the days or date you are moved to the Macro
column.
Step 5:
Press [y], where [y] is the macro number you want to play back at that time on
the selected days or date. When you press [Enter] you are moved to the Label
column.
Step 6:
Enter a label for the program using the optional alphanumeric keyboard, if you
wish. When you are done typing the label, press [Enter].
Edit an existing Real Time Program:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [8] [Enter] to view the Real Time Programs display.
Step 2:
Press <S1 - Select Program> [x] [Enter] to select program number [x].
Step 3:
Press:
•
[S2 - Time] to edit or change to an absolute time value.
•
[S3 - Astro Clock] to edit or change to an astronomical clock offset.
•
[S4 - Days/Date] to edit the days or date setting.
•
[S5 - Macro] to edit the macro number.
•
[S6 - Label] to edit the program’s label.
•
You can also use the right- and left-arrow ([t] and [s]) keys to move from
column to column, and the down- and up-arrow ([v] and [u]) keys to select
other programs to edit.
It is possible to see a Real Time Program run while you are editing it. Edits are held in a
buffer until you exit the display or sort the programs, at which time your changes take
effect. If you do not want Real Time Programs to run while you are making changes,
disable the Real Time Programs in the Options Settings menu (see Enable Real Time
Programs, page 197).
Delete a Real Time Program:
8
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [8] [Enter] to view the Real Time Programs display.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S6 - Delete Program].
Step 3:
Press [x] [Enter] to select program number [x]. Use [And] and [Thru] to select
multiple programs.
Step 4:
Press [Enter] again to confirm that you want to delete the selected program(s).
Real Time Programs
195
Insert Real Time Programs:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [8] [Enter] to view the Real Time Programs display.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S1 - Insert Program].
Step 3:
Press [x] [Enter] to select the program number [x] you want to insert.
Step 4:
Press [y] [Enter], where [y] is the number of programs you want to insert.
Program [x] will be inserted, along with any other programs as determined by [y],
at the appropriate point in the list. All following programs are moved down in the
list and are renumbered.
Move Real Time Programs:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [8] [Enter] to view the Real Time Programs display.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S3 - Move Program].
Step 3:
Press [x] [Enter] to select the program number [x] you want to move. Use [And]
and [Thru] to select multiple programs. You will be prompted to enter a new time
for the moved cues.
Step 4:
Press [y] [Enter], where [y] is the new time. Selected programs are moved to the
new time, maintaining their relative offsets from the first program in the selection.
Unexpected results may occur when groups of cues using different time settings
(absolute vs. astronomical time clock), or occur on different days, are moved. When
moving multiple programs, it is best to select and copy programs that occur on the same
day, then select and copy another group, and so on.
Copy Real Time Programs:
Note:
196
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [8] [Enter] to view the Real Time Programs display.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S2 - Copy Program].
Step 3:
Press [x] [Enter] to select the program number [x] you want to copy. Use [And]
and [Thru] to select multiple programs. You will be prompted to enter a new time
for the copied cues.
Step 4:
Press [y] [Enter], where [y] is the new time. Selected programs are copied and
inserted into the program list, maintaining their relative offsets from the first
program in the selection.
Unexpected results may occur when copies are made of groups of cues using different
time settings (absolute vs. astronomical time clock). When copying multiple programs, it
is best to select and copy programs that occur on the same day, then select and copy
another group, and so on.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Enable Real Time Programs
It is possible to have Real Time Programs recorded, and not have them play back. The
default of the system is to leave Real Time Programs disabled. This does not prevent you
from recording programs, just from having them play back. To allow Real Time Programs
to execute, enable them in the Options Settings menu.
Enable or disable Real Time Programs:
8
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [2] [Enter] to view the Options Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [8] [Enter] to select Real Time Programs.
Step 3:
Press:
Real Time Programs
•
[1] [Enter] to enable Real Time Programs.
•
[0] [Enter] to disable Real Time Programs.
197
Time and Location
The following tables list time zone, latitude and longitude for representative cities around
the world. Use these settings to determine sunrise and sunset times for real time programs.
United States Cities
City, State
Albuquerque, NM
Anchorage, AK
Atlanta, GA
Baltimore, MD
Augusta, ME
Billings, MT
Boise, ID
Boston, MA
Buffalo, NY
Burlington, VT
Charleston, SC
Cheyenne WY
Chicago, IL
Columbus, OH
Dallas, TX
Denver, CO
Des Moines, IA
Detroit, MI
Fargo, ND
Hartford, CT
Honolulu, HI
Kansas City, MO
Las Vegas, NV
Lincoln, NE
Little Rock, AR
Los Angeles, CA
Indianapolis, IN
Madison, WI
Nashville, TN
Miami, FL
Minneapolis, MN
Montgomery, AL
New Orleans, LA
New York, NY
Oklahoma City, OK
Philadelphia, PA
Phoenix, AZ
Portland, OR
198
Time Zone
(Standard)
Latitude
Longitude
35° 03´ N
106° 37´
+ 10 West
61° 10´ N
149° 11´
+ 5 West
33° 39´ N
84° 26´
+ 5 West
39° 11´ N
76° 40´
+ 5 West
44° 19´ N
69° 48´
+ 7 West
45° 47´ N
108° 32´
+ 7 West
43° 36´ N
116° 13´
+ 5 West
42° 20´ N
71° 01´
+ 5 West
42° 53´ N
78° 51´
+ 5 West
44° 29´ N
73° 13´
+ 5 West
32° 47´ N
79° 59´
+ 6 West
41° 08´ N
104° 47´
+ 6 West
41° 50´ N
87° 41´
+ 5 West
40° 00´ N
82° 53´
+ 6 West
32° 47´ N
96° 45´
+ 7 West
39° 46´ N
104° 52´
+ 6 West
41° 34´ N
93° 37´
+ 5 West
42° 22´ N
83° 06´
+ 6 West
46° 52´ N
96° 49´
+ 7 West
+ 5 West
41° 45´ N
72° 41´
+ 10 West
21° 79´ N
157° 48´
+ 6 West
39° 07´ N
94° 33´
+ 7 West
36° 12´ N
115° 13´
+ 6 West
40° 48´ N
96° 41´
+ 6 West
34° 43´ N
92° 21´
+ 8 West
34° 05´ N
118° 24´
+ 5 West
39° 44´ N
86° 17´
+ 6 West
43° 04´ N
89° 23´
+ 6 West
36° 07´ N
86° 41´
+ 5 West
25° 49´ N
80° 13´
+ 6 West
44° 57´ N
93° 16´
+ 6 West
32° 21´ N
86° 17´
+ 6 West
30° 03´ N
89° 55´
+ 5 West
40° 46´ N
73° 58´
+ 6 West
35° 28´ N
97° 30´
+ 5 West
40° 00´ N
75° 08´
+ 7 West
33° 32´ N
112° 04´
+ 8 West
45° 32´ N
122° 39´
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
United States Cities (Continued)
Time Zone
(Standard)
City, State
Raleigh, NC
Salt Lake City, UT
San Francisco, CA
Seattle, WA
Sioux Falls, SD
Washington D.C.
Latitude
Longitude
+ 5 West
35° 52´ N
78° 47´
+ 7 West
40° 46´ N
111° 55´
+ 8 West
37° 47´ N
122° 33´
+ 8 West
47° 37´ N
122° 21´
+ 6 West
43° 32´ N
96° 43´
+ 5 West
38° 54´ N
77° 00´
W
W
W
W
W
W
Cities Outside the United States
City, Country
Abuja, Nigeria
Algiers, Algeria
Amsterdam, Netherlands
Ankara, Turkey
Athens, Greece
Bangkok, Thailand
Berlin, Germany
Berna, Switzerland
Bombay, India
Brussels, Belgium
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Cairo, Egypt
Cape Town, South Africa
Casablanca, Morocco
Copenhagen, Denmark
Dublin, Ireland
Edinburgh, Scotland
Edmonton, Alberta, Canada
Fukuoka, Japan
Helsinki, Finland
Hong Kong
Jakarta, Indonesia
Lima, Peru
Lisbon, Portugal
London, England
Madrid, Spain
Marseilles, France
Mexico City, Mexico
Montreal, Quebec, Canada
Moscow, Russia
Munich, Germany
Oslo, Norway
Paris, France
8
Real Time Programs
Time Zone
(Standard)
Latitude
Longitude
- 1 East
9° 12´ N
7° 11´
- 1 East
36° 47´ N
3° 3´
- 1 East
52° 17´ N
4° 57´
- 2 East
39° 56´ N
32° 52´
- 2 East
37° 58´ N
23° 43´
- 7 East
13° 44´ N
100° 31´
- 1 East
52° 27´ N
13° 22´
- 1 East
46° 57´ N
7° 26´
- 6 East
18° 54´ N
72° 49´
- 1 East
50° 50´ N
4° 20´
+ 3 West
34° 36´ S
58° 27´
- 2 East
30° 03´ N
31° 15´
- 2 East
33° 55´ S
18° 22´
0
33° 39´ N
7° 35´
- 1 East
55° 40´ N
12° 35´
0
53° 20´ N
6° 15´
0
55° 57´ N
3° 13´
- 7 West
53° 33´ N
113° 28´
- 9 East
33° 35´ N
130° 24´
- 2 East
60° 10´ N
24° 58´
- 8 East
22° 18´ N
114° 09´
- 7 East
6° 10´ S
106° 48´
+ 5 West
12° 03´ S
77° 03´
0
38° 43´ N
9° 8´
0
51° 30´ N
0° 0´
- 1 East
40° 24´ N
3° 41´
- 1 East
43° 18´ N
5° 23´
+ 6 West
19° 24´ N
99° 09´
+ 5 West
45° 30´ N
73° 36´
- 3 East
55° 46´ N
37° 20´
- 1 East
48° 09´ N
11° 34´
- 1 East
59° 56´ N
10° 44´
- 1 East
48° 49´ N
2° 29´
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
W
E
E
W
E
W
W
W
E
E
E
E
W
W
W
W
E
W
W
E
E
E
E
199
Cities Outside the United States (Continued)
City, Country
Prague, Czechoslovakia
Reykjavik, Iceland
Riga, Latvia
Rio De Janeiro, Brazil
Rome, Italy
San Juan, Puerto Rico
Santiago, Chile
Sapporo, Japan
Seoul, Korea
Singapore, Malaysia
Stockholm, Sweden
Sydney, Australia
Taipei, Taiwan
Tokyo, Japan
Toronto, Ontario, Canada
Vancouver, B.C., Canada
Vienna, Austria
Warsaw, Poland
Wellington, New Zealand
200
Time Zone
(Standard)
Latitude
Longitude
- 1 East
50° 05´ N
14° 25´
0
64° 08´ N
21° 56´
- 3 East
56° 40´ N
106° 10´
+ 3 West
22° 55´ S
43° 12´
- 1 East
41° 48´ N
12° 36´
+ 4 West
18° 29´ N
66° 07´
+ 4 West
33° 27´ S
70° 42´
- 9 East
43° 04´ N
141° 21´
- 9 East
37° 34´ N
126° 58´
- 8 East
1° 14´ N
103° 55
- 1 East
59° 21´ N
18° 04´
- 10 East
33° 52´ S
151° 12´
- 8 East
25° 02´ N
121° 31´
- 9 East
35° 41´ N
139° 46´
+ 5 West
43° 39´ N
79° 23´
+ 8 West
49° 15´ N
123° 07´
- 1 East
48° 15´ N
16° 22´
- 1 East
52° 13´ N
21° 02´
- 12 East
41° 71´ S
174° 46´
E
E
E
W
E
W
W
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
W
W
E
E
E
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Chapter 9
Control Interfaces
The Emphasis Control System interfaces with a number of protocols, such as ETCNet2,
MIDI, MIDI Show Control (MSC), MIDI Time Code, and SMPTE time code (Expression/
Insight only).
This chapter contains the following sections:
9
•
ETCNet2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
•
Facepanel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
•
Show Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
•
MIDI Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
•
MIDI Show Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
•
SMPTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
•
Time Code Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
•
Emphasis Serial Button Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Control Interfaces
201
ETCNet2
Emphasis is an ETCNet2 native product. ETCNet2 protocols are used to transfer data from
the Emphasis Server to the Facepanel, as well as to any DMX Nodes and/or Video Nodes
within your system.
In an ETCNet2 system, ownership of EDMX values is determined by a hierarchy of priority
values. The rules for this hierarchy are listed below and are relevant to multiple-console
systems, and systems integrated with ETCNet2 Nodes and Unison Architectural Control.
If you are upgrading your system from a previous version of software, you may see an
advisory indicating that you have multiple versions of ETCNet2 on your network. Though
you can run your system this way, you should upgrade your ETCNet2 devices and
Facepanel as soon as possible. To update your Facepanel, simply load the Emphasis
v1.4.0 Facepanel software (see Installing Facepanel Software, page 11).
EDMX Basics (ETCNet2 v4.0.0 and above)
The following points describe the way things are, or the way things need to be to have a
valid network setup.
t
•
There are 22 discreet priority settings within EDMX. The lowest number will always be
the highest priority.
•
Unison with a zone’s Input Mode set to Replace is equal to priority zero (0).
•
DMX Node input ports and Emphasis have a modifiable priority of 1 through 20.
•
Unison with a zone’s Input Mode set to Pass-thru-if-Active is equal to priority 21.
•
All devices (ETCNet2 nodes, Emphasis components and so on) must have unique IP
addresses on the network.
•
Emphasis and Obsession II systems must have unique System IDs on the network.
This only applies if you have multiple control systems on the same network.
•
ETCNet2 nodes don’t have System IDs, they are considered to have an ID of zero (0).
•
Zero is lower than one.
Arbitration. Who has control?
The following points describe “who wins”.
202
•
The lowest priority value has the highest priority. (1 has a higher priority than 2)
•
If multiple devices have the same priority, control is determined by Highest-TakesPrecedence at the channel level.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
•
If two input ports on a ETCNet2 DMX Node are set to the same range and the same
priority, the lowest numbered port has the highest priority. Two input ports on the same
node will not HTP.
To change the EDMX Priority of your Emphasis Control System:
Step 1:
In the Emphasis mode Setup menu, click IO.
Step 2:
In the “EDMX Priority” field, enter the new value. This may be any value between
1-20. The default value is “10”.
Step 3:
Click OK.
CAUTION:
9
Control Interfaces
Unexpected behavior may result from changes to the EDMX Priority of your
Emphasis Control System. If you have problems with your system, please contact
ETC Technical Services (see Help from ETC Technical Services, page 3).
203
DMX Output
DMX output from your Facepanel is treated the same as DMX output ports on a DMX Node.
The DMX output ports on your Facepanel can be configured locally.
To change the EDMX assignments of the DMX output ports:
Step 1:
Power up or reboot the Facepanel.
Step 2:
When the prompt appears at startup, press [1][2][3] to enter the configuration
menu.
Step 3:
Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to DMX and press [Enter].
Step 4:
Using the up- or down-arrow [u][v] keys, scroll to “DMX Output Port Timing” and
press [Enter].
Step 5:
Using the up- or down-arrow [u][v] keys, scroll to the new timing and press
[Enter]. The default setting is “MAX”.
Step 6:
Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to “DMX Input Port n Start Channel” and
press [Enter]. The value of n is the port you want to adjust.
Step 7:
Using the Facepanel numeric keypad, type the new EDMX starting address and
press [Enter].
Step 8:
Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to “DMX Input Port n Channel Count” and
press [Enter]. The value of n is the port you want to adjust.
Step 9:
Enter the new channel count. The default value is “512”.
Step 10: Press [Enter].
Step 11: Repeat steps 6-10 for each port you want to adjust.
Note:
If you make an error while changing any of these settings, and you want to return to the
previously stored values, do not press [S8]. Simply turn the Facepanel power off and on
again. The previous settings will be restored.
Step 12: Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the DMX configuration screen.
Step 13: Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen.
204
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
DMX Input
DMX In is treated the same as DMX Input to a DMX Node. The DMX Input port can be
enabled and configured in the DMX configuration menu.
To change the DMX In settings:
Step 1:
Power up or reboot the Facepanel.
Step 2:
When the prompt appears at startup, press [1][2][3] to enter the configuration
menu.
Step 3:
Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to DMX and press [Enter].
Step 4:
Using the up- or down-arrow [u][v] keys, scroll to “DMX Input Port Start Channel”
and press [Enter].
Step 5:
Enter the new DMX In starting EDMX address. The default value is “10001”.
Step 6:
Press [Enter].
Step 7:
Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to “DMX Input Port Channel Count” and
press [Enter].
Step 8:
Enter the new channel count. The default value is “512”.
Step 9:
Press [Enter].
Step 10: Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to “DMX Input Port” and press [Enter] to
toggle between Disabled and Enabled.
Step 11: Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to “DMX Input Port Priority” and press
[Enter].
Step 12: Enter the new priority value. The default value is “2”.
Step 13: Press [Enter].
Note:
If you make an error while changing any of these settings, and you want to return to the
previously stored values, do not press [S8]. Simply turn the Facepanel power off and on
again. The previous settings will be restored.
Step 14: Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the DMX configuration screen.
Step 15: Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen.
R e m ot e M a c r o s
Remote macros are accessed through the Remote Macro port on the Facepanel or the
ETCNet2 Video Node. The Remote Macro port connects to switches that can be used to
fire macros in your show file. See Macros, page 181 for information on creating macros.
Express Facepanels have access to four Remote Macros. Expression/Insight Facepanels
have access to eight Remote Macros. Expression/Insight Lighting Playback Controller units
have access to 32 Remote Macros. For wiring diagrams, see Using Remote Macros, page
257.
You can adjust the settings for each Remote Macro independently. You can assign a
system ID and a macro number to each Remote Macro. This way you can have an
individual remote macro panel execute macros across multiple Emphasis Control Systems
on the ETCNet2 network. If you assign Remote Macros in excess of the number available
to your hardware, they will be ignored.
9
Control Interfaces
205
To set the Remote Macro assignments:
Step 1:
Power up or reboot the Facepanel.
Step 2:
When the prompt appears at startup, press [1][2][3] to enter the configuration
menu.
Step 3:
Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to Remote Macros and press [Enter].
Step 4:
Using the up- or down-arrow [u][v] keys, scroll to the Remote Macro System ID
you want to adjust and press [Enter].
Step 5:
Enter the new system ID and press [Enter].
Step 6:
Using the up- or down-arrow [u][v] keys, scroll to the Remote Macro Macro ID
you want to adjust and press [Enter].
Step 7:
Enter the new macro ID and press [Enter].
Step 8:
Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the Remote Macros configuration
screen.
Step 9:
Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen.
R e m ot e T r i g g e r
The Remote Trigger feature sends an “On” or “Off” signal to any external device that
responds to a remote contact closure. The Remote Trigger commands “On Trigger” (switch
closed) and “Off Trigger” (switch open) are stored in macros. You can set the Remote
Trigger ID in Emphasis Visualization for mapping in multiple Facepanel systems.
Remote Trigger ports are available on Express Facepanels and on ETCNet2 Video Nodes.
To set the Remote Trigger ID in Emphasis Visualization:
206
Step 1:
In the Emphasis mode Setup menu, click IO.
Step 2:
In the “Remote Trigger ID” field, enter the new value. This may be any value
between 1-255. The default value is “1”.
Step 3:
Click OK.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
To set the Remote Trigger ID values on the Express facepanel:
Note:
Step 1:
Power up or reboot the Express facepanel.
Step 2:
When the prompt appears at startup, press [1][2][3] to enter the configuration
menu.
Step 3:
Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to Remote Macros and press [Enter].
Step 4:
With “Trigger Out System ID” highlighted, press [Enter].
Step 5:
Using the facepanel numeric keypad, enter the System ID number. This number
should match the system ID of the facepanel and server.
Step 6:
With “Trigger Out Trigger ID” highlighted, press [Enter].
Step 7:
Using the facepanel numeric keypad, enter the ID number. This may be any
value between 0-255 (“0” will disable the Remote Trigger). The default value is
“1”. This value should match the value you set in Emphasis Visualization.
Step 8:
Press [Enter].
If you make an error while changing any of these settings, and you want to return to the
previously stored values, do not press [S8]. Simply turn the facepanel power off and on
again. The previous settings will be restored.
Step 9:
Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the Remote Macro configuration
screen.
Step 10: Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen.
9
Control Interfaces
207
Facepanel Configuration
Once you have configured your system, you should save a copy of the configuration to a
3.5” floppy disk.
To save your configuration to a floppy disk:
Step 1:
Power up or reboot the Facepanel.
Step 2:
When the prompt appears at startup, press [1][2][3] to enter the configuration
menu.
Step 3:
Insert a blank 3.5” floppy disk into the Facepanel disk drive.
Step 4:
Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to Backup to Floppy and press [Enter]. The
backup process begins immediately.
Step 5:
When complete, remove the disk from the floppy drive and restart your
Facepanel for normal operation.
To restore your configuration from a floppy disk:
Step 1:
Power up or reboot the Facepanel.
Step 2:
When the prompt appears at startup, press [1][2][3] to enter the configuration
menu.
Step 3:
Insert the floppy disk containing your configuration into the Facepanel disk drive.
Step 4:
Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to Restore from Floppy and press [Enter].
The configuration loads immediately.
Step 5:
When complete, remove the disk from the floppy drive and restart your
Facepanel for normal operation.
To restore factory default settings:
208
Step 1:
Power up or reboot the Facepanel.
Step 2:
When the prompt appears at startup, press [1][2][3] to enter the configuration
menu.
Step 3:
Insert the Facepanel Software Disk into the Facepanel disk drive. See Software
Installation, page 11 for information on creating a Facepanel Software Disk.
Step 4:
Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to Restore from Floppy and press [Enter].
The configuration loads immediately.
Step 5:
When complete, remove the disk from the floppy drive and restart your
Facepanel for normal operation.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Show Control Overview
In an Emphasis Control System, the Facepanel acts as a translator of the show control
protocol (ETC MIDI, MIDI Show Control, MIDI Notes, SMPTE time code). These protocols
are translated to “EMIDI” and “ESMPTE”. This simply indicates the protocol that has been
translated for network transmission.
You can use EMIDI and ESMPTE ID values to establish “transmission lines” within your
system. In a single Emphasis Control System, with one Facepanel and one Emphasis
Server, the transmission lines are easy to map. In an Emphasis Control System with
multiple Facepanels and Emphasis Servers, you can map from a Facepanel from one
system ID to the Emphasis Server on another system ID.
You can also use the EMIDI and ESMPTE ID values to create broadcast areas within a
multiple Emphasis Control System. For example, to have SMPTE time code input on a
Facepanel with an ESMPTE ID of “21” broadcast to multiple servers, set the ESMPTE
Receive value on those servers to “21” (see SMPTE, page 218). All servers with an
ESMPTE Receive value of “21” will be able to “hear” the incoming SMPTE.
Note:
MIDI In/Out is standard on all Express, Expression/Insight 2x/3/ECS variations.
SMPTE is available as a factory upgrade for Expression/Insight 2x/3/ECS facepanels
only. SMPTE is not supported on Express facepanels.
Verify your Facepanel has the SMPTE upgrade installed before using it with SMPTE time
code.
9
Control Interfaces
209
MIDI Basics
ETC MIDI, MIDI Show Control, and MIDI Time Code may be input on a node (currently the
Facepanel is the only input/output option) for transmission to the Emphasis Server over
ETCNet2.
The MIDI Input Port EMIDI ID (Facepanel) setting maps to the EMIDI Receive (Emphasis
Visualization) setting. You cannot have multiple Facepanels with identical MIDI Input Port
EMIDI ID settings, but you may have multiple Emphasis Servers with identical EMIDI
Receive settings. In this case, you would have a single input source broadcasting a MIDI
signal (ETC MIDI, MIDI Show Control or MIDI Time Code) to multiple Emphasis Servers.
The EMIDI Transmit (Emphasis Visualization) setting maps to the MIDI Output Port EMIDI
ID (Facepanel) setting. You cannot have multiple Emphasis Servers with identical EMIDI
Transmit settings, but you may have multiple Facepanels with identical MIDI Output Port
EMIDI ID settings. In this case, you would have a single transmit source broadcasting the
same information (ETC MIDI, MIDI Show Control or MIDI Time Code) to multiple output
ports.
ETC assumes that MIDI users have a working knowledge of MIDI. This section provides
ETC MIDI interface information, message formats and message definitions. For information
on MIDI wiring, see Connecting MIDI, page 254.
Set the EMIDI ID values on the Facepanel:
Note:
Step 1:
Power up or reboot the Facepanel.
Step 2:
When the prompt appears at startup, press [1][2][3] to enter the configuration
menu.
Step 3:
Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to MIDI and press [Enter].
Step 4:
With “MIDI Input Port EMIDI ID” highlighted, press [Enter].
Step 5:
Using the facepanel numeric keypad, enter the ID number. This may be any
value between 0-255 (“0” will disable MIDI Input). The default value is “1”.
Step 6:
Press [Enter].
Step 7:
Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to “MIDI Output Port EMIDI ID” and press
enter.
Step 8:
Using the facepanel numeric keypad, enter the ID number. This may be any
value between 0-255 (“0” will disable MIDI Output). The default value is “2”.
Step 9:
Press [Enter].
If you make an error while changing any of these settings, and you want to return to the
previously stored values, do not press [S8]. Simply turn the facepanel power off and on
again. The previous settings will be restored.
Step 10: Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the MIDI configuration screen.
Step 11: Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen.
210
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Set the EMIDI Receive and Transmit values in Emphasis Visualization:
Step 1:
In the Emphasis mode Setup menu, click IO.
Step 2:
In the “EMIDI Receive” field, enter the new value. This may be any value
between 0-255 (“0” will disable EMIDI Receive). The default value is “1”.
Step 3:
In the “EMIDI Transmit” field, enter the new value. This may be any value
between 0-255 (“0” will disable EMIDI Transmit). The default value is “1”.
Step 4:
Click OK.
ETC MIDI Message Formats
The following MIDI message formats are used to control the console. All numbers are in
hexadecimal format.
Note off message format
<8n><kk><vv>
•
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note off status
•
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI channel number (0-F)
•
kk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key number (0-7F)
•
vv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note off velocity (0-7F)
Note on message format
<9n><kk><vv>
•
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note on status
•
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI channel number (0-F)
•
kk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key number (0-7F)
•
vv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note on velocity (0-7F) [00=Note off]
Control change message format
<Bn><kk><vv>
9
•
B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control change status
•
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI channel number (0-F)
•
kk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control number (70-92)
•
vv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control value (0-7F)
Control Interfaces
211
Program change message format
<Cn><kk>
•
C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program (patch) change status
•
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI channel number (0-F)
•
kk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program number (0-7F)
Pitch bend message format
<En><ll><mm>
•
E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pitch bend status
•
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI channel number (0-F)
•
ll. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Least significant 7 bits of pitch bend value (0-7F)
•
mm . . . . . . . . . . . . Most significant 7 bits of pitch bend value (0-7F)
MIDI Message definitions
S u b m a s t e r b u m p s w i t c h e x e c ut i o n ( E x p r e s s a n d E x p r e s s i o n )
Submasters 1 - 12
Submasters 13 - 24
C5 - B5
C6 - B6
#60 - #71
#72 - #83
S u b m a s t e r b u m p s w i t c h e x e c ut i o n ( I n s i g h t )
Submasters 1 - 36
Submasters 37- 72
Submasters 73 - 108
Note:
C#0-C3
C#3 - C9
C#6 - C9
#1 - #36
#37 - #72
#73 - #108
C5 = MIDI note #60 or middle C.
Cue execution in AB fader pair
•
Next cue . . . . . . . . Program change 0
•
Cues 1 - 127 . . . . . Program change 1 - 127
•
Cues 128 - 255 . . . Controller change 70, parameters 0 - 127
•
Cues 256 - 383 . . . Controller change 71, parameters 0 - 127
•
Cues 384 - 511 . . . Controller change 72, parameters 0 - 127
•
Cues 512 - 639 . . . Controller change 73, parameters 0 - 127
•
Cues 640 - 767 . . . Controller change 74, parameters 0 - 127
•
Cues 768 - 895 . . . Controller change 75, parameters 0 - 127
•
Cues 896 - 999 . . . Controller change 76, parameters 0 - 103
Cue execution in CD fader pair
212
•
Next cue . . . . . . . . Controller change 77, parameter 0
•
Cues 1 - 127 . . . . . Controller change 77, parameters 1- 127
•
Cues 128 - 255 . . . Controller change 78, parameters 0 - 127
•
Cues 256 - 383 . . . Controller change 79, parameters 0 - 127
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
•
Cues 384 - 511 . . . Controller change 80, parameters 0 - 127
•
Cues 512 - 639 . . . Controller change 81, parameters 0 - 127
•
Cues 640 - 767 . . . Controller change 82, parameters 0 - 127
•
Cues 768 - 895 . . . Controller change 83, parameters 0 - 127
•
Cues 896 - 999 . . . Controller change 84, parameters 0 - 103
Macro execution
•
Macros 1 - 127 . . . Controller change 85, parameters 1 - 127
•
Macros 128 - 255 . Controller change 86, parameters 0 - 127
•
Macros 256 - 383 . Controller change 87, parameters 0 - 127
•
Macros 384 - 511 . Controller change 88, parameters 0 - 127
•
Macros 512 - 639 . Controller change 89, parameters 0 - 127
•
Macros 640 - 767 . Controller change 90, parameters 0 - 127
•
Macros 768 - 895 . Controller change 91, parameters 0 - 127
•
Macros 896 - 999 . Controller change 92, parameters 0 - 103
L e v el c h a n g e w h e e l
9
Wheel “ticks”
Pitch bend value
(hexadecimal)
Message values
(decimal)
0
+1
-1
+8191 (+12.5%)
-8192 (-12.5%)
+655 (+1%)
-655 (-1%)
2000
2001
1FFF
3FFF
0
228F
1D71
ll=0
ll=1
ll=127
ll=127
ll=0
ll=15
ll=113
Control Interfaces
mm=64
mm=64
mm=63
mm=127
mm=0
mm=69
mm=58
213
MIDI Show Control
MIDI Show Control is a specific set of instructions that can be transmitted over a MIDI line
to control lighting systems and other controllers.
MIDI Show Control (MSC) Commands
Emphasis can receive MSC information, send MSC information, or both. You need to set
device IDs for the receiver device and the transmitter device.
Configure device IDs for MIDI Show Control:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [2] [Enter] to select the Options Settings.
Step 2:
Press [2] [Enter] to edit the MSC device IDs.
Step 3:
Using the Facepanel numeric keypad, type the receiver device ID (between #0126) and press [Enter], or press [S1 - Disable MIDI].
Step 4:
Using the Facepanel numeric keypad, type the transmitter device ID (between
#0-126) and press [Enter], or press [S1 - Disable MIDI].
When you enable MSC at your Facepanel, Emphasis will accept the MSC commands listed
below. MSC commands are executed as soon as they are received. In order to accept MSC
commands, the console’s receiver Device ID must match the target device ID for the MIDI
device sending the signals.
Go
Stop
214
•
If no cue number is sent, Go presses [A/B Go] on the
console. The next cue on the cue list runs in the A/B fader.
•
If a cue number is sent, the specified cue runs on the A/B
fader.
•
If a cue number is sent, and 2 is sent as the list entry, that
cue runs on the C/D fader.
•
If cue 0 is sent, and 2 is sent as the list entry, the
command presses [C/D Go]. The pending cue runs in the
C/D fader. You may also press [A/B Go] by sending GoCue 0-1.
•
The Stop command by itself holds all fades in both fader
pairs.
•
If Stop is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 1, only
the cue running in the A/B fader holds.
•
If Stop is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 2, only
the cue running in the C/D fader holds.
•
The cue number field is ignored, but must be included if a
list entry is sent.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Resume
Fire
•
The Resume command by itself resumes all holding
fades in both fader pairs.
•
If Resume is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 1,
only a cue holding in the A/B fader resumes.
•
If Resume is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 2,
only the cue holding in the C/D fader resumes.
•
The cue number field is ignored, but must be included if a
list entry is sent.
•
The Fire command executes a specified macro. Macro
number must be in the range 1-127. If no macro is
specified, or if the macro number is out of range, the
command is ignored.
Emphasis may send the following MSC commands to MIDI devices. If MSC output is
enabled on the console, the console automatically sends the MSC commands. The
console’s transmitter Device ID must match the device ID for the MIDI device receiving the
signals.
[A/B Go]
•
If a cue is pending, the console transmits [A/B Go]
with cue number and a list entry of 1.
•
If a cue is holding, the console transmits [A/B
Resume] with cue number and a list entry of 1.
•
If a cue is pending, the console transmits [C/D Go]
with cue number and a list entry of 2.
•
If a cue is holding, the console transmits
[C/D Resume] with cue number and a list entry of 2.
[A/B Hold]
•
If a cue is running, the console transmits [A/B Stop]
with cue number and a list entry of 1.
[C/D Hold]
•
If a cue is running, the console transmits [C/D Stop]
with cue number and a list entry of 2.
Macros
•
For macros 1-127, the console transmits Fire with
the macro number.
[C/D Go]
MSC Frame Packet
An MSC frame packet consists of several bytes. Byte types, their hexadecimal values and
explanations are given in the table below.
Byte Type
Start Byte
Value
(Hex)
F0
7F
Start of System Exclusive Message
Start of message
Send transmit channel number or 7F = “All Call” for system
wide broadcasts
2
Indicates System Exclusive Message is MIDI Show Control
Send Channel
System
Exclusive
Message
9
Control Interfaces
Explanation
215
“Lighting”
command
format
“GO” general
command
01
Cues numbered 0–9 are represented in an MSC frame as
hexadecimal 30–39. For decimal cues, the point character is
represented by hexadecimal 2E.
Cue number
Delimiter
Faders
Delimiter
Stop Byte
User can send 7F = “All Types”
00
31 or
32
00
F7
Console faders are toggled by changing the Cue List number,
with fader A/B represented by 31 and fader C/D represented
by 32, both hexadecimal.
End of System Exclusive Message
Examples
Cue Number
Delimiter
Faders
Delimiter
30
30
00
00
31
32
00
00
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
31
35
31
33
31
32
39
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
F0 7F 42
F0 7F 42
02
02
01
01
02
02
30
30
00
00
31
32
00
00
F0 7F 42
F0 7F 42
02
02
01
01
02
02
35
35
00
00
31
32
00
00
Stop Byte
“Go” General Command
02
01
(Cue Number, continued)
“Lighting” Command Format
01
01
(Cue Number, continued)
System Exclusive Message
02
02
Start of Message
F0 7F 42
F0 7F 42
Start Byte
Send Channel
In the examples below, MSC frame packets are sent using transmit channel 66 (42
hexadecimal).
GO
Go A/B
Go C/D
31
31
F7
F7
GO CUE
Cue 1 A/B fader
Cue 5.6 A/B fader
Cue 10 A/B fader
Cue 350 A/B fader
Cue 1 C/D fader
Cue 2 C/D fader
Cue 987 C/D fader
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
2E 36
30
35 30
38
37
F7
F7
F7
F7
F7
F7
F7
STOP
Stop A/B
Stop C/D
31
31
F7
F7
STOP CUE
Cue 50 A/B Hold
Cue 50 C/D Hold
216
30
30
F7
F7
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
03
03
35
35
07
07
03
7C
00
00
31
32
00
00
00
00
31
32
00
00
Stop Byte
01
01
Delimiter
Cue Number
02
02
Faders
“Go” General Command
Cue 50 A/B Resume F0 7F 42
Cue 50 C/D Resume F0 7F 42
Delimiter
“Lighting” Command Format
30
30
(Cue Number, continued)
System Exclusive Message
03
03
(Cue Number, continued)
Send Channel
01
01
Start of Message
02
02
Start Byte
F0 7F 42
F0 7F 42
RESUME
Resume A/B
Resume C/D
31
31
F7
F7
RESUME CUE
30
30
F7
F7
FIRE MACRO (Macros are limited to 1 - 127)
Macro 3
Macro 124
9
Control Interfaces
F0 7F 42
F0 7F 42
02
02
01
01
F7
F7
217
SMPTE
SMPTE may be input on a node (currently the Facepanel is the only input option) for
transmission to the Emphasis Server over ETCNet2.
The SMPTE Input Port ESMPTE ID (Facepanel) setting maps to the ESMPTE Receive
(Emphasis Visualization) setting. You cannot have multiple Facepanels with identical
SMPTE Input Port ESMPTE ID settings, but you may have multiple Emphasis Servers with
identical ESMPTE Receive settings. In this case, you would have a single input source
broadcasting SMPTE to multiple Emphasis Servers.
To set the ESMPTE ID value on the Facepanel:
Note:
Step 1:
Power up or reboot the Facepanel.
Step 2:
When the prompt appears at startup, press [1][2][3] to enter the configuration
menu.
Step 3:
Using the down-arrow [v] key, scroll to SMPTE and press [Enter].
Step 4:
With “SMPTE Input Port ESMPTE ID” highlighted, press [Enter].
Step 5:
Using the facepanel numeric keypad, enter the ID number. This may be any
value between 0-255 (“0” will disable SMPTE Input). The default value is “1”.
Step 6:
Press [Enter].
If you make an error while changing any of these settings, and you want to return to the
previously stored values, do not press [S8]. Simply turn the facepanel power off and on
again. The previous settings will be restored.
Step 7:
Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the SMPTE configuration screen.
Step 8:
Press [S8] to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen.
To set the ESMPTE ID value in Emphasis Visualization:
218
Step 1:
In the Emphasis mode Setup menu, click IO.
Step 2:
In the “ESMPTE Receive” field, enter the new value. This may be any value
between 0-255 (“0” will disable ESMPTE Receive). The default value is “1”.
Step 3:
Click OK.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Time Code Program
You can create and run shows that respond to programming based on a standardized time
code protocol. Emphasis responds to both the Society of Motion Picture and Television
Engineers (SMPTE) time code (Expression/Insight only) and to the Musical Instrument
Digital Interface (MIDI) time code.
Emphasis also generates an internal time code in both MIDI and SMPTE protocols. This
internal clock can be used to play back events. You can also have both the external and
internal clocks enabled at the same time. This will ensure that your program will run even
if external signal is lost.
A Time Code Program consist of a series of events that play back at specified times with
reference to the time code clock. A time code program also has a modifiable loop time that
ranges from 5 seconds to 24 hours. There can be as many as 3,000 time code events, with
each event having any combination of cues loaded in faders (one cue for each of the two
faders), a submaster bump button and a macro.
Event times are expressed in hours, minutes and seconds, with each second broken down
into frames. For example, 01:25:30:17 is one hour, twenty-five minutes, thirty seconds and
seventeen frames. Three frame rates are available: 24 fps, 25fps and 30fps (default). Up
to 32 events may be executed in a single frame.
Note:
If more than 32 events are assigned to the same frame, only the first 32 are executed in
that frame, Remaining events are executed in the following frame(s) as needed. In
manual mode, however, only one event is executed when step is pressed, regardless of
how many are assigned.
Change the time code frame rate:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [2] [Enter] to view the Options Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [5] [Enter] to select Time Code Frames per Second.
Step 3:
Press:
•
[1] to set the frame rate to 30 fps.
•
[2] to set the frame rate to 25 fps.
•
[3] to set the frame rate to 24 fps.
The SMPTE and MIDI settings in the Facepanel Configuration menu are reserved for
future use. While you may make changes there, they will have no effect on your system.
Time Code Events Display
You can create a time code program by entering information directly in the Time Code
Events display, or by learning the program as you play it back live. When you learn a
program, each valid event you perform as the clock is running is added to the program with
a time stamp. Once you get all of the required events in the list, you can go back and adjust
timing as necessary to clean up your program using the direct entry method.
9
Control Interfaces
219
Create a time code program using direct entry:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [7] [Enter] to view the Time Code Events display. The display
defaults to event #1.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> to access the editing softkeys.
Step 3:
Press [Enter] to select event #1, or press [S1 - Select Event] [x] [Enter] to
choose another event number [x]. You are moved to the Time column.
The Time column displays the frames-per-second (fps) setting for the system.
Step 4:
Using the Facepanel numeric keypad, enter the time for the event in
hours:minutes:seconds:frames. You do not have to enter leading zeros. For
example, to enter a time of 00:03:45:00, press [3] [4] [5] [0] [0]. The keypad
corner displays your entry as you type. Make sure the correct time is displayed
in the keypad corner before pressing [Enter]. When you press [Enter], you are
moved to the A/B fader pair column.
Step 5:
If required, type the cue number to be played in the A/B fader pair and press
[Enter]. You are moved to the fader Rate column.
Step 6:
If required, type the rate value to be applied to the A/B fader pair for that cue and
press [Enter]. You are moved to the C/D fader pair column.
Step 7:
If required, type the cue number to be played in the C/D fader pair and press
[Enter]. You are moved to the fader Rate column.
Step 8:
If required, type the rate value to be applied to the C/D fader pair for that cue and
press [Enter]. You are moved to the submaster Bump column.
Step 9:
If required, type the number of the submaster bump, and [+] to set the sub bump
on, or [-] to set the sub bump off and press [Enter]. You are moved to the
submaster Rate column.
Step 10: If required, type the rate value to be applied to the submaster and press [Enter].
You are moved to the Macro column.
Step 11: If required, type the number of the macro to execute and press [Enter]. You are
moved to the Label column.
220
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Step 12: If required, using the alphanumeric keyboard, enter the label for this event and
press [Enter].
Step 13: Press the down-arrow key [v] to advance to the next event number. If no event
exists below this one, a new event will be created.
Step 14: Repeat steps 4 through 12 to create more events.
Note:
You can also use the right- and left-arrow ([t] and [s]) keys to move from column to
column, and the down- and up-arrow ([v] and [u]) keys to select other events to edit.
Create a time code program using Learn Mode:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [7] [Enter] to view the Time Code Events display. The display
defaults to event #1.
Step 2:
Press [S6 - Learn Mode] to enable Learn Mode. “TimeCd Learn” flashes in red
in the upper left corner of the screen.
Step 3:
If you are using the internal clock, press [S2 - Clock Enable] to start the clock
running.
Step 4:
Press [Stage] to return to the stage display.
Step 5:
If you are using external time code, start the clock running. Make sure you have
enabled Time Code Input in the Options Settings menu (see Time Code
Program, page 219).
Step 6:
Play back the cues, submaster bump buttons and macros you need to record as
events as you want them to be played back by the time code program. Press
[Record] to record an empty event.
Step 7:
When you are done, press Press [Setup] [7] [Enter] to view the Time Code
Events display. The display should contain events for each cue, submaster bump
and macro you played back.
Step 8:
Press [S6 - Learn Mode] to disable Learn Mode. Use the direct entry method to
edit your recorded events.
R e c o r d i n g a n d e d i t i n g t h e T i m e C o d e P r o gr a m
As you initially create or edit a time code program, events are not automatically recorded
until you sort or exit the Time Code Events display. If time code is enabled and being
received, or the internal clock is running, Emphasis can run events as you edit them. Edits
are held in a buffer until you sort or exit the Time Code Events display, so the event that
runs may not perform your changes. To force the changes to take effect without leaving the
Time Code Events display, press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S8 - Sort].
Note:
You can also press [S6 - Learn Mode] [S6 - Learn Mode] to quickly reset the event
pointer and record your changes.
To edit an existing event, use the direct entry method described above. You can edit events
in ranges using the [And] and [Thru] keys when selecting events.
9
Control Interfaces
221
Move time code events:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [7] [Enter] to view the Time Code Events display.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S3 - Move Event].
Step 3:
Press [x] [Enter] to select event [x]. Use the [And] and [Thru] keys to select
multiple events.
Step 4:
Using the Facepanel numeric keypad, enter the new time for the event in
hours:minutes:seconds:frames. You do not have to enter leading zeros. For
example, to enter a time of 00:03:45:00, press [3] [4] [5] [0] [0]. The keypad
corner displays your entry as you type. Make sure the correct time is displayed
in the keypad corner before pressing [Enter]. The event is moved to the new
time. If multiple events are selected, the first selected event moves to the new
time, and other selected events are moved, maintaining their original relationship
to the first event in time.
To move a single event, you can also use the arrow keys to highlight the code time for
the event you want to move, then press [+] or [-] to adjust the timing.
Copy time code events:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [7] [Enter] to view the Time Code Events display.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S2 - Copy Event].
Step 3:
Press [x] [Enter] to select event [x]. Use the [And] and [Thru] keys to select
multiple events.
Step 4:
Using the Facepanel numeric keypad, enter the new time for the event in
hours:minutes:seconds:frames. You do not have to enter leading zeros. For
example, to enter a time of 00:03:45:00, press [3] [4] [5] [0] [0]. The keypad
corner displays your entry as you type. Make sure the correct time is displayed
in the keypad corner before pressing [Enter]. The event is copied to the new
time. If multiple events are selected, the first selected event copies to the new
time, and other selected events are copied, maintaining their original relationship
to the first event in time.
Insert time code events:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [7] [Enter] to view the Time Code Events display.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S1 - Insert Event].
Step 3:
Press [x] [Enter] to insert event [x].
Step 4:
Press [y] [Enter], where [y] is the number of events you want to insert.
Subsequent events are renumbered following the inserted event(s).
Delete time code events:
222
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [7] [Enter] to view the Time Code Events display.
Step 2:
Press <S7 - More Softkeys> [S6 - Delete Event].
Step 3:
Press [x] [Enter] to select event [x]. Use the [And] and [Thru] keys to select
multiple events.
Step 4:
Press [Enter] to confirm that you want to delete the event(s).
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Reset Loop Time
A Time Code Program typically runs from the first event time to the last event time and then
restarts at the first event time, running events in a continuous loop. Any events in the
program with a time stamp prior to the first event time, or after the last event time are not
played back.
External timecode will have loop times set at the source. It is a good idea to set the internal
loop times to the same settings as the external source, if used. It will take at least 5 seconds
for the internal to synchronize with an external source, and it is possible for events to be
missed while the clocks remain unsynchronized.
Set the loop time:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [7] [Enter] to view the Time Code Events display.
Step 2:
Press [S8 - Reset Loop] to access the first loop time.
Step 3:
Using the Facepanel numeric keypad, enter the first event time in
hours:minutes:seconds:frames. You do not have to enter leading zeros. For
example, to enter a time of 00:03:45:00, press [3] [4] [5] [0] [0]. The keypad
corner displays your entry as you type. Make sure the correct time is displayed
in the keypad corner before pressing [Enter].
Step 4:
Enter the time for the last event time in hours:minutes:seconds:frames and press
[Enter].
The minimum loop time is 5 seconds. If you enter a loop time less that five seconds,
Emphasis will automatically change the last event time to accommodate a five second
loop.
Run a Time Code Program
You can run the time code program using internal time code, external time code, or in
manual mode. When you are running with external time code, the internal clock acts as a
backup to continue the program if the external clock fails.
If you are using time code to play back events, you may want to switch the Cue List in Stage
and Fader to the Time Code List.
Time Code List display
Display the time code list instead of the cue list:
9
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [2] [Enter] to view the Options Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [6] [Enter] to Display Cue/Time Code List.
Step 3:
Press:
Control Interfaces
•
[1] to choose the Time Code List.
•
[0] to choose the Cue List.
223
Using the Internal Time Clock
You can start the internal clock at any time. This is useful for viewing only a portion of your
program, without having to wait for all of the prior events to play back. You can also stop
and start the clock easily from within the Time Code Events display.
Set and activate the internal time clock:
Note:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [7] [Enter] to view the Time Code Events display.
Step 2:
Press [S1 - Internal Clock] to set the internal clock start time.
Step 3:
Using the Facepanel numeric keypad, enter the time in
hours:minutes:seconds:frames. You do not have to enter leading zeros. For
example, to enter a time of 00:03:45:00, press [3] [4] [5] [0] [0]. The keypad
corner displays your entry as you type. Make sure the correct time is displayed
in the keypad corner before pressing [Enter].
You can also use the [+] and [-] keys to adjust timing. Enter zero to start the clock at the
beginning of the time code program.
Step 4:
Press [S2 - Clock Enable] to start the clock running at the time set in step 3. This
softkey will toggle to [S2 - Clock Disable] when the clock is running. You can
view the current clock time in the upper left corner of the screen. The time will
update in the TimeCd field of the screen. Internal time is displayed in red.
Step 5:
Press [S2 - Clock Disable] to stop the internal clock. To start over again, repeat
steps 2 through 4 to reset and start the clock.
Using External Time Code
Sometimes, the timing signal is not present even though the Time Code Input is enabled.
When this happens, Waiting for Input appears in the upper left corner of the Time Code
Events display. As soon as external timecode is received at the Facepanel, the event list
pointer jumps to agree with the frame of the external clock and the current clock time is
displayed in the TimeCd field of the screen. External time is displayed in green.
Because the event list pointer jumps to match the incoming time code, some events in your
list may be skipped. These events will play on the next loop.
To use external time code, you will need to enable time code input in the Options Settings
menu. You can use the internal clock to backup the external clock. If the external signal
fails, the internal clock will take over and continue to play back events. The order in which
you enable external and internal clocks is important, and it will take at least five seconds for
the two clocks to synchronize. During that time, events may be skipped. They will be picked
up on the next pass of the loop.
Use external time code input:
224
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [2] [Enter] to view the Options Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [4] [Enter] to select Time Code Input.
Step 3:
Press:
•
[1] to enable time code input.
•
[0] to disable time code input.
Step 4:
Press [S8 - Return] to return to the Setup display.
Step 5:
Press [7] [Enter] to view the Time Code Events display. If external time code is
running, the time will be displayed in green in the TimeCd field. If external time
code is not yet available, Waiting for Input will be displayed.
Step 6:
Press [S2 - Enable Clock] to enable the internal clock for backup.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Using Manual Playback
The [Manual Mode], [Pause Mode] and [Step] softkeys allow you to manually control
playback of time code events without a time code source enabled. Another feature of
Manual Mode and Pause Mode is that they suspend playback when time code is present.
Use Manual Mode or Pause Mode to edit your events without continued playback of those
events.
Use Manual Mode, Pause Mode and Step:
9
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [7] [Enter] to view the Time Code Events display.
Step 2:
Press:
•
[S3 - Manual Mode] to suspend time code input and reset to the first
recorded time code event.
•
[S4 - Pause Mode] to suspend time code input at the current time code
event.
Step 3:
Press [S5 - Step] to advance through the event list one event at a time.
Step 4:
Press:
Control Interfaces
•
[S3 - Manual Mode] to resume time code input if you are in Manual Mode.
•
[S4 - Pause Mode] to resume time code input if you are in Pause Mode.
225
Emphasi s Serial Button Protocol
Emphasis Serial Button Protocol (SBP) allows you to send commands to your Emphasis
Control System through a serial connection.
Commands
Commands are either quoted strings, strings of digits or keywords with associated
arguments. The argument types are specific to each keyword.
A quoted string will pass each of the characters to Emphasis Console as un-interpreted
characters. This is the same as typing on a keyboard plugged into a Facepanel or the
Emphasis Server keyboard when the Emphasis Console application is visible, or in
Emphasis mode. Because of this you can use some of the Emphasis Console keyboard
shortcuts. For example, c1t5f will be interpreted by Emphasis Console (if you’re not in label
mode) as [Channel] [1] [Thru] [5] [Full]. Serial Button Protocol communicates with
Emphasis Console only, so you cannot use any of the Emphasis Visualization shortcuts
here.
Digits that appear outside of arguments for keywords will be interpreted as pressing the
appropriate numeric keys on the Facepanel.
Individual commands are normally separated by a space, a tab or a semicolon (;). Adjacent
commands only have to be separated if they both are alphabetic (a-z). Commands cannot
span more than one line.
Arguments
Arguments come in three types:
•
Numeric . . . . . . . . . This is a string of digits interpreted as a number. Numeric
arguments can be preceded by “+” or “–”. Negative numbers are
normally only used for wheel movements.
e.g.:-12345
•
Cue Name . . . . . . . This is a string of digits (and possibly a decimal point) interpreted
as a cue name. Only three digits before and one digit after the
decimal point are supported.
e.g.:123.4
•
Level . . . . . . . . . . . This is used for pot, channel and dimmer levels. It is normally a
number between 0 and 100 and is interpreted as a percentage. An
optional “%” can follow the number.
If the number is followed by a “#”, it is interpreted as 0-255. 100,
100% and 255# all mean full.
FL will be recognized as 100%. Case is ignored.
Levels will normally be preceded by the @ symbol but it is not
necessary.
e.g.:100, 100%, 255#, FL, fl . . . . . . . . . . All these mean full.
In the table at the end of this document arguments are indicated as follows:
226
•
# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . numeric
•
Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cue name
•
L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . level
•
@. . . . . . . . . . . . . . at sign before level (This can be left out).
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
For example:
•
# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . one numeric argument
e.g.: bump # . . . . .bump 42
e.g.: ratewheel # . .ratewheel -10
•
Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . one cue name
e.g.: runcue Q . . . .runcue 123.4
•
#@L. . . . . . . . . . . . a number, an @ sign and a level
e.g.: subpot #@L. .subpot 3@75 or subpot 42@255#
This will only work for commands that specifically have a level argument (L) listed in the
keyword table below. For example:
•
Channel 1@50 . . . 50 is simply two key presses not a level argument. Therefore you
cannot use # or %.
•
Capchan 1@50 . . . Here 50 is specifically a level and so the % and # rules apply.
Command Examples
String
Channel; 1; at; full
Channel 1 at full
Ch 1 @ fl
Ch1@fl
St bl st
Stblst
Subpot 5@50
"c1t5frq1"en
Parkchan 1@50
Setdim 5@50
Note:
Action
[Channel] [1] [At] [Full]
same as first example
same as first example
This still works because ch is alphabetic but 1 is not.
[Stage] [Blind] [Stage]
unknown command – These commands must be separated
because they’re alphabetic.
This sets submaster 5’s pot to 50% if virtual pots are active.
[Channel] [1] [Thru] [5] [Full] [Record] [Cue] [1] [Enter]
This parks channel 1 at 50% regardless of what mode you’re in.
This is the same as the SetD command available from the macro
key list.
Note that the accelerator for enter is not an alphabetic character so you can’t put it in
quotes.
Input Stream Echoing
The input stream is echoed after it is processed. This will help in debugging the connection
and the commands being entered. The input string is not echoed until the end of line is
reached (carriage return or line feed). Each input string is echoed as an interpreted string
followed by a carriage return and a line feed. Commands are echoed in their interpreted
form.
Quoted strings are echoed as is with the enclosing quotes.
Independent digits are echoed as is.
The command separator (semicolon) is echoed as is.
Unknown commands are echoed as is, followed by a question mark.
9
Control Interfaces
227
For normal commands, the abbreviation is echoed followed by its arguments (as they were
interpreted) followed by a space. All levels are echoed as full numbers (0-255) rather than
percentages.
For example:
Input
stage "c1t5frq1"en
st ch1th5fl re q1en
subpot 42@50% rq123.4
misspelled command
Echo
st "c1t5frq1"en
st ch 1th 5fl re q 1en
sp 42@128# rq 123.4
misspelled?command?
Things to Keep in Mind...
•
The commands for moving faders will only work if there are no devices with physical
faders connected. This is the same rule explained in Multi-console Submaster Fader
Support, page 16.
•
The ETCLink commands get passed through Emphasis Console to Emphasis
Visualization where they are executed. If Emphasis Visualization is not running and
connected, these will not work.
•
Wheel deltas are not designed to be anything specific. You get what you get.
•
There is very little error checking. If you misspell something the system may get
confused; however, it should not crash.
•
In some cases, the echoed string can be longer than the input string. If the input string
is coming in at full bandwidth, there might not be enough bandwidth for the echoed
stream.
•
Make sure you understand when you can and can’t use % and # for levels.
The Keyword Table
In most cases there are two forms of each keyword. One is spelled out for readability and
the other is a short abbreviation. Either form can be used. Case is ignored. No space is
required between a keyword and its arguments.
Keyword
228
Abbreviation Arguments
stage
blind
fader
tracksheet
st
bl
fr
ts
patch
pa
park
pk
setup
expand
macrostar
macrowait
macroenter
su
xp
ms
mw
me
Example
Comments
st
bl
This does not patch
anything, it just hits
the patch button.
This does not park
anything, it just hits
the park button.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Keyword
9
Abbreviation Arguments
swap
about
learn
help
leftarrow
uparrow
downarrow
rightarrow
sw
ab
lr
he
la
ua
da
ra
softkey
sk
page
type
cue
loadsub
only
submaster
link
part
group
follow
label
time
wait
track
record
pg
tp
q
ls
ol
sb
ln
pt
gr
fw
lb
tm
wt
tr
re
channel
dimmer
thru
ch
dm
th
at
@
and
full
except
level
release
focuspoint
&
fl
xc
lv
rl
fp
clear
decimal
enter
cl
.
en
Control Interfaces
#
Example
sk3 or sk 3
Comments
There is no way to
hold a key down.
Note that @ can be
used to press the AT
key or as part of an
argument for
another command.
229
Keyword
230
Abbreviation Arguments
Example
minus
plus
+
abgo
abhold
abback
abrate
abclear
ag
aho
abk
art
acl
cdgo
cdhold
cdback
cdrate
cdclear
cg
cho
cbk
crt
ccl
submode
subsolo
blackout
sm
ss
bo
bump
bm
#
bump 42
bumpon
bn
#
bumpon 108
bumpoff
bf
#
bumpoff 3
forcesub
fs
#
forcesuball
fsa
fadeoutsubr
fo
fadeoutallsubr
foa
subpot
sp
#@L
sp3@50
fadera
faderb
faderc
fa
fb
fc
@L
@L
@L
fa @100
fb @255#
faderd
fd
@L
fd 25
#
Comments
This presses and
releases the bump
button.
This is the same as
the On Sub-Bump
command in macros.
This is the same as
the Off Sub-Bump
command in macros.
This is the same as
the Force Sub Load
command in macros.
This is the same as
the Force Sub-All
command in macros.
Fade out one
submaster
subroutine.
Fade out all
submaster
subroutines.
This sets the sub pot
3 to 50%.
This is the A fader.
This is the B fader.
This is the C fader.
This is the D fader.
The ''@” is optional.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Keyword
9
Abbreviation Arguments
Example
grandmaster
ratewheel
levelwheel
gm
rw
lw
@L
#
#
rw +10
lw –10
encoder
en
#@#
en 3@-5
encpage
ep
#
ep 3
macro
m
#
m1234
quemacro
qm
#
qm 5
runcue
rq
Q
rq 999.9
runcueab
rqa
Q
runcuecd
rqc
Q
blockcue
bq
Q
blockcueab
bqa
Q
blockcuecd
bqc
Q
capchan
cc
#@L
cc 5@50
relchan
rc
#
rc 5
parkchan
pc
#@L
parkdim
pd
#@L
unparkchan
uc
#
unparkdim
ud
#
update
up
Control Interfaces
Comments
The “+” is optional.
These are the ML
encoder wheels.
Encoder page 3.
This runs macro
1234 immediately,
stopping the current
macro and flushing
the macro queue.
This adds macro 5 to
the macro queue.
This runs cue 999.9
in the AB fader.
This is the same as
rq. It’s just here for
symmetry.
This runs a cue on
the CD fader.
This runs the cue on
the AB fader as a
blocking cue.
This is the same as
bq. It’s just here for
symmetry.
This runs the cue on
the CD fader as a
blocking cue.
This captures
channel 5 at 50%.
This releases
channel 5.
This parks a channel
at a level.
This parks a dimmer
at a level.
This unparks a
channel.
This unparks a
dimmer.
Only works in stage
and fader.
231
Keyword
232
Abbreviation Arguments
fixture
fx
timecodeenable
tce
timecodedisable
tcd
backoverride
bgo
Example
This is the Fixture
softkey.
Enable the time
code internal clock.
Disable the time
code internal clock.
Background override
(cue, operation)
Q#
playbackup
pb
#
recbackup
rb
#
setdim
sd
#@L
unsetdim
usd
#
Comments
pb 5
(ETCLink) This plays
backup look 5. To
stop the current
backup look, play
backup look 0.
(ETCLink) This
records backup
looks.
(ETCLink) This sets
a dimmer.
(ETCLink) This
unsets a dimmer.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Appendix A
System Defaults
The defaults listed in this section refer to the factory settings of the Emphasis Visualization
and Console software applications. While it is not necessary for these settings to remain at
their default values, you may want to return to these settings if your system performance
changes unfavorably.
This appendix contains the following sections:
A
•
Emphasis Visualization and Console Defaults . . . . . . . . . .234
•
Expression Facepanel Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
•
Express Facepanel Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
System Defaults
233
Emphasi s Visualization and Consol e Defaults
The following can be set from either Emphasis Visualization or Emphasis Console. In
Emphasis Visualization, these are set in the Emphasis mode Setup menu. In Emphasis
Console, these are found in the main window Options menu.
View the Emphasis Console Main window
Step 1:
Minimize Emphasis Visualization.
Step 2:
Move the mouse to the bottom of the screen so the Windows task bar appears.
Step 3:
Maximize Emphasis Console in the task bar.
Facepanel Type
•
Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked
Imagine 3 with ML Module
Focus with ML Module
Imagine 3
Focus
Note:
To change the Facepanel type, click the button for the type you have and click OK. You
must exit and restart Emphasis for the change to take effect.
Diagnostics
•
Generate Event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked
•
Flush Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked
•
EDMX Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
IO
234
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
•
ESMPTE Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
•
EMIDI Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
•
EMIDI Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
•
Remote Trigger ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CAUTION:
In Emphasis Control Systems with multiple Servers, the EMIDI Transmit setting
cannot be the same on all Servers. It is illegal to have two MIDI sources at the same
ID in a single system. Set the unused Servers to another value to avoid this conflict.
ASCII Options
A
•
Delimiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard
•
Level Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hex
•
Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mixed Case
System Defaults
235
Emphasi s Visualization Defaults
Application Options
File Options T a b
Auto Save Options
•
Auto Recover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unchecked
•
Auto Recover Save Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 min.
•
Keep Back Up Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unchecked
Document Loading
•
Reload last document on startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked
•
Default to Read Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unchecked
Emphasis/Obsession Tab
Note:
236
•
System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Connect to Current Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unchecked
•
Show EDMX from Current Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked
SYS ID changes must be made in the System Manager login, and in BOTH applications.
If needed, change the System ID in Emphasis Console first, then Emphasis Visualization,
then reboot your system.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Emphasi s Console Defaults
The following are set in Emphasis Console only. These settings are found in the main
window Options menu.
View the Emphasis Console Main window
Step 1:
Minimize Emphasis Visualization.
Step 2:
Move the mouse to the bottom of the screen so the Windows task bar appears.
Step 3:
Maximize Emphasis Console in the task bar.
Language
•
English
System ID
Note:
A
•
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
System Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Untitled Emphasis Console
SYS ID changes must be made in the System Manager login, and in BOTH applications.
If needed, change the System ID in Emphasis Console first, then Emphasis Visualization,
then reboot your system.
System Defaults
237
Expression Facepanel Defaults
ETCNet2
•
Emphasis Server System ID A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Emphasis Server System ID B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . undefined
•
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.101.45.101
•
Gateway Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.101.45.101
•
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.255.0.0
•
Display Processor List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabled
•
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defaults to console type
•
Use Configured IP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabled
DMX
•
DMX Output Port Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Max
•
DMX Output Port 1 Start Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
•
DMX Output Port 1 Channel Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
•
DMX Output Port 2 Start Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
•
DMX Output Port 2 Channel Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
•
DMX Output Port 3 Start Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
•
DMX Output Port 3 Channel Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
•
DMX Output Port 4 Start Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
•
DMX Output Port 4 Channel Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
•
DMX Input Port Start Channel Start Number . . . . . 10001
•
DMX Input Port Channel Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
•
DMX Input Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabled
•
DMX Input Port Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
MIDI
•
MIDI Input Port EMIDI ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
•
MIDI Output Port EMIDI ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CAUTION:
238
In Emphasis Control Systems with multiple Facepanels, the MIDI Input Port EMIDI
ID cannot be the same on all Facepanels. It is illegal to have multiple MIDI sources
at the same ID in a single system. Set the unused Input port(s) to another value to
avoid this conflict.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
SMPTE
•
SMPTE Input Port ESMPTE ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
•
SMPTE Input Port Frames per Second. . . . . . . . . . 30
•
SMPTE Start-of-Loop (HH:MM:SS:FF) . . . . . . . . . . (0:0:0:0)
•
SMPTE End-of-Loop (HH:MM:SS:FF) . . . . . . . . . . (23:59:59:29)
CAUTION:
In Emphasis Control Systems with multiple Facepanels, the SMPTE Input Port
ESMPTE ID cannot be the same on all Facepanels. It is illegal to have multiple
SMPTE sources at the same ID in a single system. Set the unused Input port(s) to
another value to avoid this conflict.
Remote Macro
•
Remote Macro 1 System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Remote Macro 1 Macro ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901
•
Remote Macro 2 System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Remote Macro 2 Macro ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1902
•
Remote Macro 3 System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Remote Macro 3 Macro ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1903
•
Remote Macro 4 System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Remote Macro 4 Macro ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1904
•
Remote Macro 5 System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Remote Macro 5 Macro ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1905
•
Remote Macro 6 System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Remote Macro 6 Macro ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1906
•
Remote Macro 7 System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Remote Macro 7 Macro ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1907
•
Remote Macro 8 System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Remote Macro 8 Macro ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1908
Language
•
A
System Defaults
English
239
Express Facepanel Defaults
ETCNet2
•
Emphasis RPU System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.101.45.101
•
Gateway Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.101.45.101
•
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.255.0.0
•
Display Processor List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabled
•
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defaults to console type
•
Use Configured IP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabled
DMX
•
DMX Output Port Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Max
•
DMX Output Port 1 Start Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
•
DMX Output Port 1 Channel Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
•
DMX Output Port 2 Start Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
•
DMX Output Port 2 Channel Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
MIDI
•
MIDI Input Port EMIDI ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
•
MIDI Output Port EMIDI ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CAUTION:
In Emphasis Control Systems with multiple Facepanels, the MIDI Input Port EMIDI
ID cannot be the same on all Facepanels. It is illegal to have multiple MIDI sources
at the same ID in a single system. Set the unused Input port(s) to another value to
avoid this conflict.
Remote Macros
•
Remote Macro 1 System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Remote Macro 1 Macro ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901
•
Remote Macro 2 System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Remote Macro 2 Macro ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1902
•
Remote Macro 3 System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Remote Macro 3 Macro ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1903
•
Remote Macro 4 System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Remote Macro 4 Macro ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1904
•
Trigger Out System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
•
Trigger Out Trigger ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Language
•
240
English
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Appendix B
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
With proper care, your Emphasis Control System should require minimal maintenance.
Occasionally, you may need to replace fuses in your facepanel.
In all cases, unless otherwise noted, references to Expression and Insight facepanels
includes Expression/Concept/Insight 2x, Expression/Insight 3, Imagine 3 and Focus, and
Expression/Insight ECS facepanels. Also, references to Express facepanels includes
Express 24/48, Express 48/96, Express 72/144, Express 125/250 and Express ECS
facepanels.
This appendix contains the following sections:
•
Return the Facepanel to v3.1 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
•
Open the Facepanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
•
Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
•
Connecting desk lights (Express facepanels only). . . . . . 247
•
Expression and Insight DIP switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
•
VGA monitor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
•
Connecting DMX cable to facepanel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
•
Using an optional pointing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
•
Connecting an alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
•
Installing Remote Focus Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
•
Connecting MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
•
Connecting SMPTE (Expression and Insight only) . . . . . . 256
•
Using Remote Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
241
Return the Facepanel to v3.1 Operation
This section describes the procedure for reverting to software v3.1 on the Facepanel. To
use your Emphasis show on an Express, Expression or Insight console running software
v3.1, you will need to export your show as an Express, Expression or Insight show file.
CAUTION:
Expression v3.1software is not ETCNet2 compatible. If your system uses ETCNet2
DMX Nodes for data distribution over the network, you should contact ETC
Technical Services prior to changing your system software. See Help from ETC
Technical Services, page 3.
Export your Show File to “.shw” Format
Shows created in Emphasis can be converted to v3.1 format for some backward
compatibility, though there are some restrictions.
•
The file name can only be read by Express/ion v3.1 if it is named “exp2.shw”. No other
file names are valid.
•
The channels and dimmers above the maximum count for the console will be lost.
Before saving the v3.1 show file, reduce the channel and dimmer counts to fit your
destination console.
•
Cue, group, focus point and subs above the maximum for v3.1 software will be lost.
•
Subs-on-subs, some subroutine steps and Supermasters will be lost.
•
Patch and cue data will be available for moving lights, but there will be no personalities.
•
If you require the ability to edit a moving light, use default personalities or create
personalities with Expression Personality Editor to match the channels of the unit.
Patch in the same location.
Exporting a show file to v3.1 compatibility gives you another level of backup. If you routinely
make a floppy disk of the show in this format, and your primary, essential lighting has
control numbers and patch within the restrictions of the console as listed below, your
Emphasis Facepanel can be backed down to be an Express/ion v3 console by loading v3.1
code. It can then operate without the Emphasis Server, within the restrictions listed above.
Express, Expression and Insight consoles will revert to their standard maximum channel
counts:
Console Type
242
Max
Channels
Console Type
Max Channels
Express 24/48
96
Expression 2x
800
Express 48/96
192
Expression 3
400, 800, 1200
Express 72/144
240
Expression ECS
400
Express 125
125
Insight 2x
512
Express 250
250
Insight 3
512
Express ECS
125
Insight ECS
512
All Express
1024 Dimmers All Expression/Insight
1536 Dimmers
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
They will also revert to their standard maximum show capacities.
•
600 cues
•
99 focus points
•
500 groups
•
50 steps per macro
To export from the current show file:
Note:
Step 1:
With the show file open, in the File menu, click Export File. The ‘Save show to
file‘ window will open.
Step 2:
Use the ‘Save in’ box to find the destination for the exported file. You may want
to keep copies of this file on the Emphasis Server, however, to be useful, this
show file must be saved to a 3.5” HD floppy disk.
Step 3:
Type “exp2” in the ‘File name’ box.
The file name can only be read by Express/ion v3.1 if it is named “exp2.shw”. No other
file names are valid.
Step 4:
Select “Expression 2/3 Show File (*.shw)” in the File Type box.
Step 5:
Click the Save button to export your data.
Create a v3.1 Console Software Disk
It is recommended that you keep a v3.1 Console Software Disk with your Emphasis
software disks in case you need to revert to v3.1 operation. If you do not already have a
v3.1 Console Software Disk available, you can create one using a utility provided on the
Emphasis Server.
To create and install a v3.1 Console Software Disk:
Step 1:
Exit Emphasis.
Step 2:
Insert a 3.5” HD floppy disk into the floppy drive on the Emphasis Server.
Step 3:
Logon as System Manager.
CAUTION:
Modification to hardware or software components or settings may affect the
stability of the Emphasis Control System. Consult ETC Technical Services before
making any changes. Non-authorized changes resulting in instability may require
reloading the operating system, which will restore defaults, remove any changes,
and may result in a loss of existing show files.
Step 4:
Click OK to clear the warning screen.
Step 5:
Open the Facepanel Software folder located on the desktop.
Step 6:
Double-click the appropriate software file.
•
Expression.exe - Expression and Insight console v3.1 software.
•
Express.exe - Express console v3.1 software.
•
ExpressionRI.exe - Expression and Insight Remote Interface (ETCNet)
software. For use with RIU, RVI and ETCNet2 Nodes in a v3.1 system.
•
ExpressRI.exe - Express Remote Interface (ETCNet) software. For use with
RIU, RVI and ETCNet2 Nodes in a v3.1 system.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
243
Step 7:
Click Unzip to extract the software onto the floppy disk.
Step 8:
Click OK when completed.
Step 9:
Close the WinZip window and the Facepanel Software window.
Step 10: Eject the floppy disk from the Emphasis Server.
Install v3.1 Console Software
When the console is turned on with the v3.1 Console Software Disk inserted in the
Facepanel disk drive, the software loads immediately.
Install v3.1 software:
Note:
Step 1:
Turn the facepanel off.
Step 2:
Insert the v3.1 Facepanel Console Disk into your facepanel’s diskette drive.
Step 3:
Turn the facepanel back on. The console displays the boot screen and
automatically installs the software. This process takes approximately one
minute. The console displays the following messages as the installation
progresses: Loading, Erasing Flash, Writing Flash. Wait until the Stage
display appears.
Step 4:
Press [Setup] to confirm that the new software has been successfully installed.
The current software version (Express/ion 3 Version 3.1) is displayed in the lower
right corner of the display.
Step 5:
Remove the diskette from the disk drive and store.
When reverting to v3.1 software, some hard keys on your facepanel will change, which
may cause the key cap to be incorrect. This will be different depending on your facepanel
and when it was purchased. See below to find what key functions change when v3.1
software is installed on your specific facepanel:
Express Facepanel - the Emphasis [Fixture] hard key reverts to a [Dimmer] hard key.
Expression / Insight Facepanel - the Emphasis [Fixture] hard key reverts to a [Dimmer]
hard key. The [Spreadsheet] hard key reverts to a [Tracksheet] hard key.
To reduce user error, any changes to your hard keys should be labeled clearly when
installing v3.1 software and using your facepanel as a stand-alone console.
244
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Open the Facepanel
If you have an Expression or Insight facepanel, you may find it necessary to open the
facepanel. For Expression 3, Insight 3 and Expression/Insight ECS facepanels, a spare
parts kit is stored inside and can be retrieved by opening the facepanel.
CAUTION:
Do not open Express facepanels. If you have problems with an Express facepanel
beyond changing the External 12V fuse, please contact your dealer or ETC
Technical Service for help.
Open the Expression/Insight face panel:
Step 1:
Turn off the Facepanel and disconnect the AC input cable.
Step 2:
Loosen the knobs at the lower left and right corners of the top panel.
Step 3:
Raise the top panel and hold or prop it in upright position. Be aware that
Expression 2x and Insight 2x facepanels may not have the integral locking
mechanism to hold the top panel open.
Spare parts kit
The spare parts kit inside Expression ECS and Insight ECS facepanels contains the
following:
•
Expression/Insight ECS Facepanel Software disk
•
Expression/Insight v3.1 Console Software disk
•
Remote Units v3.1 Software disk
•
Key for A/B switch
•
Two 6.3A fuses (AC Input)
•
One 2.5A fuse (RFU)
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
245
Replaci ng fuses
Expression and Insight facepanels have three fuses. Two are for AC input power and the
third is for the interface used by optional RFU and remote I/O devices. If the facepanel or
remote devices connected to it fail, first verify that power is available at the AC service outlet
and that all cables are properly connected and undamaged.
Express facepanels only have an External 12 Vdc fuse. This fuse is for the desk lights, the
RFU and any remote macro controller attached to the facepanel.
Always replace fuses with the same type of fuse. The AC Input fuses are type T6.3A. The
fuse protecting the RFU/Remote I/O circuits is type F1.6A (Express) or T2.5A (Expression/
Insight). Both types are slow action, 250V fuses. Replacement fuses of both types are
provided in the facepanel’s Spare Parts Kit, which is located beneath the face panel.
Replace AC Input fuses (Expression/Insight only):
Note:
These fuses are contained in a swiveling tray located between the power switch and the
power cord connector.
Step 1:
Turn off the facepanel and disconnect the AC input cable.
Step 2:
Pull the fuse tray out of its holder by pulling the small tab at the bottom of the tray
cover using a small tool, like a small flathead screwdriver or a small paperclip.
The tray remains connected to the tray holder but rotates downward for
convenience. Operate the tray carefully to avoid damage.
Step 3:
Examine both fuses. Telltale signs of a blown fuse include discoloration or
deposits on the glass envelope and/or a visibly broken fuse strip.
Step 4:
If you find a blown fuse, replace it with the fuse of the same type and size from
the facepanel’s Spare Parts Kit. To retrieve the Spare Parts Kit, see Open the
Facepanel, page 245.
Step 5:
With good fuses installed, rotate the tray up and inward until it is again flush with
the panel.
Step 6:
Replace the power cord and check the facepanel for proper operation. If still
having problems, see Help from ETC Technical Services, page 3.
Replace the External 12V / RFU / Remote I/O fuse:
Note:
246
This fuse is located in a pop-out receptacle located next to the RFU port on the
facepanel’s rear panel.
Step 1:
Turn off the facepanel and disconnect the AC input cable.
Step 2:
Remove the cover of the fuse receptacle with a flat blade screwdriver.
Step 3:
Remove and examine the fuse. Telltale signs of a blown fuse include
discoloration or deposits on the glass envelope and/or a visibly broken fuse strip.
Step 4:
If you find a blown fuse on an Expression or Insight facepanel, replace it with the
fuse of the same size and type from the facepanel’s Spare Parts Kit. To retrieve
the Spare Parts Kit, see Open the Facepanel, page 245. If you have an Express
facepanel, make sure you use the same type of replacement fuse.
Step 5:
With a good fuse installed, reinsert the fuse into the rear panel holder and secure
with the screwdriver.
Step 6:
Verify that the external device works properly. If still having problems, see Help
from ETC Technical Services, page 3.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Connecting desk l ights (Express facepanels only)
Plug the two Littlites into the connectors at the top rear of the facepanel. Bend the
gooseneck of each to suit your needs.
CAUTION:
Use of any other brand but Littlites is not recommended by ETC. Unexpected
results may occur.
Pinout for Littlites XLR 3-pin female
1
2
3
Push
2
1
3
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Chassis ground
Dimming leg
+ 12 Vdc
Connect the lamp between
pins 2 and 3.
247
Expression and Insight DIP switches
All facepanels check DIP switch settings when the system is turned on. You must restart
the facepanel whenever you change DIP switch settings for those new settings to take
effect.
Expression/Insight 3 and ECS, and later models of Expression 2x, Concept 2x and Insight
2x (those without a key type power switch on the face panel), have recessed DIP switches
located near the middle of the rear panel (see Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel
Connections, page 294). You may toggle these switches up or down without opening the
facepanel.
CAUTION:
The DIP switch settings are vital for the operation of your Expression-style
facepanel in an Emphasis Control System.
Twisted Pair Polarity
5
6
1
2 3 4
5
6
Network &
Tracking Mode
5
LEDs
6 7 8
S2
2 3 4
Switch Up (Off)
S1
2 3 4
1
ThinNet / Twisted Pair
S4
1
Switch Down (On)
Main Processor
Correct External Switch Settings
(No keyswitch for power)
Internal Switch Locations
(Power Keyswitch Facepanels)
Internal DIP Switches
Earlier Expression 2x, Concept 2x and Insight 2x facepanels (those with a key type power
switch) have DIP switches located on the main processor board. To access to these internal
DIP switches, you will need to open the facepanel (see Open the Facepanel, page 245).
For operation in an Emphasis Control System, set the DIP switches as noted below.
Switches S1 and S2
Since your Emphasis Server and Facepanel must connect through an Ethernet hub or
switch, you must use the RJ45 Twisted Pair connector on the Facepanel. To activate this
connector, set all the S1 switches to ON or CLOSED and all the S2 switches to OFF or
OPEN.
Sw itches S4
These switches determine a number of settings for Expression v3.1 operation. They are
labeled with OPEN or OFF and CLOSED or ON. For Emphasis operation, ensure that the
S4 switches are set as follows.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OPEN CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED (ON), if SMPTE OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN
(OFF)
(ON)
(ON)
option installed
(OFF) (OFF) (OFF) (OFF)
248
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
VGA monitor connections
VGA Monitor connector pinout (HD-DB15 female)
5
1
6
10
15
Note:
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Red video
Green video
Blue video
Ground
Ground
Red ground
Green ground
Blue ground
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
not connected
Ground
Ground
not connected
Horizontal (H/V) sync
Vertical sync
not connected
In some installations you may need additional grounding. An additional grounding
location is provided on the rear of the facepanel for this purpose. This facepanel is not
certified for use in wet locations.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
249
Connecting DMX cabl e to facepanel
These instructions explain how to connect DMX512 outputs and provide DMX512
connector pinout specifications. The facepanel provides DMX512 output ports that can be
configured in the Facepanel Configuration screen (see DMX Output, page 204).
Connect DMX cable to the facepanel:
Step 1:
CAUTION:
Step 2:
Verify that your cable connector pinout matches the pinout listed below. If your
pinout does not match, contact your dealer or ETC.
Your dimmer control common must be compatible with facepanel control common;
they must either be the same level, or the dimmer control common must float.
Verify compatibility with your dealer if you are not sure.
Connect DMX512 cables to DMX512 output connectors on the facepanel rear
panel (see Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel Connections, page 294).
DMX512 pinout for five-pin XLR female
Push
5
1
4
1
2
3
4
5
Common
Data (–)
Data (+)
not connected
not connected
2
3
250
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Using an optional pointing device
Expression and Insight 3 and ECS facepanels have a dedicated port to which a serial
pointing device such as a mouse, trackball or trackpad can be connected. The device must
be Microsoft-compatible. This pointing device is used specifically for controlling pan and tilt
of moving light fixtures and cannot be used to access screens on the Emphasis Server.
Installation
Switch off the power to the facepanel. Connect the pointing device to the RS 232 Mouse
connector at the left side of the facepanel rear panel (see Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel
Connections, page 294).
Device check
The pointing device should be ready for use when the system has completed boot-up.
Verify normal operation by patching fixtures as explained in the Emphasis Visualization
User Manual. Movement of the pointing device should control pan and tilt levels; its buttons
should reselect fixtures in the Fixture Box window.
If the device doesn’t function as described above:
Step 1:
Verify that the pointing device is Microsoft compatible.
Step 2:
Verify that the pointing device works normally in another system, such as with a
computer.
Step 3:
If you still have a problem after making the verifications, see Help from ETC
Technical Services, page 3.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
251
Connecting an alphanumeric keyboard
Expression and Insight facepanels and ETCNet2 Video Nodes can support an optional
alphanumeric keyboard. Use the optional keyboard to assign labels to many features of
your shows, such as to name the show and the cues, submasters, groups, timed events
and programs within it. You cannot use the keyboard attached to the facepanel to access
Emphasis Server functions.
You can supply your own keyboard or order one from ETC. If you supply your own, it must
be an AT compatible type, or can be switched to an AT-compatible mode. ETC
recommends the Cherry G80-1800 and Keytronic 101 keyboards. Although you may use
keyboards from other manufacturers, ETC does not guarantee compatibility.
CAUTION:
Do not connect or disconnect an alphanumeric keyboard while your system is
turned on. Doing so may cause the keyboard to initialize improperly.
Install an alphanumeric keyboard:
Step 1:
On the keyboard, ensure the selector switch is set to the AT position, if
applicable.
Step 2:
Insert the keyboard cable into the connector labeled Keyboard on the facepanel
or remote interface unit.
Keyboard pinout for DIN 5-pin female
3
252
524
1
1
2
3
4
5
Clock
Data
Reset
Ground
+5 Vdc
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Installing Remote Focus Unit
A Remote Focus Unit (RFU) is used to select channels, set levels, record and playback
cues and playback macros. An RFU can be connected to the back of your Facepanel, or to
a Video Node or RFU-Enabled DMX Node, or to dedicated RFU connectors that may be
distributed throughout your venue.
Install the RFU:
Step 1:
Verify that RFU power switch is turned Off. (Unit is off when switch is in the
position toward the bottom edge of the RFU.)
Step 2:
Insert the RFU cable into the connector on the back of the facepanel labeled
RFU. RFUs may also be connected to ETCNet2 Nodes.
Step 3:
Turn RFU power switch to On.
RFU pinout for XLR 6-pin female
Push
6
5
1
4
2
3
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1
2
3
4
5
6
Data (+) (to RFU)
Data (–)
Data (+) (from RFU)
Data (–)
Common (AC ground)
+12 Vdc (fused, 2 amp)
253
Connecting MIDI
Connect the facepanel to any MIDI equipment using a standard MIDI cable.
On the rear panel, there are three round, 5-pin, DIN-type connectors labeled MIDI In, MIDI
Out, and Keyboard (Expression/Insight only) or MIDI Thru (Express only). Turn facepanel
power off, then connect the cable from the MIDI Out of the electronic instrument or
sequencer to the MIDI In on the facepanel. Connect the cable from the MIDI In on the
instrument or sequencer to the connector labeled MIDI Out.
CAUTION:
On Expression/Insight facepanels, do not plug the MIDI cable into the connector
labeled Keyboard. This connector is for use with an optional alphanumeric
keyboard and may damage MIDI equipment.
If needed, you can set the MIDI Out connector on an Expression or Insight facepanel as a
MIDI Thru port (see MIDI Out/Thru jumper setting, page 254).
Connect MIDI equipment to the facepanel:
Step 1:
Turn facepanel power off.
Step 2:
Insert standard MIDI cable into the connector on the back of the facepanel
labeled MIDI In. Do not insert MIDI cable into the connector labeled Keyboard.
Step 3:
If you are sending MIDI commands from the facepanel, insert another standard
MIDI cable into the connector on the back of the facepanel labeled MIDI Out.
M I D I p i n o u t f o r D I N 5- p i n f e m a l e
3
524
1
2
3
4
5
1
not connected
Ground
not connected
MIDI +
MIDI –
M I D I O ut / T h r u j u m pe r s e t t i n g
A jumper is a small plastic connector used to join a pair of pins sticking out of a printed
circuit board. The jumper is installed when it covers both pins. It is not installed when it
covers one or none of the pins.
Jumper not
installed
254
Jumper
installed
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Set Expression/Insight MIDI Out connector to MIDI Thru:
Note:
Step 1:
Turn off the facepanel.
Step 2:
Open the facepanel (see Open the Facepanel, page 245).
Step 3:
Locate the jumper at location J5 (J8 for Insight 2x) on the circuit board in the lid
of the facepanel. With the lid in an upright position, the jumper should be near the
lower right corner of the circuit board. It may be under a ribbon cable. If so,
disconnect the ribbon cable to access the jumper.
This ribbon cable connects the facepanel circuit board to the main CPU.
Step 4:
The jumper at location J5 (J8 for Insight 2x) should be installed on the pair of pins
labeled 1A for MIDI Out to be active. To use the MIDI Out connector as a MIDI
Thru connector, move the jumper to the pins labeled 2 (B for Insight 2x).
Step 5:
If you disconnected a ribbon cable to access the jumper, reconnect it before
closing the facepanel.
Step 6:
Close the facepanel and test for proper operation.
On older Expression/Concept/Insight 2x facepanels with keyswitch power switches, the
jumper locations are slightly different.
Set older Expression/Concept/Insight 2x MIDI Out connector to MIDI Thru:
Step 1:
Note:
Locate the jumper at location J207 on the circuit board in the lid of the facepanel.
With the lid in an upright position, the jumper should be near the lower right
corner of the circuit board, just below the level wheel. It may be under a ribbon
cable. If so, disconnect the ribbon cable to access the jumper.
This ribbon cable connects the facepanel circuit board to the main CPU.
Step 2:
The jumper at location J207 should be installed on the pair of pins labeled 1 for
MIDI Out to be active. To use the MIDI Out connector as a MIDI Thru connector,
move the jumper to the pins labeled 2.
Step 3:
If you disconnected a ribbon cable to access the jumper, reconnect it before
closing the facepanel.
Step 4:
Close the facepanel and test for proper operation.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
255
Connecting SMPTE (Expression and Insight only)
In order to use SMPTE equipment with Expression and Insight facepanels, the SMPTE
option must have been installed at the factory. Connect the facepanel to SMPTE equipment
using an appropriate SMPTE cable.
Connect SMPTE equipment to the facepanel:
Step 1:
Turn facepanel power off.
Step 2:
Insert SMPTE cable into the connector on the back of the facepanel labeled
SMPTE.
Step 3:
Power up facepanel.
SMPTE facepanel connector
B a l a n c e d S M PTE p i n o u t f o r t h r e e - p i n X L R
female
1
2
3
Push
2
Common
Signal +
Signal –
1
3
Note:
256
This pinout is for balanced input. For unbalanced input, make the following connections
in the input cable: Connect XLR pin 1 and pin 2 together, tying Common to Signal +. The
unbalanced signal connects to XLR pin 3, Signal –.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Using Remote Macros
The facepanel provides remote macro inputs through the connector on the back panel
labeled Remote Macro (Remote Go on older Expression-style facepanels). A user-supplied
remote device connects to the facepanel via a 24 AWG, aluminum-shielded, multiconductor cable with one twisted pair designated for each switch (Belden 9507 S-R PCV
Insulated or Alpha 5477 80 Deg. C 300 V PVC). The cable connector at the remote device
will vary depending on the device itself.
Expression/Insight
(DB-25 female)
Connector Face
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E T C N e t 2 Vi d e o N o d e
(DB-25 female)
1
13
25
– Macro 1,901
– Macro 1,902
– Macro 1,903
– Macro 1,904
– Macro 1,905
– Macro 1,906
– Macro 1,907
– Macro 1,908
Not Connected
10
Ground
11
+ 12 Vdc
12
Not Connected
13
Not Connected
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
+ Macro 1,901
+ Macro 1,902
+ Macro 1,903
+ Macro 1,904
+ Macro 1,905
+ Macro 1,906
+ Macro 1,907
+ Macro 1,908
Not Connected
Ground
+ 12 Vdc
25
Not Connected
14
Express (DB-15 female)
1
8
15
9
– Macro 1,901
– Macro 1,902
– Macro 1,903
– Macro 1,904
– Macro 1,905
– Macro 1,906
– Macro 1,907
– Macro 1,908
+ Macro 1,901
– Macro 1,901
+ Macro 1,902
– Macro 1,902
+ Macro 1,903
– Macro 1,903
+ Macro 1,904
– Macro 1,904
Remote Trigger - normally closed
Not Connected
(30V 1 amp max)
Remote Trigger - normally open
Ground
(30V 1 amp max)
Remote Trigger - common
+ 12 Vdc
(30V 1 amp max)
Remote Trigger - normally closed
Ground
(30V 1 amp max)
Remote Trigger - common
Ground
(30V 1 amp max)
+ Macro 1,901
+ 12 Vdc fused
+ Macro 1,902
+ 12 Vdc fused
+ Macro 1,903
+ Macro 1,904
+ Macro 1,905
+ Macro 1,906
+ Macro 1,907
+ Macro 1,908
Not Connected
Ground
+ 12 Vdc
Remote Trigger - normally open
(30V 1 amp max)
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
257
Wiring Remote Macros
Express facepanels
There are three typical ways to wire the Remote Macros:
#1: Connect all -Macro pins (pins 2, 4, 6, and 8) to ground (pins 12 and 13) and switch the
leads connecting the +Macro pins (pins 1, 3, 5, and 7) to +12 Vdc (pins 14 and 15) as
shown in the following diagram.
+Macro 1901
-Macro 1901
+Macro 1902
-Macro 1902
+Macro 1903
1
9
2
10
3
11
4
12
Remote Trigger NO
Remote Trigger C
Ground
5
13
6
-Macro 1903
+Macro 1904
Remote Trigger NC
14
7
Ground
+12 Vdc fused
15
8
+12 Vdc fused
-Macro 1904
#2: Connect all +Macro pins (pins 1, 3, 5 and 7) to +12 Vdc (pins 14 and 15) and switch the
leads connecting the -Macro pins (pins 2, 4, 6 and 8) to ground (pins 12 and 13).
#3: Provide your own power supply that generates a 12 Vdc potential between the +Macro
and -Macro pins and switch either of these leads.
258
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Expression/Insight facepanels
There are three typical ways to wire the Remote Macros:
#1: Connect all -Macro pins (pins 1-8) to ground (pin 10) and switch the leads connecting
the +Macro pins (pins 14-21) to +12 Vdc (pin 24) as shown in the following diagram.
-Macro 1901
-Macro 1902
-Macro 1903
-Macro 1904
-Macro 1905
-Macro 1906
-Macro 1907
-Macro 1908
not connected
Ground
+12 Vdc
not connected
not connected
1
14
2
15
3
16
4
17
5
18
6
19
7
20
8
21
9
22
10
23
11
+Macro 1901
+Macro 1902
+Macro 1903
+Macro 1904
+Macro 1905
+Macro 1906
+Macro 1907
+Macro 1908
not connected
Ground
24
+12 Vdc
12
25
13
not connected
#2: Connect all +Macro pins (pins 14-21) to +12 Vdc (pin 24) and switch the leads
connecting the -Macro pins (pins 1-8) to ground (pin10).
#3: Provide your own power supply that generates a 12 Vdc potential between the +Macro
and -Macro pins and switch either of these leads.
Note:
The macro numbers in these examples are the defaults, and may not correspond to the
macros you are using.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
259
This page intentionally blank.
260
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Appendix C
Lighting Playback Controllers
The Expression/Insight and Express Lighting Playback Controller (LPC) units can be used
in conjunction with an Emphasis Server to create a rack-mountable Emphasis Control
System. These LPC units have a limited user interface - an LCD touchscreen on the
Expression/Insight LPC and a series of buttons on the Express LPC - and are designed for
limited programming and manual playback capabilities. Typically, a show that will be run on
an LPC system is programmed on a full Facepanel first and then loaded into the LPC for
automated playback through Remote Macros, a show control protocol (MIDI, MSC,
SMPTE) or through Real Time Programs.
This appendix contains the following sections:
•
Expression/Insight LPC Installation and Configuration . . 262
•
Expression/Insight LPC User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
•
Express LPC Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 264
•
Express LPC User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Lighting Playback Controllers
261
Expression/Insight LPC Installation and Configuration
The Expression/Insight LPC may be mounted in a 19-inch equipment rack, or may be
placed on a stable, horizontal surface. All connections are made on the rear panel of the
unit. All of the connections available on the full Facepanel are available on the LPC, with
the addition of 24 Remote Macros for a total of 32 Remote Macros. See Expression/Insight
LPC Rear Panel, page 300 for a diagram of the LPC connections.
Installation Guidelines
•
Make sure to leave at least six inches of space behind the unit’s fan to ensure proper
cooling.
•
See Installation Guidelines, page 9 for general instructions for setting up your
Emphasis Control System.
Configuration Guidelines
The Expression/Insight LPC requires a configuration setting to tell the Emphasis Server
that it has no integral submaster faders. It also provides additional Remote Macros that may
require some configuration. These settings are described here.
Note:
You have the same configuration options for DMX input, output, and show control
protocols (MIDI, MSC and SMPTE) that the full Facepanel provides. These settings are
described in Control Interfaces, page 201.
Enter the configuration menu on the Expression/Insight LPC:
Step 1:
Power up or reboot the LPC and turn on the monitor.
Step 2:
When the prompt appears on the monitor at startup, press [1][2][3] on the
touchscreen or RFU to enter the configuration menu. Once you have entered the
configuration menu, use the touchscreen to enter data.
Set the LPC Mode:
Step 1:
Enter the configuration menu.
Step 2:
Using the arrow keys on the touchscreen, highlight the Lighting Playback
Controller option in the menu and press [Enter].
Step 3:
Press [Enter] to toggle the Lighting Playback Controller Mode from Disabled to
Enabled. When LPC Mode is Enabled, the Emphasis Control System will know
there are no submaster faders at the Facepanel, and will allow submaster control
from the Emphasis Console screens within Emphasis Visualization. When LPC
Mode is Disabled, the Emphasis Control System will expect submaster faders at
the Facepanel and will not allow submaster control from the Emphasis Console
screens within Emphasis Visualization.
Step 4:
Press [S8] to save your settings and exit to the main configuration menu.
Configure Remote Macros:
See Remote Macros, page 205 for setting the Remote Macro assignments.
262
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Expression/Insight LPC User Interface
The Expression/Insight LPC is a rack-mountable unit containing the control electronics for
the Emphasis Facepanel. It has an LCD touchscreen that provides limited programming
capability. You can also use a Remote Focus Unit to input commands to an LPC unit.
The Cue Playback and Macro Playback displays have a pair of arrow keys in the upperright corner that can be used to move from screen to screen. The Edit display has a single
up-arrow key in the lower-right corner that will return you to the Macro screen.
The Cue Playback Display
The Cue Playback display includes a numeric keypad for selecting cue numbers and [Go],
[Hold], [Back] and [Clear] keys for the A/B and C/D fader pairs. The current and pending
cue numbers and their type and timing appear in the upper-left corner of the display. Use
the controls to playback cues as described in Fader Controls, page 170.
Note:
Use the Fader Status area of the Playback display to view the contents of the fader pairs.
The Macro Playback Display
The Macro Playback display includes 24 keys dedicated to Macros 1-24 and a numeric
keypad for use with the [M*] key. See Macros, page 181 for information on macros.
The Edit Display
The LPC is designed to be a show playback device, rather than a programming tool. In
some cases you may need to edit show data, or create a show using the LPC as you would
a full Facepanel. To facilitate this, you can use a Remote Focus Unit for keypad entry, or
you can use the Edit display.
The Edit display includes all display keys, a subset of the Macro editing keys, all Softkeys
and navigation keys, and the entire numeric keypad and editing keys (except [Focus
Point]).
The keys in the Edit display are rather small. To avoid pressing the wrong key, or multiple
keys, use a pencil eraser or a PDA stylus to enter data. Do not use sharp objects to press
keys on the touchscreen.
Note:
If you intend to do a lot of programming from the Edit display, create a macro for the
[Focus Point] command, if required.
Lighting Playback Controllers
263
Express LPC Installation and Configuration
The Express LPC may be mounted in a 19-inch equipment rack, or may be placed on or
mounted above or below a stable, horizontal surface, or may be mounted to a vertical
surface. The LPC is provided with rubber feet (use these if your LPC is portable or surfacemounted) and hardware for rack- and surface-mounting.
All connections except RFU are made on the rear panel of the unit. All of the connections
available on the full Facepanel are available on the LPC. See Express LPC Rear Panel,
page 300 for a diagram of the LPC connections.
See Installation Guidelines, page 9 for general instructions for setting up your Emphasis
Control System.
Rack-mount Installation
(4) 10-32 x 1/2” Phillips
(with washers)
(5) 6-32 x 1/4” flathead
(4) 10-32 x 3/8” Phillips
(4) 10-32 x 1/2” Phillips
(with washers)
(5) 6-32 x 1/4” flathead
Install Express LPC in a 19-inch equipment rack:
264
Step 1:
Remove all mounting hardware from the plastic bag.
Step 2:
Place one black washer on each of the eight 10-32x1/2” screws.
Step 3:
Attach the two L-brackets to the side panels of the LPC using three 6-32x1/4”
flathead screws each. Choose the bracket holes that position the bracket flush
with the front panel.
Step 4:
Secure the two rear brackets to the side panels of the LPC using two 6-32x1/4”
flathead screws each, orienting the brackets as shown above.
Step 5:
Check the equipment rack for threaded mounting holes. If the rack holes are not
threaded, use the small black clips provided with the LPC. Slide the black clips
over the rack mounting holes so that you can thread the screws into them.
Step 6:
Fit the LPC through the front of the equipment rack and position over the
mounting holes. The L-brackets should be on the outside of the rack.
Step 7:
Secure the LPC to the front of the rack using four 10-32x1/2” screws and
washers as shown above.Keep the rear of the LPC supported to avoid bending
the front brackets.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Step 8:
Using four 10-32x1/2” bolts (and threaded clips, if necessary), loosely attach the
two slider brackets to rear holes in the rack that are opposite those holes used to
mount the front of the LPC. Do not secure yet.
Step 9:
Line up the slider brackets with the rear brackets on each side of the LPC. The
threaded studs on the rear bracket should fit into the slider bracket slots. Attach
each rear bracket to a slider using two 10-32x3/8” screws each. The screws fit
through slots in the brackets and into threaded slider bracket holes.
Step 10: Tighten all bolts so that the assembly is level and secure.
Surface-mount Installation
The Express LPC may be mounted to a vertical surface, or above or below a horizontal
surface. Four feet, two brackets and four screws (for mounting the brackets to the LPC) are
provided. You will need to provide the screws and anchors (if necessary) for
mounting the brackets and LPC to the surface.
(2) 6-32 x 1/4” flathead
(2) 6-32 x 1/4” flathead
Surface-mount the Express LPC above a horizontal or to a vertical surface:
Step 1:
Remove all mounting hardware from the plastic bag.
Step 2:
Securely attach the four rubber bumpers to threaded holes in the bottom of the
LPC using 4-40x3/8” screws.
Step 3:
Securely attach the two L-brackets to the side panels of the LPC as shown
above, using two 6-32x1/4” flathead screws each. Choose the bracket holes
closest to its bend.
Step 4:
Place the LPC on the mounting surface. Mark the surface through the mounting
holes in each bracket. Remove the LPC.
Step 5:
Drill holes at the marks of the appropriate diameter for the mounting anchors/
screws you have provided.
Step 6:
Securely attach the LPC to the mounting surface.
Surface-mount the Express LPC below a horizontal surface:
Step 1:
Remove all mounting hardware from the plastic bag.
Step 2:
Securely attach the four rubber bumpers to threaded holes in the top of the LPC
using double-sided tape (not provided with LPC).
Step 3:
Securely attach the two L-brackets to the side panels of the LPC 180° from the
bracket position illustrated above (the mounting flange should face the top of the
Lighting Playback Controllers
265
LPC), using two 6-32x1/4” flathead screws each. Choose the bracket holes
farthest from the bend.
Step 4:
Place the LPC on the mounting surface. Mark the surface through the mounting
holes in each bracket. Remove the LPC.
Step 5:
Drill holes at the marks of the appropriate diameter for the mounting anchors/
screws you have provided.
Step 6:
Securely attach the LPC to the mounting surface.
Install Cables
Except for the RFU connection, all cables connect to the rear panel of the Express LPC.
There is a strain relief provided for the power input cable.
Install the Express LPC power supply:
Step 1:
Push the LPC unit’s power switch to the OFF position (“O” position).
Step 2:
Remove the thumbscrew to free the cable clamp from the rear panel.
Step 3:
Clip the cable clamp over the attached power supply cable near the 8-pin male
connector.
Step 4:
Plug the connector into the LPC power input receptacle.
Step 5:
Adjust the cable clamp so that you can re-attach it to the LPC.
Step 6:
Plug one end of the furnished power cord into the power supply and the other
end into a grounded power outlet.
Step 7:
If you require a chassis ground, connect a ground wire to the grounding screw
on the LPC rear panel.
Configuration Guidelines
You have the same configuration options for DMX input, output, and show control protocols
(MIDI and MSC) that the full Facepanel provides. These settings are described in Control
Interfaces, page 201.
Enter the configuration menu on the Express LPC:
266
Step 1:
Power up or reboot the LPC and turn on the monitor.
Step 2:
When the prompt appears on the monitor at startup, press [M1][M2][M3] on the
touchscreen or RFU to enter the configuration menu. Once you are in the
configuration menu, use the RFU to modify configuration settings.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Express LPC User Interface
The Express LPC has a limited user interface. If detailed control is required for show
editing, you will want to use a Remote Focus Unit. For minor editing and playback, you can
use the direct macro keys to playback macros 1-7.
The [Read From Disk] command will only read a stored Facepanel configuration from a
floppy disk. Show data is loaded using the Emphasis Visualization File menu.
You can use the macro keys in conjunction with the [Read From Disk] key to perform a
number of other commands, called autocontrols.
Activate autocontrols:
Step 1:
Press and hold [Read From Disk].
Step 2:
Press and hold the required macro key(s).
Step 3:
Release [Read From Disk].
Step 4:
Release the macro key(s).
Function
Key Combination
Stage display
[Read From Disk] / [M1]
“+”
[Read From Disk] / [M1][M2]
Patch Display
[Read From Disk] / [M3]
Enter
[Read From Disk] / [M1][M3]
“-”
[Read From Disk] / [M2][M3]
Clear
[Read From Disk] / [M1][M2][M3]
Setup display
[Read From Disk] / [M4]
Reboot LPC
[Read From Disk] / [M1][M5]
Nothing (use this to back out of an
autocontrol without making any
changes)
[Read From Disk] / [M5][M6]
Softkey [S1]
[Read From Disk] / [M1][M6]
Softkey [S2]
[Read From Disk] / [M2][M6]
Softkey [S3]
[Read From Disk] / [M3][M6]
Softkey [S4]
[Read From Disk] / [M4][M6]
Softkey [S5]
[Read From Disk] / [M1][M5][M6]
Softkey [S6]
[Read From Disk] / [M2][M5][M6]
Softkey [S7]
[Read From Disk] / [M3][M5][M6]
Softkey [S8]
[Read From Disk] / [M4][M5][M6]
Record
[Read From Disk] / [M1][M2][M3][M4][M5][M6]
Lighting Playback Controllers
267
This page intentionally blank.
268
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Appendix D
Specifications
This appendix contains the following sections:
Note:
•
Emphasis Control System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
•
Express Facepanel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
•
Expression Facepanel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
•
Insight Facepanel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Some functions that are available may be modified over the life of the product. In addition,
functions not described here may also be added. In order to maintain the highest possible
standards, ETC reserves the right to change specifications without notice.
Specifications
269
Emphasi s Control System Specifications
System Capacity
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
32,767 DMX512 dimmers/attributes
500/1000/2500/5000 control channels
9,999 cues
500 groups
255 focus points
Effects with up to 100 steps each
2,000 macros
24 submasters/10 pages (108/10 on Insight)
Two timed/manual fader pairs
Hard drive
CD/RW drive
Diskette drive
Single/Dual VGA outputs
Emphasis Console Facepanel Interface
•
•
270
Playback Monitor
- Fader status
- Cue List
- MIDI/SMPTE Event List
Command Monitor
- Stage
- Blind
- Spreadsheet and List
- Cue, Sub, Group and Focus Point
- Fader
- A/B and/or C/D fader
- Submasters
- Tracksheet
- Patch
- Proportional levels
- 32 User-definable profiles
- Full integration with data and visualization
- Park
- Channel or dimmer
- Setup
- Expand
- Flexichannel (displays only used channels)
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Playback Controls
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Faders
- Two timed/manual fader pairs with Go, Hold, Rate, Clear, and Back keys.
- Individual last action fade capability for each channel
Submasters
- 24 submasters with bump buttons and integral LEDs (108 on Insight)
Encoders (Expression/Insight only)
- Five Moving Light attribute encoders
Rate and Level wheels (Expression/Insight only)
Trackpad (Express only)
Master slider
Blackout button
Channel faders and bump buttons
- Two-Scene operation available on Express 24/48, 48/96, 72/144
Interfaces
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DMX512 Configurable Outputs
Ethernet
MIDI
MIDI Show Control
MIDI Time Code
SMPTE (Expression/Insight only)
Remote Focus Unit (RFU)
Remote Macro/Go
Remote Trigger
Control Keypad Features
•
•
•
Cue attributes
- 9,999 Cues in the range.1 to 999.9
- Split up/down fade times
- Wait times
- Follow time
- Link to cue, macro or subroutine
- Modified rate
- Label
- Eight-part multipart cues
- Selective cue recording
Channel Functions
- Lists constructed with And, Thru, +, –
- Sneak sets channel to discrete or fader level in default/specified time
- Only and Except features for group and channel manipulation
- Channel Attribute display
- Independent channel capability
- Flip provides inversion of pan/tilt or lamp/scroll programming
- Last Action Channels
- Dual fader wheels and five control attributes for moving lights (Expression/Insight only)
Moving Light Functions
- Six pages of attribute encoders (Expression/Insight only)
- Focus Points
- 16–bit fade resolution
- Pop–up displays
Specifications
271
•
•
•
•
•
•
Group Functions
- 500 groups with labels
- Any cue or submaster may be accessed as a group
Submaster Functions
- Ten pages of 24 (108 on Insight) submasters with labels, timing and rate attributes
- Bump buttons may be enabled, disabled or solo
- Range editing of submaster attributes in submaster list
- Submasters 13-24 (73-108 on Insight) may be individually changed between pile-on and
inhibitive.
- Supermasters
Effect Functions
- Live effects editing
- 100 steps each
- Step times
- In/Dwell/Out step times
- High/Low levels
- In/Dwell/Out effect times
- Effects may be recorded as cues and loaded to submasters
- Range editing of effect step values and attributes
Subroutines
- Subroutines on submasters
- Up to 26 cue stacks (110 on Insight)
- 100 steps with level and timing attributes.
- Multiple step types
- Four playback styles
- Filter for selective playback
Macros
- Macro List
- 2,000 macros, 1,000 steps each
- Macros may activate any key or command sequence on the console.
- Live Learn mode
- Blind editing
- Remote Macros (via facepanel and video nodes)
Astronomical Time Clock
- Program up to 500 events
- Play back according to date, day of week, time of day
- Program longitude/latitude of show location
- Play back in reference to time before/after sunrise or sunset
System
•
•
•
•
Requires Emphasis Facepanel and Ethernet Hub/Switch for operation
Network printing
Network file sharing
Partial Show Read
Server Options
•
272
Emphasis 2D Server
- ETCNet2 Ethernet native
- Pentium based processor
- Hard drive
- CD/RW drive
- Floppy drive
- Single VGA monitor output
- 5 USB ports
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
•
- 1 serial port
- Parallel printer port
- Scroll mouse
- Alphanumeric keyboard
- 19” rack mountable (with accessory)
- Comes with WYSIWYG Report stand-alone software
- WYSILink message logging standard (full WYSILink optional)
Emphasis 3D Server
- ETCNet2 Ethernet native
- Pentium based processor
- Hard drive
- CD/RW drive
- Floppy drive
- Dual-video card
- 5 USB ports
- 1 serial port
- Parallel printer port
- Scroll mouse
- Alphanumeric keyboard
- 19” rack mountable (with accessory)
- Comes with WYSIWYG Design stand-alone software
- WYSILink message logging standard (full WYSILink optional)
User Interface
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
User log-in
Password protected System Manager log-in
Extended Windows™ desktop (Dual display systems only)
Scroll mouse (or any pointing device)
Keyboard
Hotkeys, drop-down menus, toolbar icons, shortcuts
Pop-up windows
Displays/User Modes
•
•
•
•
•
Emphasis mode
- Console Screen – facepanel screens with wireframe and shaded* view
- Console – facepanel screens and virtual console
- Subroutine
- Quad – wireframe and shaded* views
- Wireframe – plan, section and isometric*
- Shaded*
- Monitor – one facepanel screen
CAD mode
- Wireframe, Quad, Flight case, Shaded*
Data mode
- Spreadsheet, H Select, V Select, Patch, Errors
Presentation mode
- Reports, Plots, Images, Worksheet
Link mode
- Message log
*Shaded and Isometric views available with Emphasis 3D only.
Specifications
273
Control Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Graphic selection of fixtures
- Mouse click
Multiple selection
- Mouse click + CTRL
- Left click dragged box
- Right click dragged box, specify by type
- By layer
- By Concept
Menu tools
- Intensity Full/Out/Specify
- Focus
- Iris Wide/Tight/Specify
- Colour Palette & Library
Console toolbars
- Screen/mode selection, record tools, configurable buttons
Virtual console
- Clickable menu items and softkeys
- Faders mirror levels from facepanel
Blind editing with visualization for
- Cues
- Groups
- Submasters
- Focus Points
Preview Mode – visualize any cue, and current cue +1, +2, +3
Storyboard – visualize multiple cues and activate live from window
Rendering (Emphasis 3D only)
- File image, and bitmap output
- Variable resolution
- Full color mixing, amber shift, haze, smoke, Radiosity, shadow, ambient light
CAD Features
•
•
•
274
Comprehensive libraries
- Fixtures – over 1400 from 72 manufacturers
- Truss – over 1400 items from 19 manufacturers
- Theatrical scenic elements, including over 170 people
- Colour – gel catalogs from 18 manufacturers
- Gobos – catalogs from 22 manufacturers
- Accessories, Lens, Lamps, Symbols
CAD conventions
- Missing Coordinate
- XYZ command line
- Relative & Absolute values
- Ortho, Snap, Cursor, Origin
- Undo, Redo, Repeat last command, Group, Ungroup, Move, Rotate, Focus, Mirror
- Import from .dwg, .dxf
- Interactive & specified object drawing
- Dimension & Distance tools
- Layers & Scenes
- Extrude, Break, Convert, Divide, Fillet, Array
Drawing tools
- Riser, Sphere, Column, Pipe, Line, Circle, Arc, Text Label, Surface, Extruded Surface, Focus
Position, Camera, Venue: Black Box, Proscenium Arch, Arena
- Specified and interactive object creation
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fixture property tools
- Patch, Accessories
- Point of View, Shutter, Barn Door, Barrel Rotate (Emphasis 3D only)
Fixture photometrics
Quick Tools
- Spot, Unit, Purpose, Focus, Channel, Patch, Dimmer, Circuit, Colour, Gobo
Shortcut tools
- Col/Gobo, Fixture, Truss, Accessories, Library, Navigation, Views, Concepts, Palettes
Object property tools
- Translucency, Light Emitting Surface, Textures, Materials, Legs & Borders
Focus Position with Link to Focus Point
Position Manager
Data Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Patch
- Fixture layer indication
- Fixture control status
- EDMX
Graphic selection
Drag-and-drop patching
Spreadsheet data entry & edit
Error checking & reporting
Data filter
Configurable spreadsheets
Fully interactive with all data entry in system
Dynamically updated from any screen, including changes made at facepanel
Presentation Features
•
•
•
•
•
Configurable reports from data
Configurable plot printing
Images from render & screen bitmaps
Worksheet for plot notes
Multi-format output
WYSILink
•
•
•
Message log
- Configurable, can be filtered for message type (Messaging dependent on AF/Standard option
for Sensor Dimming system)
Pop-up messages
WYSILink Add-On Features
- About Dimmer
- About Rack
- Node / Device manager
- Backup look recording & playback
- Graphic dimmer error indication in wireframe views
- Highlighted dimmer error indication in data views
- EDMX monitoring
Specifications
275
Express Facepanel Specifications
Electrical
•
•
Voltage input 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz
Maximum current 0.8 amps
Built-In Interfaces
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 1,024 DMX512 outputs
Remote Focus Unit
Remote Macro control
Remote Trigger option
MIDI Time code control
Console lights
Fader Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fade times programmable from 0.1 seconds to 99:59 minutes
Manual override of upfade and/or downfade
Rate override
Split time fades
Manual fades
Background fades with LTP channels
User selectable default fade times
Hold/Back functions
Two-scene preset on all but Express ECS/125/250 facepanels
Playback Controls
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Two timed/manual fader pairs
Two [Go] buttons
Two [Hold] buttons
Two [Back] buttons
Two [Rate] buttons
Two [Clear] buttons
24 submasters (on Express 24/48 these share the bottom 24 channel faders)
Programmable Master on 100mm potentiometer
Blackout function
Trackpad
Eight softkeys to streamline operations
Timed Control
•
•
•
•
276
Internal or external clock
12-hour or 24-hour timing
References sunrise and sunset with astronomical clock
Up to 500 user-created, Real Time Programs
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Display Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
VGA video output
Extensive online Help displays available for all functions
Stage
Blind
Fader
Tracksheet
Effects
Spreadsheets: Cues, Submasters, Groups and Focus Points
Patch
Park
Setup
Flexichannel (displays only recorded channels)
Channel attributes
Submaster Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ten pages of 24 recorded submasters each
Fully overlapping channel assignments
Proportional channel levels
The bump buttons for all submasters may be enabled, disabled or placed in solo mode as a group
or individually
Integral LEDs on all submasters
Programmable fade and wait times
Live and programmed rate control
Submasters either overlapping pile-on or inhibitive
All submasters programmable with effects and subroutines
Update function
Control keypad features
Spreadsheet editing
Submaster list
Supermasters
Channel Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8-bit and 16-bit data types
Both highest level (Highest Takes Precedence) and last action (Latest Takes Precedence)
channel types
Group function to proportionally manipulate channels
[And], [Except], [Only], and [Thru] functions for selection of control lists
[Full] function
[Level] sets a channel to an editable default value
Independent channels
Flip channel
Moving Light Functions
•
•
•
•
•
Patch fixtures through Emphasis Visualization by assigning personalities, starting channels,
starting DMX512 address and remote dimmer
Swap focus, pan or tilt flip
Five attribute categories
Fixture box level adjustment
Fixture focus with Solo
Specifications
277
Cue Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
9,999 cues in the range 0.1 to 999.9
Discrete upfade and downfade times (00:00-99:59) for each cue
Linked cue sequences
Effect cues
Split wait times
Follow time
Link to cue, macro or subroutine
Eight-part multipart cues
Selective cue recording
Update cue command
Attribute range editing
Subroutines, with cue, style or macro steps
Spreadsheet editing
Cue list
Group Functions
•
•
•
•
Up to 500 groups
Any cue or submaster may be accessed as a group
Spreadsheet editing
Group list
Focus Point Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 255 focus points
Update cues and submasters when focus point changes
Record level of focus point without link
Available in effects
Printout available
Spreadsheet editing
Focus point list
Macro Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
278
Macro List
Up to 2,000 macros with 1,000 steps each
Macros may activate any key except [Enter Macro]
Live Learn mode
Macro view and macro editing modes
Macro wait times are programmable
Can include in real time programs
Can include in time code events
Four macros operated by remote switches
Startup macro
Remote Trigger function
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Effects Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Effects may be recorded as cues or submasters
Up to 100 steps each
Live effects recording
Spreadsheet editing
8-bit and 16-bit data types
Variability of rate during playback
Step times
In/Dwell/Out Step fade times
High/Low Levels
Up/Dwell/Down Effect fade times
Range editing of effect attributes and step values
Profile Functions
•
•
•
Profiles may be assigned to dimmers
Ten preset profiles, nine of which are editable
Twenty-three additional profiles that may be programmed
Diskette Functions
•
3.5-inch high-density diskette drive for software and configuration loading
Options
•
•
•
•
•
Remote Focus Unit
Wireless Remote Focus Unit
Lighting Playback Controller
Remote Macro controls
Console lights
Size and Weight
Express 125/250
• 35 x 15 x 6 inches (890 x 380 x 150mm)
• 21 pounds (9.5kgs)
Express 24/48
• 43 x 15 x 6 inches (1090 x 380 x 150mm)
• 30 pounds (13.6kgs)
Express 48/96
• 43 x 24 x 6 inches (1090 x 610 x 150mm)
• 35 pounds (15.8kgs)
Express 72/144
• 54 x 24 x 6 inches (1370 x 610 x 150mm)
• 40 pounds (18.1kgs)
Specifications
279
Expression Facepanel Specifi cations
Electrical
•
•
•
Voltage input 90-250 VAC, 50-60 Hz
Maximum current 6.3 amps
Maximum monitor load - two at 2.0 amps each
Built-in interfaces
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 1,536 DMX512 outputs (2,048 on Expression ECS)
Remote Focus Unit
Supports CE dimming systems
Remote Macro control
Alphanumeric keyboard
Time code control (either MIDI or SMPTE)
DMX512 Input port
Serial mouse
Fader functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fade times programmable from 0.1 seconds to 99:59 minutes
Manual override of upfade and/or downfade
Rate override
Split time fades
Manual fades
Background fades with LTP channels
User selectable default fade times
Hold/Back functions
Playback controls
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
280
Two timed/manual fader pairs
Two [Go] buttons
Two [Hold] buttons
Two [Back] buttons
Two [Rate] buttons
Two [Clear] buttons
24 submasters
Programmable Grandmaster
Blackout function
Level wheel
Rate wheel
Eight softkeys to streamline operations
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Timed control
•
•
•
•
Internal or external clock
12-hour or 24-hour timing
References sunrise and sunset with astronomical clock
Up to 500 user-created, Real Time Programs
Display functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Two VGA video outputs
Extensive online Help displays available for all functions
Stage
Blind
Fader
Effects
Tracksheet
Spreadsheets: Cues, Submasters, Groups and Focus Points
Patch
Park
Setup
Flexichannel (displays only recorded channels)
Expand
Channel attributes
Submaster functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ten pages of 24 recorded submasters each
Fully overlapping channel assignments
Proportional channel levels
The bump buttons for all submasters may be enabled, disabled or placed in solo mode as a group
or individually
Integral LEDs on all submasters
Programmable fade and wait times
Live and programmed rate control
12 submasters for either overlapping pile-on or inhibitive operation
All submasters programmable with effects or subroutines
Update function
Control keypad features
Submaster labels
Spreadsheet editing
Submaster list
Supermasters
Specifications
281
Channel functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8-bit and 16-bit data types
Both highest level (Highest Takes Precedence) and last action (Latest Takes Precedence)
channel types
Group function to proportionally manipulate channels
Proportional adjustment with level wheel
[And], [Except], [Only], and [Thru] functions for selection of control lists
[Full] function
[Level] sets a channel to an editable default value
Independent channels
Flip channel
Moving Light Functions
•
•
•
•
•
Patch fixtures through Emphasis Visualization by assigning personalities, starting channels,
starting DMX512 address and remote dimmer
Swap focus, pan or tilt flip
Five attribute categories
Fixture box level adjustment
Fixture focus with Solo
Cue functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
282
Up to 9,999 cues in the range 0.1 to 999.9
Discrete upfade and downfade times (00:00-99:59) for each cue
Linked cue sequences
Effect cues
Split wait times
Follow time
Link to cue or macro
Label
Eight-part multipart cues
Selective cue recording
Update cue command
Attribute range editing
Subroutines, with cue, style or macro steps
Spreadsheet editing
Cue list
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Group functions
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 500 groups
Any cue or submaster may be accessed as a group
Group labels
Spreadsheet editing
Group list
Focus point functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 255 focus points
Update cues and submasters when focus point changes
Record level of focus point without link
Available in effects
Printout available
Spreadsheet editing
Focus point list
Macro functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Macro List
Up to 2,000 macros with 1,000 steps each
Macros may activate any key except [Enter Macro]
Live Learn mode
Macro view and macro editing modes
Macro wait times are programmable
Can include in real time programs
Can include in time code events
Eight macros operated by remote switches
Startup macro
Remote Trigger function through ETCNet2 Video Node
Effects functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Effects may be recorded as cues or submasters
Up to 100 steps each
Live effects recording
Spreadsheet editing
8-bit and 16-bit data types
Variability of rate during playback
Step times
In/Dwell/Out Step fade times
High/Low Levels
In/Dwell/Out Effect fade times
Range editing of effect attributes and step values
Specifications
283
Profile functions
•
•
•
Profiles may be assigned to dimmers
Ten preset profiles, nine of which are editable
Twenty-three additional profiles that may be programmed
Level/X and Rate/Y wheels
•
•
Proportional level control of channels or groups
Proportional rate control of cues and submasters (0-2000 percent)
Encoders
•
•
•
Five encoder knobs
Six encoder pages
Reassignment individually or automatically with Autoload function
Diskette Functions
•
3.5-inch high-density diskette drive for software and configuration loading
Options
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Alphanumeric keyboard
Remote Focus Unit
Wireless Remote Focus Unit
Lighting Playback Controller
SMPTE external control
Remote Macro controls
Serial mouse
Size and weight
•
•
284
40 x 16.5 x 6.5 inches (1020 x 420 x 170mm)
40 pounds (18.2kgs)
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Insight Facepanel Specifications
Electrical
•
•
•
Voltage input 90-250 VAC, 50-60 Hz
Maximum current 6.3 amps
Maximum monitor load - two at 2.0 amps each
Built-in interfaces
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 1,536 DMX512 outputs (2,048 on Insight ECS)
Remote Focus Unit
Supports CE dimming systems
Remote Macro control
Alphanumeric keyboard
Time code control (either MIDI or SMPTE)
DMX512 Input port
Serial mouse
Fader functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fade times programmable from 0.1 seconds to 99:59 minutes
Manual override of upfade and/or downfade
Rate override
Split time fades
Manual fades
Background fades with LTP channels
User selectable default fade times
Hold/Back functions
Playback controls
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Two timed/manual fader pairs
Two [Go] buttons
Two [Hold] buttons
Two [Back] buttons
Two [Rate] buttons
Two [Clear] buttons
108 submasters
Programmable Grandmaster
Blackout function
Level wheel
Rate wheel
Eight softkeys to streamline operations
Timed control
•
•
•
•
Internal or external clock
12-hour or 24-hour timing
References sunrise and sunset with astronomical clock
Up to 500 user-created, Real Time Programs
Specifications
285
Display functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Two VGA video outputs
Extensive online Help displays available for all functions
Stage
Blind
Fader
Effects
Tracksheet
Spreadsheets: Cues, Submasters, Groups and Focus Points
Patch
Park
Setup
Flexichannel (displays only recorded channels)
Expand
Channel attributes
Submaster functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
286
Ten pages of 108 recorded submasters each
Fully overlapping channel assignments
Proportional channel levels
The bump buttons for all submasters may be enabled, disabled or placed in solo mode as a group
or individually
Integral LEDs on all submasters
Programmable fade and wait times
Live and programmed rate control
36 submasters for either overlapping pile-on or inhibitive operation
All submasters programmable with effects or subroutines
Update function
Control keypad features
Submaster labels
Spreadsheet editing
Submaster list
Supermasters
Channel/Submaster modes
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Channel functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8-bit and 16-bit data types
Both highest level (Highest Takes Precedence) and last action (Latest Takes Precedence)
channel types
Group function to proportionally manipulate channels
Proportional adjustment with level wheel
[And], [Except], [Only], and [Thru] functions for selection of control lists
[Full] function
[Level] sets a channel to an editable default value
Independent channels
Flip channel
Moving Light Functions
•
•
•
•
•
Patch fixtures through Emphasis Visualization by assigning personalities, starting channels,
starting DMX512 address and remote dimmer
Swap focus, pan or tilt flip
Five attribute categories
Fixture box level adjustment
Fixture focus with Solo
Cue functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 9,999 cues in the range 0.1 to 999.9
Discrete upfade and downfade times (00:00-99:59) for each cue
Linked cue sequences
Effect cues
Split wait times
Follow time
Link to cue or macro
Label
Eight-part multipart cues
Selective cue recording
Update cue command
Attribute range editing
Subroutines, with cue or style steps
Spreadsheet editing
Cue list
Group functions
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 500 groups
Any cue or submaster may be accessed as a group
Group labels
Spreadsheet editing
Group list
Focus point functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 255 focus points
Update cues and submasters when focus point changes
Record level of focus point without link
Available in effects
Printout available
Spreadsheet editing
Focus point list
Specifications
287
Macro functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Macro List
Up to 2,000 macros with 1,000 steps each
Macros may activate any key except [Enter Macro]
Live Learn mode
Macro view and macro editing modes
Macro wait times are programmable
Can include in real time programs
Can include in time code events
Eight macros operated by remote switches
Startup macro
Remote Trigger function through ETCNet2 Video Node
Effects functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Effects may be recorded as cues or submasters
Up to 100 steps each
Live effects recording
Spreadsheet editing
8-bit and 16-bit data types
Variability of rate during playback
Step times
In/Dwell/Out Step fade times
High/Low Levels
In/Dwell/Out Effect fade times
Range editing of effect attributes and step values
Profile functions
•
•
•
288
Profiles may be assigned to dimmers
Ten preset profiles, nine of which are editable
Twenty-three additional profiles that may be programmed
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Level/X and Rate/Y wheels
•
•
Proportional intensity control of channels or groups
Proportional rate control of cues and submasters (0-2000 percent)
Encoders
•
•
•
Five encoder knobs
Six encoder pages
Reassignment individually or automatically with Autoload function
Diskette Functions
•
3.5-inch high-density diskette drive for software and configuration loading
Options
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Alphanumeric keyboard
Remote Focus Unit
Wireless Remote Focus Unit
Lighting Playback Controller
SMPTE external control
Remote Macro controls
Serial mouse
Size and weight
•
•
44 x 16.5 x 6.5 inches (1120 x 420 x 170mm)
42.2 pounds (19.2kgs)
Specifications
289
This page intentionally blank.
290
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Appendix E
Foldout Diagrams
This appendix contains the following sections:
•
Emphasis Control System Riser Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
•
Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . 294
•
Insight Facepanel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
•
Expression Facepanel Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
•
Express 125/250/ECS Facepanel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
•
Express 24/48 Facepanel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
•
Express 48/96 & 72/144 Facepanel Overview. . . . . . . . . . . 299
•
Emphasis LPC Facepanel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
•
Command Keypad Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
•
Express Facepanel Two-Scene Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Foldout Diagrams
291
This page intentionally blank.
292
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Emphasis Control System Riser Diagrams
A
Simple Emphasis Control System
Emphasis Control System with ETCNet2 Nodes
ETCNet2
Emph
Facepanel
CRT#1
Hub/Switch
Emph
Facepanel
CRT#2
ETCNet2
ETCNet2
RFU
ON
KEYBOARD
OFF
Video Node
Emphasis Server
DMX
Remote Focus Unit
ETCNet2
DMX
ETCNet2
DMX Node
ETCLink
ETCNet2
Hub/Switch
ETCNet2
DMX
Expression with Emphasis Facepanel
Express with Emphasis Facepanel
Emphasis Server
To moving lights
or any
DMX device
Sensor
Sensor
Emphasis Control System with ETCNet2 Nodes, DMX Input and
Unison Architectural Control
Emphasi s Control System with ETCNet2 Nodes and DMX Input
ETCNet2
PC for Light Manager, NCE
WYSIWYG and WYSILink
Emph
Facepanel
CRT#1
ETCNet2
ETCNet2
Emph
Facepanel
CRT#1
Hub/Switch
Emph
Facepanel
CRT#2
ETCNet2
RFU
ETCNet2
Video Node
ETCNet2
DMX
DMX
Remote Focus Unit
ETCNet2
ETCNet2
DMX Node
ETCLink
DMX Node
ETCNet2
DMX
ETCLink
DMX
Expression with Emphasis Facepanel
Expression with Emphasis Facepanel
To moving lights
or any
DMX device
ETCNet2
Sensor
DMX from
external source
Reference Fold-outs
To moving lights
or any
DMX device
ETCNet2
DMX Node
with ports set
for input
DMX Node
with ports set
for input
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
KEYBOARD
Remote Focus Unit
Emphasis Server
Emphasis Server
DMX from
external source
RFU
OFF
ETCNet2
KEYBOARD
OFF
ETCNet2
ON
CMEi in
ER4 Rack
Video Node
ETCNet2
ON
Hub/Switch
Emph
Facepanel
CRT#2
Sensor
Remote Focus Unit
293
Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel Connections
B
Express Facepanels
DMX output #1
DMX output #2
ETCLink - not available at console -connect ETCLink to an ETCLink-enabled
DMX Node on the network.
Desk light outlet
RFU connector
RFU fuse (F 1.5A)
Desk light dimmer
Desk light outlet
Disk drive (no show storage,
software and config loading only)
Lamps 12V
Ext. 12V
F 1.5A
5 x 20mm
PUSH
Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc.
3030 Laura Lane, Middleton, Wisconsin 53562-1754
Product:
Model #:
Serial #:
CRT Display
Parallel Printer
ThinNet
Local Printer
(not supported)
Power switch
DC Power input
CRT display
Remote macros
ETCNet ThinNet (not supported)
ETCNet2 twisted pair (CAT5 or better)
MIDI thru
MIDI output
MIDI input
Expression/Insi ght Facepanels
DMX In
DMX output #1
DMX output #2
DMX output #3
DMX output #4
Keyboard
Out
RS-232
Digitizer/Serial
Parallel Printer
DMX512
DMXIn
Termination
On
Off
CRT Displays
CRT1
Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc.
513-1024
Push
CRT2
1025-1536
1537-2048
Push
Push
ETCNet
ThinNet
2.0 max
Remote Macro
Serial mouse/trackball
(for pan/tilt only)
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Fuse
Wireless
Bus
Wireless
Remote
RFU
Remote I/O
T 2.5A
F US E
Product:
Model #:
Serial #:
Disk drive (no show storage,
software and config loading only)
90-250V ~ 50/60Hz
T 6.3A
F US E
US
AC Input
2.0 max
Remote I/O
Twisted Pair
3030 Laura Lane, Middleton, WI 53562-1754
C
Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. LISTED 3287
Middleton, WI Made in USA
Switched AC outlet (2.0A max)
Switched AC outlet (2.0A max)
Power switch
Switched AC Outlets
1-512
Push
Twisted Pair Polarity
Push
Termination
On
Off
MIDI
In
Stage Studio Lighting Control Consoles
RFU
Push
Tracking Mode
Mouse
ETCLink
ThinNet / Twisted Pair
Push
Network &
I/O
SMPTE
SMPTE On / Off
RFU connector
ETCLink - not available at console connect ETCLink to an ETCLinkenabled DMX Node on the network.
SMPTE input
Local Printer
MIDI input
(not supported)
MIDI output
Alpha-keyboard
CRT 1 display
(for labeling only)
Digitizer
CRT 2 display
(not supported)
Reference Fold-outs
ETCNet2 twisted
pair (CAT5 or better)
ETCNet ThinNet
(not supported)
DIP switches for
SMPTE and twisted pair
polarity
Power input
AC input fuse (T 6.3A)
RFU fuse (F 1.5A)
Wireless Remote
Wireless bus
Remote macros
294
Insight Facepanel Overview
C
Submasters or Channel Faders - Use
submasters for controlling assigned channels,
or for additional playback faders using the
Subroutines-on-Submasters feature. These
faders can be switched to channel-mode to
directly control the first 108 channels in your
system.
Encoders and Page Keys - The encoders are
used when controlling moving lights, or
“fixtures.” Each attribute of a fixture is typically
assigned to an encoder. There are six pages of
encoders to accommodate required attributes.
(Insight 3 and Insight ECS only)
Grandmaster and Blackout - The
grandmaster fader masters the output of
dependent channels patched to the
system. The blackout key toggles the
output of the system. Independent
channels are not affected.
Encoder Control
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
5
6
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
C
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
E1
10
D
9
8
6
5
4
3
6
Controls
5
4
10
3
9
2
8
1
2
A
7
0
1
A/B Keyswitch - Use the keyswitch to
switch the facepanel between system
IDs in multiple server systems.
B
6
5
36
4
10
3
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
2
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
7
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
1
0
Grand
Master
Faders
0
A
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
10
B
9
8
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
4
4
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
7
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
3
7
6
5
2
1
0
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
Reference Fold-outs
Level
Y
107
AB- and CD-Fader Pairs - Use the fader
pairs to crossfade from one recorded cue
to another. The faders can be used to take
manual control of a crossfade.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Rate
X
Control Keypad - The control keypad
contains various keys for controlling and
recording channels and fixtures, changing
displays, and other console features.
Rate and Level Wheels - The rate and level
wheels adjust the playback rate of cues and
submasters, and the level of selected channels.
The wheels can also be used as two additional
encoders for moving light control.
295
Expression Facepanel Overview
D
Rate and Level Wheels - The rate and level
wheels adjust the playback rate of cues and
submasters, and the level of selected channels.
The wheels can also be used as two additional
encoders for moving light control.
LED Displays - The LED displays show
the current cue(s), next cue, channel
numbers and record destinations, as
well as rate and level values.
A/B Keyswitch - Use the keyswitch to
switch the facepanel between system
IDs in multiple server systems.
Next C
N
Cue
A/B
C/D
Record
Channel/Group
Rate
X
Level
Y
A
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
B
10
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Faders
Control
A
B
C
D
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
9
7
Submasters
10
13
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
14
15
16
Submasters - Use submasters for
manually controlling assigned
channels, or for additional playback
faders using the Subroutines-onSubmasters feature.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
17
18
19
20
21
22
1
1
0
0
23
6
6
6
5
5
5
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
Grand
Master
24
AB- and CD-Fader Pairs - Use the fader
pairs to crossfade from one recorded cue
to another. The faders can be used to take
manual control of a crossfade.
Control Keypad - The control keypad
contains various keys for controlling and
recording channels and fixtures, changing
displays, and other console features.
Reference Fold-outs
Grandmaster and Blackout - The
grandmaster fader masters the output of
dependent channels patched to the
system. The blackout key toggles the
output of the system. Independent
channels are not affected.
Encoders and Page Keys - The encoders are
used when controlling moving lights, or “fixtures”.
Each attribute of a fixture is typically assigned to
an encoder. There are six pages of encoders to
accommodate required attributes. (Expression 3
and Expression ECS facepanels only)
296
Express 125/250/ECS Facepanel Overview
E
Macro Keys - Use the macro keys to
store and playback macros. Macros are
stored series of console commands.
Cluster A - [About] tells you specific
information about your show; [Learn]
and [Enter Macro] are used in editing
macros; [Help] provides information
about console commands.
PUSH
Submasters - Use submasters for
manually controlling assigned channels, or
for additional playback faders using the
Subroutines-on Submasters feature.
Display Keys - Use the display
keys to choose from the available
console displays.
Navigation Keys - Use navigation keys to
get around in displays, move through
menus, move through fields in the Fixture
Patch display, or move through different
attributes in the Fixture Box.
Softkeys - Use the softkeys to
activate commands displayed at
the bottom of various console
displays.
PUSH
Grandmaster and Blackout - The
Grandmaster fader masters the output of
dependent channels patched to the system. The
Blackout key toggles the output of the system.
Independent channels are not affected.
Submasters
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0
1
2
3
4
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
10
9
8
7
6
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
5
6
7
8
9
Master
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
13
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
14
15
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
16
17
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
18
AB- and CD-Fader Pairs - Use the fader pairs
to crossfade from one recorded cue to another.
The faders can be used to take manual control
of a crossfade.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
19
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
20
21
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
22
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
B
C
D
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Cluster B - In general, the keys in this
cluster pinpoint the elements that make
up the structure of your show, such as
groups, cues and submasters.
Numeric Keypad - The numeric
keypad is for numerical entry. This
grouping also includes the [Enter]
and [Clear] keys.
Reference Fold-outs
Cluster C - Use these keys when
editing channel levels and lists.
Touchpad - Acts as a level controller for
selected channels/parameters. Also acts
as a controller for pan/tilt parameters on
the X- and Y-axes. Use the coarse and
file buttons to the left of the touchpad to
change the resolution of control.
297
Express 24/48 Facepanel Overview
F
Display Keys - Use the display
keys to choose from the available
console displays.
Macro Keys - Use the macro keys to
store and playback macros. Macros are
stored series of console commands.
Cluster A - [About] tells you specific
information about your show; [Learn]
and [Enter Macro] are used in editing
macros; [Help] provides information
about console commands.
Softkeys - Use the softkeys to
activate commands displayed at
the bottom of various console
displays.
PUSH
PUSH
Grandmaster and Blackout - The
Grandmaster fader masters the output of
dependent channels patched to the system. The
Blackout key toggles the output of the system.
Independent channels are not affected.
Navigation Keys - Use navigation keys to
get around in displays, move through
menus, move through fields in the Fixture
Patch display, or move through different
attributes in the Fixture Box.
Channels
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
7
6
5
10
9
8
10
9
8
10
9
8
10
9
8
10
9
8
10
9
8
10
9
8
10
9
8
10
9
8
10
9
8
10
9
8
10
9
8
6
5
4
6
5
4
6
5
4
6
5
4
6
5
4
6
5
4
6
5
4
6
5
4
6
5
4
6
5
4
6
5
4
6
5
4
Master
26
2
27
3
28
4
6
12
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
A
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
1
0
B
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C
D
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
Cluster C - Use these keys when
editing channel levels and lists.
Channel Faders and Submasters - Use channel faders to control
the first 24 channels in Two-Scene mode, or the first 48 channels in
Single-Scene mode. You can also setup the channel faders to
control the first 24 channels on the top bank, and 24 submasters on
the bottom bank. Use submasters to manually control assigned
channels, or for additional playback faders using the Subroutines-onSubmasters feature.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
AB- and CD-Fader Pairs - Use the fader pairs
to crossfade from one recorded cue to another.
The faders can be used to take manual control
of a crossfade.
Reference Fold-outs
Numeric Keypad - The numeric keypad is
for numerical entry. This grouping also
includes the [Enter] and [Clear] keys.
Cluster B - In general, the keys in this
cluster pinpoint the elements that make
up the structure of your show, such as
groups, cues and submasters.
Touchpad - Acts as a level controller for
selected channels/parameters. Also acts
as a controller for pan/tilt parameters on
the X- and Y-axes. Use the coarse and
file buttons to the left of the touchpad to
change the resolution of control.
298
Express 48/96 & 72/144 Facepanel Overview
G
Cluster A - [About] tells you specific
information about your show; [Learn]
and [Enter Macro] are used in editing
macros; [Help] provides information
about console commands.
Channel Faders - Use the channel faders to
control the first 72 channels in Two-Scene
mode, or the first 144 channels in SingleScene mode. An Express 48/96 allows control
of the first 48 or 96 channels, respectively.
Navigation Keys - Use navigation
keys to get around in displays, move
through menus, move through fields
in the Fixture Patch display, or move
through different attributes in the
Fixture Box.
Macro Keys - Use the
macro keys to store and
playback macros. Macros
are stored series of
console commands.
Display Keys - Use the
display keys to choose
from the available
console displays.
Softkeys - Use the softkeys to
activate commands displayed at
the bottom of various console
displays.
Channels
2
1
0
2
1
0
1
12
10
10
73
75
1
2
10
76
77
4
10
78
5
10
80
6
7
81
8
13
10
14
24
10
82
9
2
1
0
85
10
10
86
13
10
88
14
89
15
10
90
17
10
92
18
19
93
20
25
10
94
21
2
97
23
24
10
98
25
2
1
0
36
10
95
22
2
1
0
10
99
26
101
27
10
102
28
10
103
30
105
31
32
34
107
109
35
2
1
0
48
10
10
110
36
Master
Submasters
37
10
106
2
1
0
38
A
10
111
39
10
114
40
B
41
115
42
C
43
10
116
44
10
118
45
49
119
47
9
10
120
48
10
122
49
123
51
10
124
52
10
126
53
127
55
10
131
57
60
61
72
10
128
56
2
1
0
58
10
132
60
10
133
61
135
62
63
10
136
64
10
137
65
139
66
10
140
68
10
141
69
144
70
71
72
D
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
Submasters - Use submasters for
manually controlling assigned channels, or
for additional playback faders using the
Subroutines-on Submasters feature.
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
11
12
13
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
Grandmaster and Blackout The Grandmaster fader masters
the output of dependent channels
patched to the system. The
Blackout key toggles the output of
the system. Independent
channels are not affected.
24
2
1
1
0
0
AB- and CD-Fader
Pairs - Use the fader
pairs to crossfade from
one recorded cue to
another. The faders can
be used to take manual
control of a crossfade.
Reference Fold-outs
Cluster B - In general,
the keys in this cluster
pinpoint the elements
that make up the
structure of your show,
such as groups, cues
and submasters.
Cluster C - Use these keys when editing
channel levels and lists.
Numeric Keypad - The numeric keypad is
for numerical entry. This grouping also
includes the [Enter] and [Clear] keys.
Touchpad - Acts as a level
controller for selected channels/
parameters. Also acts as a
controller for pan/tilt parameters
on the X- and Y-axes. Use the
coarse and file buttons to the left
of the touchpad to change the
resolution of control.
299
Emphasis LPC Facepanel Overview
H
Express LPC Front Panel
Express LPC Rear Panel
RFU fuse (F 1.6A)
Read from disk
L IGHTING
M1
M2
M3
M6
P LAYBACK
C ONTROLLER
Serial port
Power switch
DC power input
CRT Display
CLASS 2 OUTPUTS
Parallel Printer
ETCLink - not available at LPC - connect
ETCLink to an ETCLink-enabled DMX
Node on the network.
MIDI thru
MIDI output
MIDI input
Remote Macro
ETCNet
(F) 1.6A 250V
M7
PUSH
READ
FROM
DISK
-512
Disk drive
(no show storage, software
and config loading only)
Macros 1-7
Expression/Insight LPC Front Panel
RFU
connector
(Earth) Ground
point
DMX output #2
DMX output #1
ETCNet - ThinNet - not supported
ETCNet 2 - twisted pair
Remote macros
Local printer
(not supported)
CRT display
513-1024
Expression/Insight LPC Rear Panel
ETCLink - not available at LPC - connect
ETCLink to an ETCLink-enabled DMX
Node on the network.
Digitizer
(not supported)
RFU connector
SMPTE input
Alpha-keyboard (labeling only)
Local printer
MIDI output
(not supported)
MIDI input
Touchscreen
I/O
DMX In
CRT 1
DMX output #1
CRT 2
DMX output #2
DMX output #3
DMX512
On
Off
Parallel Printer
Digitizer/Serial
CRT 1
Twisted Pair Polarity
Off
RS-232
Tracking Mode
SMPTE Off / On
On
MIDI
ThinNet / Twisted Pair
DMX In
ETCNet
ThinNet
Twisted Pair
ETCNet - ThinNet
(not supported)
ETCNet 2 - twisted pair
DIP switches
AC Input
on
Remote I/O
Wireless
Bus
power
Wireless
Remote
RFU
Remote I/O
T 2.5A
off
Power switch
Disk drive
(no show storage, software
and config loading only)
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
AC fuse (T6.3A)
AC input
Remote
macros #3
Remote
macros #1
Reference Fold-outs
Remote
macros #4
Remote
macros #2
RFU fuse (T 2.5A)
Wireless remote
Wireless bus
(Earth) Ground point
300
Command Keypad Overview
1
2
3
I
DISPLAY KEYS - The [Stage] display is where most editing of channel levels happens. In Stage, any changes you make are ‘live‘ and will take
immediate effect. The [Blind] display is used when you want to edit channel levels or cues but don’t need or want a ‘live‘ result. The [Fader]
display is a “live” display that shows the contribution of the fader pairs or submasters to the stage look. You can also use it to display channel
activity in the ‘background’ (cues running, but not on the AB or CD faders). You can edit and record channel levels in the Fader display. The
[Tracksheet] display is a “blind” display that shows the recorded cue levels for a selected channel. You can edit that channel’s level in a cue or
across a group of cues in the Tracksheet display. The [Patch] is used to assign dimmers to channels, and to modify dimmer attributes. The
[Park] display shows you which dimmers or channels are ‘Parked’ and at what levels. Parked dimmers or channels are unaffected by playback
faders or the Grandmaster, and parked levels are not recorded into cues. The [Setup] display is where you can edit the system settings and
access other Console functions. [Expand] places the Stage Command display across both monitors to double the visible channels.
MACRO KEYS are used to program macro functions and start macros. Macro keys [M1]–[M5] ([M3] on Express facepanels) access the first
few macros directly; [M*] allows you to specify any one of the 2,000 macros available and must be followed by a number. [Macro Wait] and
[Macro Enter] are used when programming macros. A macro is a recorded series of keystrokes to be replayed later. Macros can execute any
console command (including softkeys and submaster bumps) and be linked to cues.
1
Stage
Blind
Patch
Setup
M1
M2
M3
M*
About
Learn
Help
Enter
Macro
S1
S2
S3
S4
Page
Cue
7
8
Type
Sub
4
Link
Group
1
Wait
Time
3
4
CLUSTER A - The [Swap] key (Expression/Insight only) allows you to swap displays between the Command and Playback monitors. Press it
again to swap back. The [About] key opens a window containing information about a channel, dimmer, or the show according to which key you
press after pressing [About]. For example, [About] [Channel] [3] [Enter] will display information about channel 3. The [Learn] key enables
you to record keystrokes live into macros as an alternative to using editing screens. The [Help] key provides context-sensitive assistance
online. Press [Help] followed by a second key (including softkeys) to open a window explaining the function of the second key. The [Enter
Macro] key (found here on Express facepanels) is used in macro editing.
4
SOFTKEYS are found in many console displays. They are identified for that display at the bottom of the screen. You activate a display’s
softkeys by pressing [S1]–[S8]. When softkey [S7 - More Softkeys] is available, there are more pages of softkeys for that display. Press [S7 More Softkeys] to access those additional pages.
5
NAVIGATION KEYS - Use navigation keys to get around in console displays and move through console menus.
6
Track
7
8
CLUSTER B - In general, the keys in this cluster pinpoint the elements that make up the structure of your show. You will use these keys when
recording or editing groups, cues or submasters. Some allow you to change the properties of recorded elements, such as playback timing and
relationships with other elements. The [Only] key in this cluster is a selection key that allows you to pinpoint parts of elements, such as attribute
categories and individual attributes of moving light fixtures.
NUMERIC KEYPAD - The numeric keypad is for numerical entry. This grouping also includes the [Enter] and [Clear] keys. Press [Enter] to
complete operations. Press [Clear] to cancel operations. Use [+] and [-] to increment and decrement through lists, levels and timing.
CLUSTER C - Use these keys when editing channel levels and lists. Use the [Thru], [And] and [Except] keys to work with multiple selections
and ranges. Use [At] when making assignments, such as when setting channel levels. Use the [Full] and [Level] keys to assign pre-defined
levels (there is no need to precede with [At] or follow with [Enter]). Use [Rel] to release selected, captured and independent channels.
Selected channels may be edited in any display. Channels may be captured in the Stage or Fader displays and cannot be controlled by cues or
submasters. Independent channels are unaffected by Grandmaster, Flash, Solo and Blackout controls. Press [Rel] 1–3 times to release
channels in the following order: first selected channels, then captured channels, then independent channels. Use the [Focus Point] key to set
levels by reference.
S5
S6
S7
S8
9
Chan
Dim
5
6
Thru
At
2
3
And
Full
Except
Level
Rel
Focus
Point
4
0
Record
Enter
Clear
5
8
Express Keypad
Expression/Insight Keypad
Stage
Blind
Fader
Track
Sheet
Patch
Park
Setup
Expand
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M*
Macro
Wait
Enter
Macro
2
Swap
About
Learn
Help
3
S1
S2
S3
S4
4
Page
Type
Cue
7
8
Load
Sub
Only
Sub
4
Link
Part
Group
1
Follow
Label
Time
1
6
7
2
6
Wait
Track
Record
1
2
S5
Clear
S6
S7
S8
9
Channel
Dim
5
6
Thru
At
2
3
And
Full
0
+
Except
Level
Release
Focus
Point
Enter
5
4
8
7
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Reference Fold-outs
301
Express Facepanel Two-Scene Operation
PUSH
J
Overview
Playback lighting looks manually:
You can use the Express 24/48, 48/96 and
72/144 facepanels in “single-scene” or “twoscene” mode. In single-scene operation, the
channel faders access the first 48, 96 or 144
channels, based on the facepanel type.
In two-scene operation, the top and bottom
rows of channel faders access the first 24, 48
or 72 channels. For example, on an
Express 24/28, fader 1 and 25 will both
access channel 1, faders 2 and 26 access
channel 2, and so on. Two-scene mode
allows you to setup lighting looks manually
on the channel faders and crossfade
between them. In all cases, two-scene
mode uses the top row of channel faders as
“Scene A” and the bottom row of channel
faders as “Scene B”. When you are running
in two-scene mode, the AB Fader pair is used
to crossfade from Scene A to Scene B. You
can crossfade manually or with timing
applied. You can use the CD Fader Pair to
playback recorded cues (see Cues, page
112, for more information).
Note:
Channels
Step 1:
Slide the AB Fader Pair to the top of their travel (away from you).
Step 2:
Move the channel faders on Scene A to the levels you want in your
first look (Cue 1). Lighting levels will change on stage.
Scene A
10
9
8
7
Step 3:
5
4
3
1
0
1
1
0
2
Scene B
1
0
12
13
10
10
10
9
8
15
24
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
10
0
25
1
2
27
3
28
4
29
5
The Express 24/48 also has the ability to run in single-scene mode
with channel and submaster faders available. In that case, the top row
of channel faders correspond to channels 1-24, and the bottom row
becomes submasters 1-24.
30
6
31
7
8
33
9
10
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
B
48
24
7
6
7
6
4
3
2
1
0
4
3
2
1
0
Go
C
Clear
Rate
Rate
7
6
Back
Hold
Setup single-scene operation:
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to open the System Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [1][5] [Enter] to select the Scene Mode settings.
Step 3:
On Express 48/96 and 72/144 consoles, press [0] [Enter] to
return to single-scene operation. On Express 24/48 consoles, you
have two single-scene choices: press [2] [Enter] for single-scene
operation without submasters, or press [3] [Enter] for singlescene operation with submasters.
Step 4:
Press [Stage] to return to the Stage display.
Playback Looks using the AB Fader Pair
Step 1:
Press [Setup] [1] [Enter] to open the System Settings menu.
Step 2:
Press [1][5] [Enter] to select the Scene Mode settings.
Step 3:
Press [1] [Enter] to set the console to two-scene operation.
Step 4:
Press [Stage] to return to the Stage display.
Note:
Step 6:
Slide the AB Fader Pair away from you to
crossfade from Scene B (Cue 2) back into Scene
A. Since you have changed the channel levels on
Scene A, you have crossfaded into “Cue 3”.
Hold
Continue this process to fade from cue to cue
manually.
If you place the A Fader and B Fader off their respective zero position
(for example, both at full), both Scene A and Scene B become active.
In that case, the channel fader at the highest level will control the
output for that channel.
Reference Fold-outs
Use the [AB-Clear] key to flash Scene At
to full, and the [AB-Back] key to flash
Scene B.
Playback Looks with Timing
For long crossfades, you may not want to crossfade manually between
scenes. You can set timing values for the upfade and downfade movement on
the AB Fader Pair. The crossfade is started by moving the AB Faders fully
away from you or fully toward you. The scene that is fading in will follow the
upfade time, and the scene that is fading out will follow the downfade time.
Crossfade scenes using timing:
Step 1:
Slide the AB Fader Pair to the top of their travel (away from you).
Step 2:
Move the channel faders on Scene A to the levels you want in your
first look (Cue 1). Lighting levels will change on stage.
Step 3:
Move the channel faders on Scene B to the levels needed in the
next look (Cue 2). This will not affect the stage output.
Step 4:
Press [AB-Rate] [x] [Enter], where [x] is the upfade time.
Step 5:
Press [x] [Enter], where [x] is the downfade time. If the downfade
time is the same as the upfade time, just press [Enter]. The Rate
key will blink to indicate that it is active.
Step 6:
Move the AB Faders toward you. When they reach the end of
travel, the timed fade will begin. Timing will remain active on the
AB Fader Pair until you press [AB-Rate] again.
Note:
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Move the channel faders on Scene A to the
levels needed in the next look (Cue 3). This
will not affect the stage output.
Back
4
3
2
1
0
Go
Step 5:
Note:
Channel faders are “mastered” by the AB Fader Pair when two-scene
operation is enabled. This means that the top row of channel faders, Scene A,
will be active when the A Fader in the AB Fader Pair is at the top of its travel
(farthest away from you). Channel faders in the bottom row, Scene B, are
active when the B Fader in the AB Fader Pair is at the bottom of its travel
(closest to you).
Setup two-scene operation:
D
Clear
Slide the AB Fader Pair toward you to crossfade from
Scene A (Cue 1) to Scene B (Cue 2). The speed at
which you move the AB Faders determines the
rate of change on stage.
Step 7:
Setup Two-scene Operation
To change the operation mode of your Express 24/48, 48/96 or 72/144, you
will need to use the Setup display. Once you have enabled two-scene
operation, the AB Fader Pair can only be used for crossfading between Scene
A and Scene B. If you want to playback recorded cues on the AB Fader Pair,
you will need to return to single-scene operation.
11
A
10
9
10
0
32
Move the channel faders on Scene B to the levels needed in
the next look (Cue 2). This will not affect the stage output.
Step 4:
14
Master
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
AB Fader Pair
You can pause a timed crossfade using the [AB-Hold] key. To resume
the fade, press [AB-Go].
302
Index
Numerics
16 Bit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
A
A/B Fader Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Dimmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Allfade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 114, 145
At . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Attribute Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
B
Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Back Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 117
Background fades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Blackout Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 134
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Blocked Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Blocked Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Bump Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
C
C/D Fader Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Captured channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Channel Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Channel Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Channel Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Clear Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Clock Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Contact ETC Technical Services . . . . . 3
Create a v3.1 Console Software Disk245
Crossfade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 145
Cue List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 139
Cue Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-Part Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cues. . . . . . . . . 112, 114, 118, 127,
as Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blind. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,
Follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,
Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tracksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
179
179
177
179
138
118
138
142
128
132
138
128
115
141
145
127
144
127
D
Default Fade Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Default Fader Clear Time. . . . . . . . . . 52
Default Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Default Sneak Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Real Time Program . . . . . . . . . . 197
Dimmer Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Dimmer Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Dimmer Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Display Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
DMX Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
DMX Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
E
EDMX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,
Facepanel Output Port Settings
Priority Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 123,
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blind. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
204
206
205
114
151
154
151
119
211
303
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Receive and Transmit . . . . . . . . 213
Emphasis
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 8
Dongle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Face Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Facepanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 7
Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 8
ESMPTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
ETC Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
ETC MIDI
Message format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
ETCNet2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Except. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Export
Show File to v3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Expression LED displays . . . . . . . . . . 35
F
Facepanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Facepanel Configuration. . . . . . . . . . 210
Facepanel Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 87
Fader Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fill Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 118
Fixture Patch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Flexichannel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 53
Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Focus Point List . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 166
Focus Points . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 112, 165
Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 168
Spreadsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
G
Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Grandmaster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 162
Groups . . . . . . 110, 112, 118, 126, 161
Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cues as Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 164
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
304
Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Submasters as Groups . . . . . . . 126
H
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
HTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
I
Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Independent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Independent Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Inhibitive Submasters. . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Install v3.1 Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
L
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 132
Dimmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
At . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Full Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Level Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Level Wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Trackpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Load Sub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
LTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 59
M
Macro List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Macro Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Macros
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
ETCLink Functions . . . . . . . . . . 189
Key List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Remote Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Remote Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Remote Trigger Functions . . . . . 189
Startup Macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Submaster Functions . . . . . . . . . 189
Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Master Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
ETC MIDI Message Formats . . . 213
Message definitions . . . . . . . . . . 214
MIDI Show Control . . . . . . . . . . . 216
MSC Frame Packet . . . . . . . . . . 217
MIDI Show Control
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Message definitions . . . . . . . . . . 214
MLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Moving Light Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Moving Light Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Moving Light Module (MLM) . . . . . . . . 26
Multi-Part Cues . . . . . . . . .128, 138, 179
N
Number of Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Number of Dimmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Number of Effect Step Channels . . . . 53
O
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
OpenGL Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Options Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
P
Palettes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 111
Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Dimmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Focus Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Unpark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Part Cues, see Multi-Part Cues
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 72
CD80 Dimmer Rack. . . . . . . . . . . 81
Personality Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Playback Cue List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Power-up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Print Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Proportional Patching. . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Q
Quickstep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
R
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 177
Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Real Time Programs . . . . . . . . . 58, 194
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Time and Location . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Record
Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Record Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Remote Focus Unit (RFU) . . . . . 24, 255
Remote Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 207
Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Remote Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 208
RFU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 255
S
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Dimmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Solo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Set Channels/Submasters 1-to-1 . . . . 54
Show Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Shut-down Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
305
SMPTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
ESMPTE ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Sneak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Solo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 100, 130
Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 136, 141
Cues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Focus Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 86
Startup Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Sub Grandmaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Submaster List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 156
Submaster Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Submasters112, 123, 126, 129, 156, 181
as Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 159
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 181
Inhibitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Load Sub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Pile-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Spreadsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Subroutines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Style Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Subroutines on Submasters . . . 148, 181
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Style Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Supermasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 182
System Manager Password . . . . . . . . 17
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Multi-Part Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Submasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Valid Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Time Code Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Time Code Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Events Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
External Time Code . . . . . . . . . . 226
Frame Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Internal Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . 226
Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Manual Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Reset Loop Time . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 117
Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 116
Back Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Fill Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Track Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Tracksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 137, 144
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
U
Unpark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
V
v3.1 Software Channel Limitations. . 244
W
Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Wireless Remote Focus Unit (WRFU) 25
WRFU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
T
Technical Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Cues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Follow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
306
Emphasis Console v2.0.0 User Manual
Americas „ 3031 Pleasant View Road, P.O. Box 620979, Middleton, Wisconsin 53562-0979 USA „ Tel: +1 608 831 4116 „ 800 688 4116 „ Fax: +1 608 836 1736 „ 800 555 8912
Europe „ Unit 5, Victoria Industrial Estate, Victoria Road, London W3 6UU, UK „ Tel: +44 (0)20 8896 1000 „ Fax: +44 (0)20 8896 2000
Asia „ Room 605-606, Tower III Enterprise Square, 9 Sheung Yuet Road, Kowloon Bay, Kowloon, Hong Kong „ Tel: +852 2799 1220 „ Fax: +852 2799 9325
Web: www.etcconnect.com „ Email: (US) mail@etcconnect.com „ (UK) mail@etceurope.com „ (Asia) mail@etcasia.com
Service: service@etcconnect.com „ Toll free: 800 775 4382 „ Comments about this document: techcomm@etcconnect.com
4200M1211-2.0.1 „ Rev A „ Released 11/2004 „ Copyright © 2004 Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Product information and specifications subject to change.
Download PDF

advertising